OWNER’S

MANUAL
Arona
6F9012720BB
Inglés 6F9012720BB (11.17)

Arona Inglés
­­ (11.17)
SEAT recommends SEAT recommends
SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional
About this manual The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
For the sake of the environment

versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the tional extras for some versions, or are
protection.
time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries.
units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with
Note
until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does
tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
Because this is a general manual for the >> The section is continued on the follow-
ARONA, some of the equipment and functions ing page.
that are described in this manual are not in- This manual is divided into six large parts,
cluded in all types or variants of the model; Important warnings on a given page which are:
they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials
the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page
3. Emergencies
The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details. 5. Tips
WARNING
The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the mation on safety. They warn you about possi- At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- ble dangers of accident or injury. alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
cept when otherwise indicated. find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
The audiovisual material only is intended to CAUTION All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
help users to understand certain car function- or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
alities better. It does not replace the instruc- Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
al to obtain more comprehensive information
and indications. All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.17
Foreword
This Instruction Manual and its correspond- You can access the information in this man- Thank you for trusting in us.
ing supplements should be read carefully to ual using:
familiarise yourself with your vehicle. ● Thematic table of contents that follows the
We wish you safe and enjoya-
Besides the regular care and maintenance of manual’s general chapter structure. ble motoring.
the vehicle, its correct handling will help pre- ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics
serve its value. to indicate the pages containing “essential” SEAT, S.A.
For safety reasons, always note the informa- information, which is detailed in the corre-
tion concerning accessories, modifications sponding chapters.
and part replacements. ● Alphabetical index with many terms and
If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board synonyms to help you find information.
documentation to the new owner, as it
WARNING
should be kept with the vehicle.
Read and always observe safety informa-
tion concerning the passenger's front air-
bag ››› page 92, Important information
regarding the front passenger's airbag.
Related videos

The essentials: Vehicle interior ››› page 18, ››› page 20,
The essentials: Opening and closing ››› page 15
››› page 23
www.seat.com/youtube-af/ibiza/essentials-locking
www.seat.com/youtube-af/ibiza/essentials-insidecar

The essentials: Engine bonnet ››› page 17 The essentials: Wheels ››› page 64, ››› page 65

www.seat.com/youtube-af/ibiza/essentials-bonnet www.seat.com/youtube-af/ibiza/essentials-wheels

The essentials: Dashboard ››› page 31, ››› page 45,

The essentials: Air conditioner ››› page 51
››› page 47
www.seat.com/youtube-af/ibiza/essentials-aircond
www.seat.com/youtube-af/ibiza/essentials-dashboard
Convenience: Kessy keyless access and starting system, Full LED (+ Vision Pack): Full LED + Welcome light + LED day- ››› page 135
time running lights + Lights sensor + LED interior lighting. ››› page 146
››› page 148
www.seat.com/youtube-af/ibiza/comfort ››› page 202

Technology: SEAT Navi System Plus 8” + Full Link / + Wireless charger in centre console + / Kessy keyless access and
starting system.
››› page 129
››› page 135
www.seat.com/youtube-af/ibiza/technology
››› Booklet Navigation system

Safety: Adaptive cruise control + city safety assist with pedestrian monitoring, drowsiness detection, hill-start assist ››› page 187
system; includes on-board computer and rear view camera. ››› page 214
››› page 231
www.seat.com/youtube-af/safety ››› page 246
Frequently Asked Ques- Where is the vehicle tool kit located? ››› page 65 How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid?
››› page 60
tions How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture kit?
››› page 64 How do you check and top up the brake fluid?
››› page 60
Before driving How do you change a wheel? ››› page 65
How do you check and adjust tyre pressure values?
How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 18 How do you change a fuse? ››› page 62 ››› page 284
How do you adjust the steering wheel? ››› page 20 How do you change a light? ››› page 63 Vehicle washing tips ››› page 261

How do you adjust the exterior mirrors? ››› page 20 How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 70
Functions of interest
How do you turn on the exterior lights? ››› page 31
Useful tips Easy Connect, CAR menu ››› page 34
How does the automatic gearbox selector lever work?
How do you set the time? ››› page 118 How does the START-STOP system work? ››› page 202
››› page 50
When should the vehicle inspection should be per- What parking assistants are available? ››› page 240
How do you refuel? ››› page 57
formed? ››› page 43
How do you activate the windscreen wipers and wind- How does the rear assist work? ››› page 246
What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels on the
screen washer system? ››› page 33
steering wheel perform? ››› page 124 How does the adaptive cruise control work?
››› page 214
Emergency situations How do you remove the luggage compartment cover?
››› page 161 How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted?
A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does this ››› page 229
mean? ››› page 47 How do you drive in an economical and environmental-
ly-friendly way? ››› page 198 How does tyre pressure monitoring work? ››› page 287
Where are the first-aid kit and the warning triangle in
the vehicle? ››› page 97 How do you check and top up the engine oil? How do you open the vehicle without a key (Keyless Ac-
››› page 58 cess)? ››› page 135
How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 17
How do you check and top up the engine coolant? Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 148
How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 71 ››› page 59
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . .
71
73
Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . .
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
117
Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
The essentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Introduction to the Easy Connect system* . . . . 122
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
System settings (CAR)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Communications and multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Driver-side general instrument panel (left- Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Steering wheel controls* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Correct position of the vehicle occupants . . . . 76 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Driver-side general instrument panel (right- Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Why wear a seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Passenger-side general instrument panel (left- How to properly adjust your seatbelt . . . . . . . . 84
hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Anti-theft alarm* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Seat belt tensioners* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Passenger-side general instrument panel Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
(right-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Safety instructions about airbags . . . . . . . . . . . 88
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys-
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Description and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Adjusting the seat and head restraints . . . . . . 152
Driver information System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . 156
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 100 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Towing or tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Change the front bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Manual air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Change the rear bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Changing the interior bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 70
General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5
 Table of Contents

Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear- Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Engine management and emission control sys- Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel)* . . . . . . 288
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Start-Stop System* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Emergency brake assist system (Front As- Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
sist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis- Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
tance (RCTA)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
SEAT Drive Profile* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Fatigue detection (break recommendation)* . . 231
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Park Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Parking aid (Park Pilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Accessories and modifications to the vehi-
cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Caring for the vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . 273
6
 The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 16 5 ››› page 70

2 ››› page 57 6 ››› page 17
3 ››› page 15 7 ››› page 64
4 ››› page 57
7
 The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 59 5 ››› page 58 9 ››› page 30

2 ››› page 58 6 ››› page 60 10 ››› page 65
3 ››› page 60 7 ››› page 60 11 ››› page 64
4 ››› page 62 8 ›››  page 160
8
 The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 32 5 ››› page 18 9 ››› page 37

2 ››› page 45 6 ››› page 17 10 ››› page 31
3 ››› page 31 7 ››› page 47 11 ››› page 20
4 ››› page 20 8 ››› page 33 12 ››› page 62
9
 The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 33 5 ››› page 18 9 ››› page 45

2 ››› page 37 6 ››› page 31 10 ››› page 20
3 ››› page 31 7 ››› page 47 11 ››› page 62
4 ››› page 20 8 ››› page 32
10
 The essentials

Centre console

1 ››› page 32 3 ›››  page 176 5 ››› page 34

2 ››› page 49 4 ››› page 15 6 ››› page 51, ››› page 53
The layout in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical.

11
 The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 20
2 ››› page 18
3 ›››  page 156

12
 The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 20
2 ››› page 18
3 ››› page 17
4 ›››  page 156
13
 The essentials

Interior view

1 ››› page 19 5 ››› page 18

2 ››› page 19 6 ››› page 22
3 ›››  page 150
4 ››› page 27
14
 The essentials

How it works
 ››› in Description on page 132

Opening and closing

 ››› page 132

Related video

Unlocking or locking of driver door

Fig. 3 Centre console: Central lock buttons.

Fig. 1 Opening and clos-
ing Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the
key
● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button.
Doors ● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 2 button.
● Unlocking the rear lid: press the 
››› Fig. 2 button until all the turn signals on
the vehicle briefly light up. Fig. 4 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.

Locking and unlocking with the central lock- If the central locking system should fail to op-
ing switch erate, the driver door can still be locked and
● Locking: press the  ››› Fig. 3 button. The  unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
symbol lights up yellow to indicate that it is As a general rule, when the driver door is
activated. None of the doors can be opened locked manually all other doors are locked.
from the outside. The doors can be opened When it is unlocked manually, only the driver
from the inside by pulling the inside door door opens. Please observe the instructions
Fig. 2 Remote control key: buttons.
handle. relating to the anti-theft alarm system
● Unlocking: press the  ››› Fig. 3 button ›››  page 138.
again. The symbol reverts to its initial colour.
● Unfold the vehicle key blade
›››  page 130. »
15
 The essentials

● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening Emergency locking of doors without Rear lid
in the cover on the driver door handle door cylinder
››› Fig. 4 (arrow) then remove the cover up-
wards.
● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder
to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special Characteristics
● The anti-theft alarm will remain active when
vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm
will not be triggered ›››  page 138.
● After the driver door is opened, you have
Fig. 6 Rear lid: handle
15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once
Fig. 5 Locking the door manually.
this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. The rear lid opening system operates electri-
● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im- If the central locking system should fail to cally*. It is activated by exerting slight pres-
mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder sure on the handle ››› Fig. 6.
deactivates the anti-theft alarm system. will have to be locked separately. This system may or may not be operative, de-
A mechanical locking device (only visible pending on the situation of the vehicle.
Note
when the door is open) is provided on the If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the front passenger door.
vehicle is locked manually using the key opened, however if it is unlocked then the
shaft ›››  page 138. ● Pull the cap out of the opening. opening system is operative and the rear lid
may be opened.
● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it
to the right as far as it will go (if the door is To lock/unlock, press the button  or button
on the right side) or to the left (if the door is  ››› Fig. 2 on the remote control key.
on the left side). A warning appears on the instrument panel
display if the rear lid is open or not properly
Once the door has been closed it can no lon-
closed.* An audible warning is also given if
ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-
the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is
rior door handle once to unlock and open the
moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
door.

16
 The essentials

● Opening the rear lid: exert slight pressure There is a groove in the luggage compart- Bonnet
on the handle ››› Fig. 6. The rear lid opens au- ment allowing access to the emergency
tomatically. opening mechanism.
● Closing the rear lid: hold it by one of the
handles on the interior lining and close it by Opening the rear lid from inside the luggage
pushing gently. compartment
● Insert the key in the groove and unlock the
›››
 in Opening and closing on
page 141
locking system, turning the key from right to
left, as shown by the arrow ››› Fig. 7.

 ››› page 17
Related video
Fig. 9 Release lever in the driver's footwell
area.
Unlocking the rear lid manually

Fig. 8 Bonnet

Fig. 10 Lever under the bonnet.

Fig. 7 Unlocking the rear lid manually.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure that

This allows the vehicle to be opened if the
the windscreen wiper arms are in place
central locking does not work (for example, if
against the windscreen.
the battery is flat).
● Open the door and pull the lever under the
dashboard ››› Fig. 9 1 . »
17
 The essentials

● To lift the bonnet, press towards the left on Buttons on the driver door Manually adjusting the front seats
the lever located under the bonnet, in the 1 Window on the front left door
centre ››› Fig. 10 2 . The arrester hooks are
released. 2 Window on the front right door
● Release the bonnet stay and secure it in 3 Window on the rear left door
the fixture designed for this in the bonnet. 4 Window on the rear right door
5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric
›››
 in Safety notes for work in the en-
gine compartment on page 273
window buttons in the rear doors.

›››
 ››› page 273  in Opening and closing of the elec-
tric windows on page 141

 ››› page 141

Controls for the windows Fig. 13 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.

1 Forward/back: pull the lever and move

Before driving the seat forwards or backwards.
2 Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever.
Related video
3 Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.

›››
 in Adjusting the front seats on
page 152

Fig. 12 Vehicle interior

Fig. 11 Detail of the driver door: controls for

the windows.

● Opening the window: Press the  button.

● Closing the window: Pull the  button.
18
 The essentials

Adjusting the head restraints Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 16 Correct seat belt and head restraint

positions, viewed from front and the side.
Fig. 14 Front seat: adjustment of the head re-
straint. To adjust the seat belt around your should-
ers, adjust the height of the seats.
● To raise or lower the head restraint, press
The shoulder part of the seat belt should be
the side button 1 and move it upwards or
well centred over it, never over the neck. The
downwards until it engages in the desired
seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the
position.
upper part of the body.
››› The lap part of the seat belt lies across the
 in Adjusting the front head re-
straints on page 152
Fig. 15 Positioning and removing the seat
pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat
belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-
 ››› page 79, ››› page 152
belt buckle.
vis.

 ››› page 82

 ››› page 84

19
 The essentials

Seat belt tensioners side (L, left) and the passenger side (R, Airbags
right) to the direction desired.
During a collision, the seat belts on the front Folding in mirrors.
 Related video
seats are retracted automatically.
›››
The tensioner can be triggered only once.
 in Electric exterior mirrors* on
page 151
›››
 in Maintenance and disposal of belt
tensioners on page 86  ››› page 151

 ››› page 85
Fig. 19 Vehicle interior
Adjusting the steering wheel

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 18 Lever in the lower left side of the

steering column.
Fig. 17 Detail of the driver door: control for
the exterior mirror. ● Adjusting the position of the steering
wheel: Pull the ››› Fig. 18 1 lever down,
Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob move the steering wheel to the desired posi-
to the corresponding position: tion and lift the lever back up until it locks.

L/R Turning the knob to the desired posi- ›››

tion, adjust the mirrors on the driver  in Adjusting the steering wheel po-
sition on page 77

20
 The essentials

Front airbags and chest in the event of a severe frontal col-

lision.
The special design of the airbag allows the
controlled escape of the propellant gas when
an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus,
the head and chest are surrounded and pro-
tected by the airbag. After the collision, the
airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.

 ››› page 88

Fig. 21 Front passenger airbag located in

dash panel.
Fig. 20 Driver airbag located in steering
wheel. The front airbag for the driver is located in
the steering wheel ››› Fig. 20 and the airbag
for the front passenger is located in the dash
panel ››› Fig. 21. Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
When the driver and front passenger airbags
are deployed, the covers remain attached to
the steering wheel and dashboard, respec-
tively ››› Fig. 20 ››› Fig. 21.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the driver and the front
passenger additional protection for the head
21
 The essentials

Deactivating the front passenger front ● Open the door on the front passenger side. Side airbags*
airbag* ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
››› Fig. 22. About 3/4 of the key should enter;
this is as far as it will go.
● Turn the key gently to the  position. If
you have difficulty, ensure that you have in-
serted the key as far as it will go.
● Close the front passenger door.
● Check, with the ignition switched on, that
the   control lamp remains lit where it
says      in the centre of the Fig. 24 Side airbag in driver's seat.
Fig. 22 Front passenger front airbag switch. dash panel ››› Fig. 23.

›››
 in Activation and deactivation of
front passenger airbag* on page 91

 ››› page 90

Fig. 25 Illustration of completely inflated side

Fig. 23 Centre side of dash panel: control airbag on left side of vehicle.
lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag
in centre console. The side airbags are located in the driver's
seat and front passenger seat backrests
To deactivate the front passenger front air- ››› Fig. 24. The locations are identified by the
bag: text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the
● Switch the ignition off.
backrests.

22
 The essentials

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side There is a head airbag on each side of the in- Important information regarding the
airbag system provides additional protection terior above the doors ››› Fig. 26. Airbags are front passenger's airbag
for the upper body in the event of a severe identified by the word “AIRBAG”.
side collision.
The area framed in red is covered by the
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce head-protection airbag when it is deployed
the risk of injury to passengers to the areas ››› Fig. 26 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-
of the body facing the impact. In addition to jects should never be placed or mounted in
their normal function of protecting the occu- this area ››› in Head-protection airbags* on
pants in a collision, the front and rear outer page 89.
seat belts also hold the passengers in the
In the event of a side collision the curtain air-
event of a side collision; this is how these air-
bag is triggered on the impact side of the ve-
bags provide maximum protection.
hicle.
The head-protection airbags reduce the risk
 ››› in Side airbags* on page 88
of injury to passengers in the front and rear
side seats facing the impact.

›››
Head-protection airbags*  in Head-protection airbags* on
page 89

Child seats
Fig. 28 Airbag stickers - version 1: on the
Related video passenger-side sun blind  and on the rear
frame of the front passenger's door . »

Fig. 26 Location and deployment area of the

head-protection airbag.
Fig. 27 Vehicle interior

23
 The essentials

A sticker with important information about

the passenger airbag is located on the pas-
senger's sun visor and/or on the passenger
side door frame.

›››
 in Important information regarding
the front passenger's airbag on page 92

 ››› page 92

Fig. 29 Airbag stickers - version 2: on the

passenger-side sun blind  and on the rear
frame of the front passenger's door .

24
 The essentials

Securing child seats

Fig. 30 On the rear seats: Possible installations

for the child seat.

Figure ››› Fig. 30 A shows the basic child re- passenger seat in its rearmost and highest perfect position, adjust the passenger back-
straint system mounting using lower retain- position1). rest as far forward as possible1).
ing rings and the upper retaining strap. Fig-
To correctly use a child seat in the back, the If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-
ure ››› Fig. 30 B shows the child restraint
front backrest must be adjusted so that there led, in which the method of attachment to
system mounting using the vehicle seat belt.
is no contact with the child seat in the back the car is through the seat belt and support
The seat belt may be used to secure univer- in the case that it goes opposite to the direc- bracket, it should never be installed in the
sal type child seats to the vehicle seats tion of the car. In the case of front facing re- central rear seat as the ground clearance is
marked with a U in the table below. straint systems, the front backrest must be lower than in other places and the support
adjusted so that there is no contact with the bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-
● In a front passenger seat without height ad- child's feet. ciently stable.
justment: It is necessary to place the front
passenger seat in its rearmost position 1). To adjust the passenger seat to accommo- The systems include the child restraint sys-
date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a tem mounting with an upper retaining strap
● In a front passenger seat with height ad-
(Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on
justment: it is necessary to place the front »
the seat.

1) Compliance with current national legislation and

the manufacturer's instructions is required when us-

ing or installing child seats.
25
 The essentials

Seating position

Weight group Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg X Uc) U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X Uc) U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X Uc) U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UFc) UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UFc) UF UF

X: It is not compatible to install chairs in this configuration.

U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.
UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.
a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.
b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.
c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

 ››› in Safety instructions on page 93

26
 The essentials

Securing child seats with the ISOFIX/iSize and Top Tether system*

Fig. 31 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings. Fig. 32 Position of the Top Tether rings on the
back of the rear seat.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily FIX” rings are located between the rear seat To understand the compatibility of the "ISO-
and safely on the rear outer seats with the backrest and the seat cushioning ››› Fig. 31. FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table
“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system. The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear below.
part of the backrests of the rear seats (be-
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on The body weight permitted and information
hind the seat backrest or in the boot)
each rear seat. In some vehicles, the rings regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the la-
are secured to the seat frame and, in others,
››› Fig. 32. bel on child seats with “universal” or “semi-
they are secured to the rear floor. The “ISO- universal” certification.

Vehicle Isofix positions

Electrical equip-
Weight group Size class Front passenger seat
ment Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag on airbag off
F ISO/L1 X X X X
Baby carrier
G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X »

27
 The essentials

Vehicle Isofix positions

Electrical equip-
Weight group Size class Front passenger seat
ment Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag on airbag off
E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- --- ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- --- ---

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group.
IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list
into account.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

 ››› in Safety instructions on page 93

28
 The essentials

Securing child seats with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” ISOFIX System

Fig. 33 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings. Fig. 34 Rear seat: cut-out grooves.

You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- engage securely. If the child seat is equipped Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
turer's instructions. with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to attachment system are available from Techni-
the correspondent ring ››› Fig. 36. Observe cal Services.
● Open the cut-out section behind the the manufacturer's instructions.
marked grooves to access the retaining rings
● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-
››› Fig. 34.
sure that it is properly anchored.
● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX/iSize”
retaining rings until the child seat is heard to

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat

Rear side seat Rear central seat
airbag on airbag off
Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X

i-U Valid position for front-facing and rear-facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.
X: Invalid position for child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

29
 The essentials

Securing child seats with the Top Securing the retainer strap
Tether* retaining straps ● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to
deploy the child seat Top Tether retainer
strap.
● Place the belt under the head restraint of
the back seat ››› Fig. 35 (depending on the in-
structions of the chair itself, lift or remove the
head restraint if necessary).
● Slide the strap and secure it properly with
the anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 36.
Fig. 36 Position of the Top Tether rings on the
back of the rear seat. ● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-
facturer's instructions.
Child seats with the Top Tether system come
with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- Releasing the retaining strap
cle anchor point, located at the back of the ● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-
rear seat backrest and provide greater re- er's instructions.
straint.
● Push the lock and release it from the an-
The objective of this strap is to reduce for- choring support.
ward movements of the child seat in a crash,
to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from
hitting the inside of the vehicle.  ››› in Safety instructions on page 93

Fig. 35 Retainer strap: adjustment and as- Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted
sembly according to the Top Tether belt. seats
Currently, there are very few rear-facing child
safety seats that have Top Tether. Please
carefully read and follow the seat manufac-
turer instructions to learn the proper way to
install the Top Tether strap.

30
 The essentials

Starting the vehicle Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow Lights and visibility
plugs reheating
Ignition lock ● Switch ignition on: Turn the key to the 2 Related video
position.
● Switch ignition off. Turn the key to the 1
position.
● Diesel vehicles : The glow plugs reheat
when the ignition is switched on.

Starting the engine Fig. 38 Dash panel

● Manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal all
the way down and move the gearbox lever in-
to neutral. Light switch
Fig. 37 Ignition key positions. ● Automatic gearbox: Press the brake pedal
and move the selector lever to the P position
Switch ignition on: Place the key in the igni- or into N.
tion and start the engine. ● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key au-
tomatically returns to the 2 position. Do not
Locking and unlocking the steering wheel press the accelerator.
● Engaging the steering wheel lock: Remove
the key from the ignition and turn the wheel Start-Stop System*
until it locks. In vehicles with an automatic When you stop and release the clutch pedal,
gearbox, the gear lever must be in the P posi- the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.
tion in order to remove the key. If necessary, The ignition remains switched on.
press the locking key on the selector lever Fig. 39 Dash panel: light control.
and release it again. ›››
● Unlocking the steering wheel: Put the key
into the ignition and turn it at the same time
 in Ignition key positions on
page 173
● Turn the switch to the required position
››› Fig. 39. »
as the steering wheel in the direction indica-
ted by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn
 ››› page 173

the steering wheel, it may be because it is

locked.
31
 The essentials

Sym- Ignition switch- Ignition is switch- Turn signal and main beam lever Hazard warning lights
bol ed off ed on
Fog lights, dipped
Light off or daytime
 beam and side
driving light on.
lights off.

The “Coming home”

and “Leaving Automatic control of
 home” guide lights dipped beam and day-
may be switched time running light.
on.

Daylight running
 Side light on.
lights switched on. Fig. 41 Dash panel: switch for hazard warn-
Fig. 40 Turn signal and main beam lever.
Dipped beam head- Dipped beam switch-
ing lights.
 light off ed on. More the lever to the required position:
Switched on, for example:
 Front fog lights: move the switch to the 1 Right turn signal: Right-hand parking
light (ignition switched off). ● When approaching a traffic jam
first position, from positions ,  or .
2 Left turn signal: Left-hand parking light ● In an emergency
 Rear fog light: move the switch completely
(ignition switched off). ● The vehicle has broken down
from positions ,  or .
3 Main beam switched on: Control lamp  ● When towing or being towed
Switching off fog lights: Push the switch or lit up on the instrument panel.
turn it to the  position.
›››
4 Headlight flasher: lit up when the lever is
pushed. Control lamp  lit up.  in Hazard warning lights  on
page 148

 ››› page 144

Lever all the way down to switch it off.
 ››› page 147

›››
 in Turn signal and main beam lever
on page 145

 ››› page 145

32
 The essentials

Interior lights The light controls may vary depending on the More the lever to the required position:
vehicle version.
Windscreen wipers interval wipe.
Using the control ››› Fig. 43 A adjust the
 ››› page 148 1  interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or
the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2  Slow wipe.

Windscreen wipers and window wiper 3  Continuous wipe.
blade
4  Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.

Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer

function is activated by pushing the lever
Fig. 42 Detail of headliner: front interior light- 5  forwards, and simultaneously the wind-
ing.
screen wipers start.

Knob Function Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper

6  will wipe the window approximately every
six seconds.
 Turning the interior lights on or off.

Activating or deactivating the automatic The rear window wash function is activa-
door contact lights. 7  ted by pressing the lever, and the rear
The interior lights come on automatically wiper starts simultaneously.
Fig. 43 Operating the windscreen wiper and
when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is
rear wiper.
 opened or the key is removed from the ›››
ignition.
The light goes off a few seconds after all More the lever to the required position:
 in Windscreen wiper and window
wiper on page 149

the doors are closed, the vehicle is

locked or the ignition is switched on. 0  Windscreen wiper off.  ››› page 149

/ Turning the reading light on and off

 ››› page 73

33
 The essentials

Easy Connect
CAR menu settings

Fig. 44 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 45 Easy Connect: CAR menu.

The actual number of menus available and or, press the Infotainment button  /  to Pressing the menu button  will always take
the name of the various options will depend go to the Vehicle menu ››› Fig. 45. you to the last menu used.
on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment. ● Press the SETTINGS function button to open Any changes made using the settings menus
● Switch the ignition on. the Vehicle settings menu. are automatically saved on closing those me-
● To select a function in the menu, press the nus.
● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it
on. desired button.
● Press the Infotainment button  /  and When the function button check box is activa-
then the Vehicle function button ››› Fig. 44, ted , the function is active.

34
 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 181
Tyre monitor system Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 287
Tyres
Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning
Winter tyres
value
››› page 289

Light assist
Motorway function, turning-on time, automatic lights when raining, one-touch ››› page 144,
signalling. ››› page 147
Lights
Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 148
“Coming home/Leaving home” function Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions ››› page 146
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Switch on/off default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 214
Front Assist (emergency brake as-
Driver assistance
sist system)
Switch on/off Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning display ››› page 210

Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 231

Parking and manoeu- Automatically activate front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear sound
vring
Parking and manoeuvring settings
treble
››› page 244

Ambient lighting – Background lighting, switch-off, colour ››› page 148

Mirrors and wind-

Rear view mirrors Activate/deactivate folding after parking ››› page 151
screen wipers
Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic wipe in case of rain, wipe when reversing ››› page 33
Electric windows control Convenience open function, all, only driver ››› page 142
Opening and closing
Central locking system Unlocking doors, automatic lock when driving ››› page 132
Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Ad-
vice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed display,
Instrument panel – ››› page 38
speed warning, oil temperature, reset data “when setting off”, reset data for
“total calculation”

Date and time – Time, summer time, time zone, time format, date, date format ››› page 118 »
35
 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, pressure –

Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change
Service –
service
››› page 43

All Restore all settings

Factory settings –
Individual Restore factory settings for lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring

 ››› in CAR menu on page 123

36
 The essentials

Driver information System ■ MFD from refuelling Operating the instrument panel me-
■ MFD total calculation nus
Introduction Assist systems ››› page 40

With the ignition switched on, it is possible Navigation ››› Booklet Navigation system
to read the different functions of the display Audio ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet Naviga-
by scrolling through the menus. tion system
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, Telephone ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet
the multifunction display can only be operat- Navigation system
ed with the steering wheel buttons.
Vehicle status ››› page 34
The number of menus displayed on the in-
strument panel will vary according to the ve- WARNING
hicle electronics and equipment. Fig. 46 Windscreen wiper lever: control but-
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
A specialised workshop will be able to pro- tons.
the risk of injury.
gramme or modify additional functions, ac- ● Do not operate the instrument panel con-
cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec- trols when driving.
ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is at a standstill.
As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it
will not be possible to read the menus
››› page 41. Some warning messages can
be confirmed and made to disappear with the
windscreen wiper lever button or the multi-
function steering wheel button. Fig. 47 Right side of multifunction steering
wheel: control buttons.
The information system also provides the fol-
lowing information and displays (depending
The driver information system is controlled
on the vehicle's equipment):
with the multifunction steering wheel buttons
Driving data ››› page 38 ››› Fig. 47 or with the windscreen wiper lever
■ MFD from departure
››› Fig. 46 (if the vehicle is not equipped with
multifunction steering wheel). »
37
 The essentials

Enabling the main menu thumbwheel of the multifunction steering Menu Function
● Switch the ignition on. wheel. To increase or decrease the values
more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster. Information and possible configura-
● If a message or vehicle pictogram appears, tions of the mobile phone preinstalla-
● Mark or confirm the selection with button Telephone
press button ››› Fig. 46 1 on the windscreen tion ››› Booklet Radio or ››› Booklet
wiper lever or button  on the multifunction ››› Fig. 46 1 on the windscreen wiper lever Navigation system.
steering wheel ››› Fig. 47. or button  on the multifunction steering
wheel ››› Fig. 47. Display of the current warning or infor-
● If managed from the windscreen wiper lev- Vehicle mation texts and other system compo-
er: to display the main screen or to return to status nents, depending on the equipment
the main menu from another menu, hold ››› page 122.
down the rocker button ››› Fig. 46 2 .
Selection menu
● If managed from the multifunction steering
Menu Function Journey data
wheel: the main menu list is not displayed.
To go from point to point in the main menu, Information and possible configura-
Driving The MFD (multifunction display) shows differ-
press button   or   several times data
tions of the multifunction display
››› Fig. 47. (MFD) ››› page 38, ››› page 122. ent values for the journey and the consump-
tion.
Information and possible configura-
Select a submenu Assist
tions of the driver assistance systems
systems
››› page 40. Changing between display modes on the
● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 46 2 on the
MFD
windscreen wiper lever up or down or turn Information instructions from the acti-
● In vehicles without multifunction steering
the thumbwheel of the multifunction steering vated navigation system: when a route
wheel ››› Fig. 47 until the desired option ap- guidance is activated, the turning ar- wheel: Press the rocker switch  on the
pears marked on the menu. rows and proximity bars are displayed. windscreen wiper lever ››› Fig. 46.
The appearance is similar to the Easy ● Vehicles with a multifunction steering
● The selected option will be displayed with a Navigation* Connect system.
horizontal line underneath. If route guidance is not activated, the wheel: turn the thumbwheel ››› Fig. 47.
● To consult the submenu option, press but- direction of travel (compass) and the
name of the street along which you are Multifunction display memory
ton ››› Fig. 46 1 on the windscreen wiper driving are shown ››› Booklet Naviga-
lever or button  on the multifunction steer- tion system. The multifunction display is equipped with
ing wheel ››› Fig. 47. three memories that work automatically: MFD
Station display on the radio. from departure, MFD from refuelling and MFD
Track name on the CD. total calculation. On the screen display, you
Making changes according to the menu Audio Track name in Media mode ››› Booklet
can read which memory is currently dis-
● Make the desired changes with the rocker Radio or ››› Booklet Navigation sys-
tem. played.
switch on the windscreen wiper lever or the
38
 The essentials

Toggle between memories with the ignition Erasing a memory manually Menu Function
on and the memory displayed ● Select the memory that you wish to erase.
Approximate distance in km that
Press the  button on the windscreen ● Hold the  button of the multifunction can still be travelled with the fuel
wiper lever or the  button of the multifunc- steering wheel or the  button of the multi- Operating remaining in the tank, assuming
tion steering wheel. function wheel pressed down for about 2 sec- range the same style of driving is main-
onds. tained. This is calculated using
Menu Function the current fuel consumption.

Display and storage of the values for Personalising the displays This indicates the hours (h) and
Travelling
the journey and the consumption minutes (min) since the ignition
In the Easy Connect system you can adjust time
was switched on.
from when the ignition is switched
which of the possible displays of the MFD can
on to when it is switched off.
If the journey is continued in less be shown on the instrument panel display Journey
Distance covered in km (m) after
MFD from de- with the  button and the SETTINGS function switching on the ignition.
than 2 hours after the ignition is
parture
switched off, the new data is added button ›››  page 122. The average speed will be shown
to the data already stored in the after a distance of about 100 me-
memory. The memory will automati- Data summary tres has been travelled. Otherwise
cally be deleted if the journey is in- Average speed
horizontal lines are displayed.
terrupted for more than 2 hours. Menu Function The value shown is updated ap-
proximately every 5 seconds.
Display and storage of the values for The current fuel consumption dis-
MFD from re- the journey and the consumption. play operates throughout the Digital dis- Current speed displayed in digital
fuelling By refuelling, the memory will be Current fuel
journey, in litres/100 km; and play of speed format.
erased automatically. consumption
with the engine running and the
vehicle stopped, in litres/hour. If the stored speed is exceeded
The memory records the values for a Speed warning
(between 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 -
specific number of partial trips, up at --- km/h or
After turning on the ignition, aver- 155 mph), an audible warning is
to a total of 19 hours and 59 mi- Speed warning
age fuel consumption in li- given together with a visual warn-
nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, at --- mph
tres/100 km will be displayed af- ing.
MFD total or 1999.9 km or 9999 km, depend- ter travelling about 300 metres.
calculation ing on the model of instrument pan- Average fuel Otherwise horizontal lines are Oil tempera- Updated engine oil temperature
el. On reaching either of these lim- consumption displayed. The value shown is up- ture digital display
itsa), the memory is automatically dated approximately every 5 sec-
erased and starts to count from 0 Coolant tem- Digital display of the current tem-
again.
onds.
ACT®*: Depending on the equip- perature gauge perature of the liquid coolant. »
a) ment, number of active cylinders.
It varies according to the instrument panel version.

39
 The essentials

Menu Function Assist systems menu Status display

Information about the vehicle’s
Menu Function Bonnet, rear lid and doors open
Convenience main convenience consumers. It
consumers is displayed by means of a con- Display of Adaptive Cruise Control
sumption indicator bar. ACC
(ACC) ››› page 214.
Eco tips Tips on how to save fuel. Switching the monitoring system
Front Assist
on and off ››› page 210.
Reset data
Reset journey data when setting
“when setting Switching the Blind Spot Detec-
off.
off” Blind spot tion system (BSD) on or off
Reset data for
››› page 224
“total calcu- Reset travel journey to zero. Switching the fatigue detection
lation” Fatigue detec-
on or off (pause recommenda-
tion*
tion) ››› page 231.
Storing a speed with the speed warning
● Select the display Speed warning at
--- km/h (--- mph)
● Press the button  on the windscreen
wiper lever or the button  on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel to store the current speed
and activate the warning.
● To switch system on: adjust to the desired
speed within 5 seconds using the rocker
switch  on the windscreen wiper lever or Fig. 48 A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C:
by turning the thumbwheel on the multifunc- front left door open; D: rear right door open
tion steering wheel. Next, press the button (5-door vehicles only).
 or  again or wait several seconds.
The speed is stored and the warning activa- When the ignition is switched on or when
ted. driving, the bonnet, rear lid or doors that are
● To switch system off: press the but- open will be indicated on the instrument pan-
ton  or  . The stored speed is de- el display, and, as applicable, this will be in-
leted. dicated audibly. The display may vary accord-
ing to the type of instrument panel fitted.
40
 The essentials

Illustra- Priority 1 warning (red symbols) Gear-change indicator

Key to ››› Fig. 48
tion
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
 Do not continue driving! warnings.
A The bonnet is open or is not properly  Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous ››› in Warning
closed ››› page 273. symbols on page 122 !
Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessa-
 Do not continue driving! ry, request assistance from specialised personnel.
B The rear lid is open or is not properly
closed ››› page 16.
Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)
 Do not continue driving!
C, D A vehicle door is open or is not properly Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
closed ››› page 132. warnings.
A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct
levels may cause damage to the vehicle! ››› in Warn- Fig. 49 Instrument panel: gear-change indica-
tor (manual gearbox).
 ››› page 118 ing symbols on page 122
Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If neces-
sary, request assistance from specialised personnel. Gear-change recommendation
While driving, the instrument panel of certain
Warning and information messages Informative text vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-
tion for saving fuel ›››  page 195.
Information relating to different vehicle processes.
The system runs a check on certain compo-
nents and functions when the ignition is
switched on and while the vehicle is moving.
Faults in the operation are displayed on the
 ››› page 121 Outside temperature display
screen using red and yellow symbols and When the outside temperature is below +4°C
messages on the instrument panel display (+39°F), the  symbol (warning of risk of
(›››  page 121, ››› page 47) and, in freezing) is displayed. At first, this symbol
some cases, with audible warnings. The dis- flashes and then it remains lit until the out-
play may vary according to the type of instru- side temperature rises above +6°C (+43°F)
ment panel fitted. ››› in Indications on the display on
page 119.
When the vehicle is at a standstill or when
travelling at very low speeds, the tempera-
ture displayed may be higher than the true »
41
 The essentials

outside temperature as a result of the heat Additional consumers Note

produced by the engine.
● Operation with the windscreen wiper lever*: ● If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af-
The temperatures measured range from ter you switch the ignition on again.
Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 46 2 until the
-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F). ● The saving tips do not appear in all situa-
main menu appears. Enter into the section
Driving data. With the rocker switch, tions, but rather with a large separation of
move to the display Convenience con- time.
Engine oil temperature display sumers.
● Operation with the multi-function steering
The engine reaches its operating temperature
wheel*: move with the buttons   or   Speed warning device
when in normal driving conditions the oil
temperature is between 80°C (178°F) and to Driving data and enter with OK. Turn
the right thumbwheel until the Conven- The speed warning device warns the driver
120°C (248°F). If the engine is required to when they have exceeded the pre-set speed
work hard and the outside temperature is ience consumers display appears.
limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning
high, the engine oil temperature can in- In addition, a scale will inform you of the cur- signal sounds, and the warning lamp  and
crease. This does not present any problem as rent sum of all the additional appliances. the driver message Speed limit excee-
long as the warning lamps  ››› table on ded! will be displayed simultaneously on the
page 48 or  ››› table on page 48 do not instrument panel. The warning lamp 
appear on the display. switches off when reducing speed below the
Saving tips
stored maximum limit.
Vehicles without multifunction steering
Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in Speed warning programming is recommen-
wheel
conditions that increase fuel consumption. ded if you wish to be reminded of a maxi-
● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 46 2 until Follow them to reduce consumption. The indi- mum speed, such as when travelling in a
the main menu appears. Enter into Driving cations appear automatically only with the ef- country with different speed limits or for a
data. With the button 2 move to the oil ficiency programme. After a time, the tips will maximum speed for winter tyres.
temperature gauge. disappear automatically.
If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately Setting speed limit warning
Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel
after it appears, press any button on the You can use the radio or the Easy Connect* to
● Enter the submenu Driving data and windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer- set, alter or cancel the speed limit warning.
turn the thumbwheel until the oil tempera- ing wheel*.
ture display appears. ● Vehicles with radio: press the SETUP button
> control button  Driver Assistant >
Speed warning.

42
 The essentials

● Vehicles with Easy Connect: Press the  Service intervals hicle so requires. To calculate this change
button and the function button SETTINGS > (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of
Driver assistance > ACC > Dis- use and individual driving styles are consid-
tance. ered. The advance warning first appears 20
days before the date established for the cor-
The warning limit can be set from 30 to responding service. The kilometres (miles)
210 km/h (18 to 150 mph) ›››  page 207. remaining until the next service are always
The adjustment is made at 10 km/h (6 mph) rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles)
intervals. and the time is given in complete days. The
current service message cannot be viewed
Note until 500 km after the last service. Prior to
● Please bear in mind that, even with the this, only lines are visible on the display.
speed warning function, it is still important
to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the Inspection reminder
speedometer and to observe the legal speed
limits. When the Service date is approaching, when
Fig. 50 Instrument panel the ignition is switched on a Service remind-
● The speed limit warning function in the ver-
er is displayed.
sion for some countries warns you at a speed
of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a factory-set The service interval indication appears on the Vehicles without text messages: a span-
speed limit. instrument panel display ››› Fig. 50 1 . ner  will be displayed on the instrument
SEAT distinguishes between services with en- panel plus an indication in km.
gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and The kilometres indicated are the maximum
services without engine oil change (e.g. In- number of kilometres that can be travelled
spection). until the next service. After a few seconds,
In vehicles with Services established by time the display mode changes. A clock symbol
or mileage, the service intervals are already appears and the number of days until the
pre-defined. next service is due.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- Vehicles with text messages: Service in
vals are determined individually. Thanks to --- km or --- days will be shown on the
technological progress, maintenance work instrument panel display. »
has been greatly reduced. Because of the
technology used by SEAT, with this service
you only need to change the oil when the ve-
43
 The essentials

Service due Vehicles with text messages: the following the service interval display may not be cor-
When the service date is due, an audible message is displayed: Service --- km rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum
warning is given when the ignition is switch- (miles) or --- days ago. service intervals permitted in the ››› Booklet
ed on and the spanner displayed on the Maintenance Programme.
screen flashes for a few seconds . Resetting service interval display ● If you reset the display manually, the next
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT service interval will be indicated as in vehi-
Vehicles with text messages: Service now cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea-
will be shown on the instrument panel dis- dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
lows: son we recommend that the service interval
play. display be reset by a SEAT authorised Dealer.
● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-
Reading a service notification ton 2 .
With the ignition switched on, the engine off ● Switch ignition back on.
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current ● Release the 2 button and press it again
service notification can be read:
for the next 20 seconds.
Press and hold the button 2 for more than 5
seconds to consult the service message. Note
When the service date has passed, a minus ● The service message disappears after a few
sign is displayed in front of the number of kil- seconds, when the engine is started or when
OK/RESET is pressed on the windscreen wiper
ometres or days.
lever, or OK on the multifunction steering
wheel.
● In vehicles with the LongLife system in
which the battery has been disconnected for
a long period of time, it is not possible to cal-
culate the date of the next service. Therefore

44
 The essentials

Cruise control
Operating the cruise control system (CCS)*

Fig. 51 Related video:

Dash panel

Fig. 52 On the left of the steering column:  con-

troller and buttons to operate the cruise control
system;  third lever to operate the cruise con-
trol system.

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 52 

Function Effect
or of the third lever ››› Fig. 52 
Switching on the cruise control sys- Move controller 1 to the  position on the turn signal lever or move the third lever The system switches on. The last set speed of the
tem forward. cruise control is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching on the cruise control sys- The current speed is stored and the cruise control is
Press the button 2 on the turn signal lever or button  3 on the third lever.
tem activated.

Temporarily switching off the cruise Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever to the  position or move the third The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will
control lever into pressure point . be stored. »

45
 The essentials

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 52 

Function Effect
or of the third lever ››› Fig. 52 
Switching on the cruise control sys- Press the button 2 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into the pressure
The set speed control is activated.
tem again point .

Briefly press the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the area  or press  3
on the third lever to increase the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and
set it.
Increasing the set speed of the cruise
Press  on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of 10 km/h The speed is changed to the set value.
control
(5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the  area or hold down
 to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Briefly press the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the  area or move the third
lever into position  to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)
and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the cruise Press  on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph)
The speed is changed to the set value.
control and set it.

Hold down the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the  area or hold down
 to continuously decrease the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph), then
set it.

Switching off the cruise control sys- Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever into position  or the third lever into po-
The system switches off. The set speed will be stored.
tem sition .

 ››› in How it works on page 206

 ››› page 205

46
 The essentials

Warning lamps
On the instrument panel

Fig. 53 Related video:

Dash panel

Fig. 54 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Red warning lamps  Do not continue driving! Driver or passenger has not fas- ››› page
The brake fluid level is too low or ››› page  tened seat belt. 81
Central warning lamp: additional  there is a fault in the brake sys- 179
 information on the instrument –
tem. ››› page
panel display  Use the foot brake!
216 »
Lit up or flashing:
››› page ››› page
 Parking brake on.
180   Do not continue driving!
196
Fault in the steering.

47
 The essentials

Yellow warning lamps

Central warning lamp: additional 
Tyre pressure too low, or fault in
the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem.
››› page
287  ››› in Warning symbols on page 122

 information on the instrument –

panel display
 Fuel tank almost empty.
››› page
121
 ››› page 121

 Front brake pads worn.

Fault in airbag system and seat ››› page
it lights up: Fault in the ESC, or  belt tensioners. 91
disconnection caused by the sys- On the instrument panel display
 tem.
››› page Other warning lamps
flashes: ESC or ASR activated.
181
Left or right turn signal. ››› page 32
it lights up: fault in the ASR or
disconnection caused by the sys-  ››› page 32
 tem. Hazard warning lights on. ››› page
147
flashes: ASR working.
››› page
ASR manually deactivated.  Trailer turn signals
255
 Or else: ESC in Sport mode. ››› page
181 it lights up green: Press the brake
 ABS faulty or does not work. pedal!
››› page
››› page 31
 It blinks in green: the selector
188
 Rear fog light switched on. lever locking button has not en-
gaged.
lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page
 emission control system. 201 it lights up green: cruise control
activated or speed limiter switch-
it lights up: pre-heating of diesel ed on and active. ››› page 45 Fig. 55 On the instrument panel display: door
engine. ››› page
 ››› page  open.
201 it blinks in green: the speed set 207
flashes: fault in the diesel engine by the speed limiter has been ex-
management. ceeded.  Do not continue driving!
With the corresponding indi- ››› page 132
fault in the petrol engine man- ››› page ››› page 32  cation: door(s), rear lid or ››› page 16
 agement. 201  Main beam on or flasher on.
bonnet open or not properly ››› page 273
closed.
lights up or flashes: fault in the ››› page
 steering system. 196

48
 The essentials

Ignition:  Do not carry on Freezing warning. The outside The front passenger front airbag ››› page
driving! Engine coolant level  temperature is lower than ››› page 41   is activated (   90
too low, coolant temperature +4°C (+39°F).  ).
 too high ››› page 278
 Start-Stop system activated.
›››
Flashing: Fault in the engine
coolant system.
 Start-Stop system unavaila-
ble.
››› page 202
 in Activation and deactivation of
front passenger airbag* on page 91

  Do not continue driving!

Engine oil pressure too low.
››› page 275
 Low consumption driving sta-
tus
››› page 119  ››› page 90

 Fault in the battery. ››› page 281


Driving light totally or partial-
ly faulty.
››› page 106  ››› page 118
Gearbox lever
Fault in the cornering light
system.
››› page 143 Manual gearbox
On the instrument panel
 particulate filter blocked. ››› page 200
Flashing: Fault in the oil level
detection. Control manually.
 ››› page 275
Ignition: Insufficient engine
oil.

 Fault in the gearbox. ››› page 194

 Immobiliser active. ››› page 175

 Service interval display ››› page 43

Fig. 57 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed
Mobile telephone is connec- manual gearbox.
Fig. 56 Warning lamp for disabling the front
 ted via Bluetooth to the origi- ››› page 124
››› page 129 passenger airbag.
nal telephone device. The position of the gears is indicated on the
››› Booklet gearbox lever ››› Fig. 57.
Mobile telephone battery Audio or Front passenger front airbag is
charge meter. Available only navigation ››› page
 for devices pre-installed in system
  disabled (  
90 ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
factory.
 ). right down. »
49
 The essentials

● Move the gearbox lever to the required po- Automatic gearbox* Manual release of the selector lever
sition.
● Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gear

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it
downwards, move it to the left as far as it will
go and then forwards to select reverse
››› Fig. 57 R .
● Release the clutch. Fig. 58 Automatic gearbox: selector lever po- Fig. 59 Selector lever: manual release from
sitions. position P.
›››
 in Driving with a manual gearbox on
page 187 P Parking lock Should the power supply be interrupted,
there is a manual unlocking device located
R Reverse gear
 ››› page 187
N Neutral (idling)
under the console of the selector lever, on
the right. Releasing the selector lever re-
D/S Drive (forward) quires a certain degree of practical skill.
+/– Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards
● Unlocking: use the flat part of a screwdriver
(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to
blade.
go down a gear.
Removing the cover from the selector lever
›››
 in Selector lever positions on
page 189 ● Apply the handbrake  ›››
the car does not move.
to ensure that

 ››› page 188 ● Carefully pull the corners of the selector

lever boot and twist it upwards above the lev-
 ››› page 50 er handle.

50
 The essentials

Releasing the selector lever pushed or towed, the selector lever must first Air conditioning
● Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel- be moved to position N, after operating the
low unlocking tab sideways ››› Fig. 59. manual release mechanism.
Related video
● Press the interlock button on the selector
WARNING
lever and move the selector lever to posi-
tion N. The selector lever may be moved out of posi-
tion P only when the handbrake is firmly ap-
● After carrying out the manual release, at- plied. If this does not work, secure the vehi-
tach the selector lever boot on the gearbox cle with the brake pedal. On a slope the vehi-
console again. cle could otherwise start to move inadver-
tently after shifting the selector lever out of Fig. 60 Air conditioning
If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis- position P - accident risk!
charged battery) and the vehicle has to be

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 61 In the centre console: Climatronic con-

trols

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on. »
51
 The essentials

1
The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: turn the control to adjust the temperature.
Temperature

2
The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Press the buttons to manually adjust the fan.
Fan

3
The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 .
Air distribution

4 Indications on the display screen of the fan speed and the temperature selected for the right and left sides.

 The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the wind-
Defrost function screen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

 Air distribution towards the footwell.

 Upward air distribution.

 Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

 Air recirculation

 Seat heating buttons

 Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Press the  button to apply the driver-side settings to the passenger side. Use the temperature regulator for the passenger side in order to set
 a different temperature.

 Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution.

Switching off Press the  button or manually set the fan to .

52
 The essentials

 ››› in General notes on page 164

 ››› page 171

How does the manual air conditioning work*?

Fig. 62 In the centre console: Manual air condi-

tioning controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on.

1
Turn the control to adjust the temperature.
Temperature

2 Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off

Fan Level 4: maximum fan level. »

53
 The essentials

: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the
fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.
3
Air distribution
: The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.
: Air distribution to footwells.
: Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.
 Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.

 Air recirculation

 Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

 Seat heating buttons

 ››› in General notes on page 164

 ››› page 169

54
 The essentials

How does the heating and the fresh air system work?

Fig. 63 In the centre console: heating system and

fresh air controls.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate
propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has
switch off the function. been switched on.

1 Turn the control to adjust the temperature. The temperature cannot be lower than that of the exterior air temperature, as this system cannot cool
Temperature or dehumidify the air.

2 Setting 0: blower and manual air conditioning switched off

Fan Level 4: maximum fan level.

: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

3 : The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.
Air distribution
: Air distribution to footwells.
: Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.
 Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes. »
55
 The essentials

 ››› in General notes on page 164

 ››› page 167

56
 The essentials

Fluid Level control The tank flap is released electronically by

means of the central locking and is located at
the rear of the vehicle, on the right. The tank
Filling capacities
holds approximately 40 litres.

Capacities Opening the fuel tank cap

Fuel tank 40 litres. 7 litre re- ● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the
serve. left side.
Windscreen washer fluid con- 3 litres ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.
tainer
● Place it in the space on the hinge of the
open flap ››› Fig. 64.

Fuel Closing the fuel tank cap

● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go.
● Close the lid.

 ››› in Refuelling on page 269

 ››› page 269

Fig. 64 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

57
 The essentials

Oil

Fig. 65 Engine oil dipstick. Fig. 66 In the engine compartment: Engine

oil filler cap.

The level is measured using the dipstick loca- ● Zone C : Add oil up to zone B . ● When the oil level reaches at least zone B ,
ted in the engine compartment unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully.
›››  page 275. Topping up engine oil
● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening. Engine oil additives
The oil should leave a mark between zones
A and C . It should never exceed zone A . ● Add oil slowly. No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
● Zone A : Do not add oil. ● At the same time, check the level to ensure
additives is not covered by the warranty.
● Zone B : You can add oil but keep the level
you do not add too much.
in that zone.

58
 The essentials

Engine oil specifications

Service interval Engine type Specification

Petrol engines with Set Service Intervals (dependent on 1.0l / 1.0l CNG / 1.5l VW 504 00
time/distance travelled) 1.0l / 1.6l VW 502 00a)

VW 508 00
Petrol engines with Flexible Service Intervals (LongLife) 1.0l / 1.5l
VW 504 00b)

Diesel engines with Set Service and Flexible Service In-

With particulate filter (DPF) VW 507 00
tervalsc)
a) If the quality of the fuel available in the country does not fulfil the EN 228 (for petrol) and EN 590 (for diesel) standards.
b) Use of engine oil compliant with the VW 504 00 specification instead of VW 508 00 may have a slight negative effect on the vehicle’s exhaust gas values.
c) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.

Coolant When the engine is cold, replace the coolant

 ››› in Changing engine oil on page 278 when the level is below .

 ››› page 275 Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from
the factory with a specially treated mixture of
water and at least 40 % of the additive G13
(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the
necessary frost protection down to -25°C
(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of
the engine cooling system against corrosion.
It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-
Fig. 67 Engine compartment: coolant expan- ses the boiling point of the coolant.
sion tank cap.
To protect the cooling system, the percentage
The coolant tank is located in the engine of additive must always be at least 40 %,
compartment ›››  page 275. even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-
tection is not required. »

59
 The essentials

If for weather reasons further protection is Brake fluid Windscreen washer

necessary, the proportion of additive may be
increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-
tifreeze protection will diminish and this will
worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
of distilled water and at least 40 % of the
G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive
(both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti-
corrosion protection ››› in Topping up cool-
ant on page 280. The mixture of G13 with
G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11
(green-blue) engine coolants will significant- Fig. 68 Engine compartment: brake fluid res- Fig. 69 In the engine compartment: wind-
ly reduce anti-corrosion protection and ervoir cap. screen washer reservoir top.
should therefore be avoided ››› in Topping
up coolant on page 280. The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- The windscreen washer reservoir is located in
gine compartment ›››  page 275. the engine compartment ›››  page 275.

 ››› in Topping up coolant on page 279 The level should be between the  and 
marks. If it is below , please visit a Techni-
To top up, mix water with a product recom-
mended by SEAT.
cal Service.
 ››› page 278
›››
In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze for win-
dows.
 in Changing the brake fluid on
page 280
››› in Checking and topping up the

 ››› page 280  windscreen washer reservoir water on

page 281

 ››› page 281

Battery
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment ›››  page 275. It does not require
60
 The essentials

maintenance. It is checked as part of the In-

spection Service.

›››
 in Symbols and warnings on han-
dling the battery on page 281

 ››› page 281

61
 The essentials

Emergencies Opening and closing the fuse box situated

below the dash panel
Colour Amp rating
Green 30
● Opening: remove the fuse box cover in the
Fuses direction indicated ››› Fig. 70. Orange 40
● Closing: click the cover back into place.
Fuse location
To open the engine compartment fuse box  ››› in Introduction on page 104

● Raise the bonnet.

● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse  ››› page 104

box cover ››› Fig. 71

● Then lift the cover out.
● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Replacing a blown fuse
Push the locking tabs down until they click
audibly into place.

Fig. 70 On the driver-side dash panel: fuse Identifying fuses situated below the dash
box cover. panel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5
Fig. 72 Image of a blown fuse.
Brown 7.5
Preparation
Red 10
● Switch off the ignition, lights and all elec-
Blue 15 trical equipment.
Fig. 71 In the engine compartment: fuse box Yellow 20 ● Open the corresponding fuse box
cover. ›››  page 104.
White or transparent 25

62
 The essentials

Identifying a blown fuse Halogen headlights. Type Bulb lighta) Left Right
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured
Side light/DRL (daytime running Brake lights
››› Fig. 72. light)
W21W 2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL
Side lights
● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has Turn signal PY 21W
blown. Retro fog light P21 WLL –

Halogen headlight with LED Type Reverse light – P21 WLL

To replace a fuse
DRL
● Remove the fuse. Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL
Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life
● Replace the blown fuse by one with an a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehicle. The po-
identical amperage rating (same colour and Main beam headlights H7 sition of lights may vary according to the country.

markings) and identical size.

Turn signal PY 21W Light with Left Right
● Replace the cover again or close the fuse
Side light/DRL (daytime running LEDsa)
box lid. LEDa)
light)
Brake lights LED LED
a) In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to have
Side lights LED LED
it replaced.
Bulbs Retro fog light LED –
Full-LED main headlights Type
Bulbs (12 V) Reverse light – P21 WLL
No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with LEDs.
In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised workshop to Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL
Note: Depending on the level of equipment
have it replaced.
fitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehicle. The po-
part or all of the interior and/or exterior light- sition of lights may vary according to the country.
ing. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds
that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to
an authorised workshop for its replacement.  ››› page 106

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type
Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

Main beam headlights H7

63
 The essentials

Action in the event of a punc- ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and Sealing the tyre
wait in a safe place (for instance behind the ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
ture roadside crash barrier). the ››› Fig. 74 1 tool to remove the insert.
Place it on a clean surface.
Related video WARNING
● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
● Always observe the above steps and pro-
››› Fig. 74 10 .
tect yourself and other road users.
● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 74 3 into
● If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break
the wheel on the opposite side of the car with
a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from
automatically.
moving. ● Remove the lid from the filling tube
Fig. 73 Wheels ››› Fig. 743 and screw the open end of the
tube into the tyre valve.
Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down,
What to do first ture kit fill the tyre with the contents of the sealant
bottle.
● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface ● Remove the bottle from the valve.
and in a safe place as far away from traffic as ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-
possible. ing the tool ››› Fig. 74 1 .
● Apply the handbrake.
● Switch on the hazard warning lights. Inflating the tyre
● Manual gearbox: select the 1st gear. ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube
● Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever ››› Fig. 74 8 into the tyre valve.
to position P. ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed
● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from ››› Fig. 74 6 .
your vehicle. ● Start the engine and leave it running.
● Have the vehicle tool kit* ››› page 65 and ● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 74 9 into the
the spare wheel ›››  page 288 ready. Fig. 74 Standard representation: contents of vehicle's 12-volt socket ›››  page 157.
● Observe the applicable legislation for each the anti-puncture kit. ● Turn the air compressor on with the ON/OFF
country (reflective vest, warning triangles, switch ››› Fig. 74 5 .
The anti-puncture kit is located under the
etc.).
floor panel in the luggage compartment.
64
 The essentials

● Keep the air compressor running until it Changing a wheel 5 Jack*

reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar 6 Hook for extracting the central wheel
(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 trims*
Related video
minutes.
7 Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps.
● Disconnect the air compressor.
● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.  ››› in Vehicle tools on page 97

● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is

distributed throughout the tyre.
Fig. 75 Wheels
 ››› page 97
● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
valve.
● Repeat the inflation process. Central trim for steel rims*
● If the indicated pressure still cannot be Vehicle tool kit
reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
and request assistance from an authorised
technician.
● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
›››  page 99. Fig. 77 Correct positioning of the central
Fig. 76 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- wheel trim for steel rims.
››› gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.
 in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* on
page 98
1 An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*
The central trims must be removed for access
to the wheel bolts. »
 ››› page 98 2 Towline anchorage
3 Box spanner for wheel bolts*
4 Crank handle for jack

65
 The essentials

Removing Central trim for alloy rims* ● Pull on it to remove the trim ››› Fig. 78.
● Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools
››› Fig. 76
6 ) to one of the chambers of the Fitting
central wheel trim. ● Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim, fit-
● Insert the box spanner through the hook, ting the protrusion on the trim into the recess
supporting it on the tyre and remove the in the rim ››› Fig. 79 (arrows).
wheel trim. ● Press the central trim firmly until it locks in
with an audible click.
Fitting
● Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The
bottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge should Wheel bolt caps*
align with the inflation valve ››› Fig. 77 1 . Fig. 78 Removing the central wheel trim.
● Press the central trim firmly until it locks in
with an audible click.

Note
There is also a valve mark on the back of the
central wheel trim that indicates the correct
alignment.

Fig. 80 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal
● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the
cap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 80.
Fig. 79 Fitting the central wheel trim.
● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
Removing
● Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools
››› Fig. 76 6 ) to the housing provided for this
››› Fig. 78.
66
 The essentials

Wheel bolts If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push Important information about wheel bolts
on the end of the wheel wrench with your Factory-fitted rims and wheel bolts are spe-
foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and cially matched during construction. There-
take care not to slip during this operation. fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct
wheel bolts with the right length and heads
Loosening wheel bolts must be used. This ensures that wheels are
● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go fitted securely and that the brake system
››› Fig. 81. functions correctly.
● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the In certain circumstances, you should not
bolt approximately one turn anticlock- even use wheel bolts from vehicles of the
wise ››› in Removing and fitting the wheel same model.
on page 69.
Fig. 81 Changing a wheel: loosen the wheel In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft
bolts. The caps protect the wheel bolts and should locking bolt must be threaded onto positions
be pushed fully on again after changing the 2 ››› Fig. 82 or 3 , taking the tyre valve’s po-
tyre. sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not
be possible to mount the hubcap.
Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt
● Take the adapter for the anti-theft wheel
bolts out of the vehicle tool kit.
● Insert the adapter fully onto the anti-theft
wheel bolt ››› Fig. 82.
● Fit the wheel wrench as far as it will go over
the adapter.
Fig. 82 Changing a wheel: tyre valve 1 and ● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the
the correct position for the anti-theft wheel bolt approximately one turn anticlock-
locking bolt 2 or 3 . wise ››› in Removing and fitting the wheel
on page 69.
Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the
car to loosen the wheel bolts. The anti-theft wheel bolt has a different cap.
This cap only fits on anti-theft locking bolts
Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn
and is not for use with standard wheel bolts.
before raising the vehicle with the jack.
67
 The essentials

Raising the vehicle ● Find the support point on the strut (sunken CAUTION
area) closest to the wheel to be changed
››› Fig. 83. The vehicle must not be raised on the cross-
bar. Only place the jack* on the points de-
● Turn the jack* crank handle, located below signed for this purpose on the strut. Other-
the strut support point, to raise it until the wise, the vehicle may be damaged.
tab 1 ››› Fig. 84 is below the housing provi-
ded.
● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” onto Removing and fitting the wheel
the housing provided on the strut and the
mobile base 2 is resting on the ground. The Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.
spect to the support point 1 .
Fig. 83 Jack position points. Taking off the wheel
● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel
is slightly lifted off the ground. ● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box
spanner and place them on a clean surface.
WARNING
● Take off the wheel ››› .
● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. If
the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* could Putting on the spare wheel
slip or sink, respectively, with the resultant
risk of injury. When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation
● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- direction, observe the instructions in
plied by the manufacturer. Other vehicles ››› page 69.
could slip, with the consequent risk of injury. ● Mount the wheel.
● Only mount the jack* on the support points
Fig. 84 Fitting the jack. ● Screw on the wheel bolts in position and
designed for this purpose on the strut, and
always align the jack correctly. If you do not, tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm
the jack* could slip as it does not have an ad- ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.
ground. If necessary use a large, strong equate grip on the vehicle: risk of injury!
board or similar support. If the surface is slip- ● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs
● The height of the parked vehicle can using the wheel brace.
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a
change as a result of variations in tempera-
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-
ture and loading. The wheel bolts should be clean and turn
ping ››› .
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect

68
 The essentials

the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- ● Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn with care as this means the tyre does not of-
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- before raising the vehicle with the jack. fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-
ting the wheel. ● Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or
ticular importance when the road surface is
to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts wet.
Wheel bolt tightening torque have been tightened to the prescribed tor- To return to directional tread tires, replace
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel que, they could come loose while driving. the punctured tyre as soon as possible and
bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. ● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel restore the obligatory direction of rotation of
After changing a wheel, have the tightening rims with bolted ring trims. all tyres.
torque checked immediately with a torque ● If wheel bolts are tightened below the pre-
wrench that is working perfectly. scribed torque, the bolts and rims could come
loose while driving. If tightening torque is too Subsequent work
Before checking tightening torque, have any
high, the wheel bolts or threads can be dam-
rusty wheel bolts that are difficult to screw re- aged. ● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.
placed and clean the wheel hub threads.
● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap.
Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to CAUTION
the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have ● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-
been tightened to the prescribed torque, they When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim tion.
may hit and damage the brake disc. For this
could come loose while driving. ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the
reason, please take care and get a second
person to assist you. spare wheel housing, store it safely in the
WARNING luggage compartment ›››  page 158.
If the wheel bolts are not properly tightened, ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
they could come loose while driving and ted tyre as soon as possible.
cause an accident, serious injury and loss of
Tyres with compulsory direction of ro-
tation ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi-
vehicle control.
cator, adjust the pressure and store it in
● Use only wheel bolts which correspond to
A directional tread pattern can be identified memory ›››  page 287.
the rim in question.
by the arrows on the sidewall that point in ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel
● Never use different wheel bolts.
the direction of rotation. Always observe the bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-
● Wheel bolts and threads should be clean, direction of rotation indicated when fitting que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Mean-
free of oil and grease, and it should be possi- the wheel to guarantee optimum properties while, drive carefully.
ble to screw them easily. of this type of tyres with regard to grip, ● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
● To loosen and tighten wheel bolts, only use noises, wear and aquaplaning.
possible.
the wheel wrench that came with the car from
the factory. If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare
tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive
69
 The essentials

Snow chains WARNING

Snow chains should be correctly tightened in
Use accordance with the manufacturer's instruc-
tions. This will prevent the chains coming in-
Snow chains should only be used on the to contact with the wheel housing.
front wheels.
● Check that they are correctly seated after
driving for a few yards; correct the position if Emergency towing of the vehi-
necessary, in accordance with the manufac-
turer's fitting instructions. cle
Fig. 86 Right side of the rear bumper: Towing
● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). ring.
Towing
● If there is a danger of being trapped de-
spite having mounted the chains, it is best to Towline anchorages
disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho-
›››  page 181. rages.

Snow chains will improve braking ability as The towline anchorages are located under
well as traction in winter conditions. the floor panel in the luggage compartment,
next to the vehicle tools ››› page 65.
For technical reasons snow chains may only
be used with the following wheel rim/tyre Screw the towline anchorage into the screw
combination. connection ››› Fig. 85 o ››› Fig. 86 and tighten
it with the wheel brace.
195/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 13.5 Fig. 85 Right side of the front bumper: Tow-
mm
ing ring.
Tow rope or tow bar
It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow-
Remove wheel covers and any integral trim
ed using a tow bar. You should only use a
ring before fitting snow chains.
tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar.
Remove the chains when roads are free of
A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re-
snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the
duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis-
wheels become damaged quickly and may
able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi-
even be rendered unusable.
bre or similarly elastic material.

70
 The essentials

Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the The brake servo only works when the engine ● Switch the ignition on.
towline anchorages provided or a towing is running. When not running, you must ap- ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the
bracket. ply considerably more pressure to the brake clutch.
pedal.
● As soon as the engine starts, press the
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
As the power assisted steering does not work clutch and move the gear lever into neutral.
● The tow rope must be taut before you drive if the engine is not running, you will need This helps to prevent driving into the towing
off. more strength to steer than you normally vehicle.
● Release the clutch very carefully when start- would.
ing the vehicle (manual gearbox), or acceler-
ate gently (automatic gearbox).
 ››› in General information on page 100
 ››› in General information on page 100

Driving style
 ››› page 100  ››› page 100
Towing requires some experience, especially
when using a tow rope. Both drivers should
realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. In-
experienced drivers should not attempt to Tow-starting How to jump start
tow.
If the engine will not start, first try starting it Jump leads
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle
and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. using the battery of another vehicle
››› page 71. You should only attempt to tow- The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
When towing on an unpaved road, there is al- cross section.
ways a risk of overloading and damaging the start a vehicle if charging the battery does
anchorage points. not work. This is done by leveraging wheel If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
movement. charged battery, the battery can be connec-
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
be switched on to prevent the steering wheel When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-
gine, do not tow it more than a short dis- the engine.
from locking and also to allow the use of the
turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the
catalytic converter. Jump leads
washers.
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles However, if your vehicle has to be tow-star- 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-
with a manual gearbox. With an automatic ted: tions). The wire cross section must be at least
gearbox, place the lever in N. 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least
● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear.
● Keep the clutch pressed down.
35 mm2 for diesel engines. »
71
 The essentials

Note 5. Connect the other end of the black jump

lead X to a solid metal component bol-
● The vehicles must not touch each other,
ted to the engine block or to the engine
otherwise electricity could flow as soon as
block itself of the vehicle with the flat
the positive terminals are connected.
battery. Do not connect it to a point near
● The discharged battery must be properly
the battery A .
connected to the on-board network.
6. Position the leads in such a way that
they cannot come into contact with any
moving parts in the engine compart-
How to jump start: description ment.
Fig. 88 Diagram of connections for vehicles
with Start-Stop system. Starting
7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
Jump lead terminal connections
boosting battery and let it run at idling
1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles speed.
››› . 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes
the positive + terminal of the vehicle until the engine is running.
with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 87.
3. Connect the other end of the red jump Removing the jump leads
Fig. 87 Diagram of connections for vehicles lead to the positive terminal + in the 9. Before you remove the jump leads,
without Start-Stop system. vehicle providing assistance B . switch off the dipped beam headlights if
4a. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: they are switched on.
connect one end of the black jump lead 10. Turn on the heater blower and heated
to the negative terminal – of the vehi- rear window in the vehicle with the flat
cle providing the current B ››› Fig. 87. battery. This helps minimise voltage
4b. For vehicles with Start-Stop system: con- peaks which are generated when the
nect one end of the black jump lead X leads are disconnected.
to a suitable ground terminal, to a solid 11. When the engine is running, disconnect
piece of metal in the engine block, or to the leads in reverse order to the details
the engine block itself ››› Fig. 88. given above.

72
 The essentials

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient ● Never attach the negative cable to fuel sys- Changing the windscreen wiper
metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi- tem components or the brake lines in the oth-
nals. er vehicle.
blades
If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- ● The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The Changing the wiper blades
onds, switch off the starter and try again after
about 1 minute. jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the ve-
hicle, this can cause a short circuit.
WARNING
● Position the leads in such a way that they
● Please note the safety warnings referring to
cannot come into contact with any moving
working in the engine compartment
parts in the engine compartment.
›››  page 273, Working in the engine
compartment. ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could re-
sult in chemical burns.
● The battery providing assistance must have
the same voltage as the flat battery (12 V)
and approximately the same capacity (see Note
imprint on battery). Failure to comply could
The vehicles must not touch each other, oth- Fig. 89 Wipers in service position.
result in an explosion.
erwise electricity could flow as soon as the
● Never use jump leads when one of the bat- positive terminals are connected.
teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even af-
ter the battery has thawed, battery acid could
leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery
freezes, it should be replaced.
● Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes
away from batteries, danger of explosion.
Failure to comply could result in an explo-
sion.
● Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
● Do not connect the negative cable from the Fig. 90 Changing the windscreen wiper
other vehicle directly to the negative terminal blade.
of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the
battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of To change the blades it is necessary to move
explosion. the wipers from the rest position into the
service position. »
73
 The essentials

Do not change the windscreen wipers when Changing the rear window wiper blade
out of the service position, as it could cause
paint to flake off the bonnet due to friction
with the windscreen wiper arm.

Service position (for changing wiper blades)

● Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.
● Turn the ignition on and off and then (with-
in approximately 9 seconds) push the wind-
screen wiper lever down (short wipe). The
windscreen wipers will move to the service
position ››› Fig. 89.
Fig. 91 Removing and fitting the rear window
wiper blade.
Removing the wiper blade
● Lift the windscreen wiper arm. Removing the wiper blade
● Press the securing tab down 1 ››› Fig. 90. ● Lift the wiper arm away from the glass
● Extract the wiper blade from the wiper arm. ● Slide the blade adapter in the direction of
the arrow and remove the blade ››› Fig. 91 A.
Fitting the wiper blade
● Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen Fitting the wiper blade
wiper arm until it clicks into place. ● With one hand, hold the top end of the wip-
● Place the windscreen wiper arms to their in- er arm.
itial position. ● Place the blade as shown in ››› Fig. 91 B
● Turn the ignition on, push the windscreen and slide the adapter along until it engages.
wiper lever down (touch wipe) and then turn
›››
the ignition off.
 in Changing the windscreen and
rear window wiper blades on page 100
›››
 in Changing the windscreen and
rear window wiper blades on page 100  ››› page 100

 ››› page 100

74
 Safe driving

Safety – Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn What affects driving safety?

Technical data
signals are working properly.
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
– Check tyre pressure.
Safe driving and your passengers. When your concentra-
– Ensure that all windows provide a clear and tion or driving safety is affected by any cir-
good view of the surroundings. cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as
Safety first!
– Ensure that all luggage is correctly secured
others on the road ››› , for this reason:
This chapter contains important information, ››› page 158. – Always pay attention to traffic and do not
tips, suggestions and warnings that you get distracted by passengers or telephone

Advice
– Make sure that no objects can interfere
should read and consider for both your own calls.
safety and for your passengers' safety. with the pedals.
– Never drive when your driving ability is im-
– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mir-
WARNING paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
rors properly according to your size.
● This manual contains important informa- – Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
– Ensure that the passenger in the central

Operation
tion about the operation of the vehicle, both rear seat always has the head restraint in – Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for the driver and the passengers. The other the correct position for use. for road, traffic and weather conditions.
sections of the on-board documentation also
contain further information that you should – Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- – When travelling long distances, take
be aware of for your own safety and for the straints according to their height. breaks regularly - at least every two hours.
safety of your passengers.
– Protect children with appropriate child – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired

Emergencies
● Ensure that the on-board documentation is
seats and properly applied seat belts or stressed.
kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe-
cially important when lending or selling the
››› page 92.
WARNING
vehicle to another person. – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper When driving safety is impaired during a trip,
sitting position ››› page 76. the risk of injury and accidents increases.

Advice about driving – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts

Safety
properly ››› page 81. Safety equipment
Before setting off
Never put your safety or the safety of your
For your own safety and the safety of your passengers in danger. In the event of an acci-
passengers, always note the following points dent, the safety equipment may reduce the »
before every trip:
75
 Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover part Correct position of the vehicle For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
of the safety equipment in your SEAT 1): injury in the event of an accident, we recom-
occupants mend the following adjustments for the driv-
● three-point seat belts, er:
● Belt tension limiter for the front and rear Correct sitting position for the driver
– Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a
side seats
distance of at least 25 cm between the
● belt tensioners for the front and rear seats, steering wheel and the centre of your chest
● front airbags, ››› Fig. 92.
● side airbags in the front seat backrests, – Move the driver's seat forwards or back-
● “ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rear wards so that you are able to press the ac-
child seat system celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the
floor with your knees still slightly angled
● height-adjustable front head restraints,
››› .
● Rear-centre head restraints with in-use po-
– Ensure that you can reach the highest point
sition and non-use position
of the steering wheel.
● adjustable steering column. Fig. 92 The proper distance between driver
and steering wheel. – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
The safety equipment mentioned above edge is at the same level as the top of your
works together to provide you and your pas- head, or as close as possible to the same
sengers with the best possible protection in level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 93.
the event of an accident. However, these
– Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
safety systems can only be effective if you
tion so that your back rests completely
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
against it.
position and use this equipment properly.
– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 81.
Safety is everyone's business!
– Keep both feet in the footwell so that you
have the vehicle under control at all times.

Fig. 93 Correct head restraint position for the

Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 152.
driver.

1) Depending on the version/market.

76
 Safe driving

WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-

Technical data
tion so that your back rests completely
● An incorrect sitting position of the driver
Read the additional information carefully against it.
can lead to severe injuries.
›››  page 20 – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at
least 25 cm distance between the centre of edge is at the same level as the top of your
WARNING
the chest and the centre of the steering head, or as close as possible to the same
wheel ››› Fig. 92. If distance is less than 25 ● Never adjust the position of the steering level as the top of your head ››› page 79.
cm, the airbag system may not protect you wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this
could cause an accident. – Always keep both feet in the footwell in
properly.

Advice
● Move the lever up firmly so the steering
front of the front passenger seat.
● If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 wheel position does not accidentally change – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 81.
cm, contact a specialised workshop. The during driving. risk of accident!
workshop will help you decide if special spe- ● Make sure you are capable of reaching and It is possible to deactivate the front passen-
cific modifications are necessary. firmly holding the upper part of the steering ger airbag in exceptional circumstances
››› page 90.

Operation
● When driving, always hold the steering wheel: risk of accident!
wheel with both hands on the outside of the ● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it Adjusting the front passenger seat
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. points towards your face, the driver airbag ›››  page 18.
This reduces the risk of injury when the driver will not protect you properly in the event of
airbag is triggered. an accident. Make sure that the steering WARNING
● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 wheel points towards your chest.
● An incorrect sitting position of the front

Emergencies
o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g.
passenger can lead to severe injuries.
in the centre of the steering wheel). In such
cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sus- ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
Correct position for the front passen- there is at least 25 cm between your chest
tain injuries to the arms, hands and head.
ger and the dash panel. If distance is less than
● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver
25 cm, the airbag system may not protect you
during sudden braking manoeuvres or an ac- For your own safety and to reduce the risk of properly.
cident, never drive with the backrest tilted far
injury in the event of an accident, we recom- ● If your physical constitution prevents you
back! The airbag system and seat belts can
mend the following adjustments for the front

Safety
only provide optimal protection when the from maintaining the minimum distance of 25
backrest is in an upright position and the passenger: cm, contact a specialised workshop. The
driver is wearing his or her seat belt correct- – Move the front passenger seat back as far workshop will help you decide if special spe-
ly. as possible ››› . cific modifications are necessary. »
● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach-
ieve optimal protection.
77
 Safety

● Always keep your feet in the footwell when – Always keep both feet in the footwell in – Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect
the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the front of the rear seat. sitting position in the vehicle while travel-
dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An ling ››› .
– Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 81.
incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in case of a sudden – Use an appropriate child restraint system The following list contains examples of sit-
braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig- when you take children in the vehicle ting positions that could be dangerous for all
gered, you could sustain severe injuries due ››› page 92. vehicle occupants. The list is not complete,
to an incorrect sitting position. but we would like to make you aware of this
● To reduce the risk of injury to the front pas- WARNING issue.
senger in events such as sudden braking ma- ● If the passengers in the rear seats are not
noeuvres or an accident, never travel with the Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:
sitting properly, they could sustain severe in-
backrest tilted far back! The airbag system juries. ● Never stand in the vehicle.
and seat belts can only provide optimal pro-
tection when the backrest is in an upright po- ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order ● Never stand on the seats.
sition and the front passenger is wearing his to achieve maximum protection. ● Never kneel on the seats.
or her seat belt properly. The further the seat ● Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater tion when seat backrests are in an upright
the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning position and the vehicle occupants are wear- ● Never lean against the dash panel.
of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting po- ing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In ● Never lie on the rear bench.
sition! the rear seats are not sitting in an upright po-
sition, the risk of injury due to incorrect posi- ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order
to achieve maximum protection. tioning of the seat belt increases. ● Never sit sideways.
● Never lean out of a window.
● Never put your feet out of a window.
Correct sitting position for rear seat Examples of incorrect sitting posi-
● Never put your feet on the dash panel.
passengers tions
● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-
sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, ly when the belt webs are properly posi- well.
passengers on the rear seat bench must con- tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substan- ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
sider the following: tially reduce the protective function of seat
belts and increase the risk of injury due to in- ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-
– Sit up straight. correct seat belt position. As the driver, you gage compartment.
– Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- are responsible for all passengers, especially
sition ››› page 79. children.
78
 Safe driving

WARNING Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- Correct adjustment of rear head re-

Technical data
portant part of passenger protection and can straints
● Any incorrect sitting position increases the
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident
risk of severe injuries.
situations.
● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the
vehicle occupants to severe injuries if airbags – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant edge is, as far as possible, at the same lev-
who has assumed an incorrect sitting posi- el as the top of your head, or at the very
tion. least, at eye level ››› Fig. 94.

Advice
● Before the vehicle moves, assume the prop-
er sitting position and maintain it throughout WARNING
the trip. Before every trip, instruct your pas- ● Travelling with the head restraints removed
sengers to sit properly and to stay in this po- or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
sition during the trip ››› page 76, Correct posi- severe injuries. An improper adjustment of
tion of the vehicle occupants. the head restraints may cause death in an ac- Fig. 95 Head restraints in the correct posi-

Operation
cident and increase the risk of suffering inju- tion.
ries during abrupt braking actions or unex-
Correct adjustment of front head re- pected manoeuvres.
straints ● The head restraints must always be adjus-
ted according to the height of the passenger.

Emergencies
Fig. 96 Head restraint position warning label.

Safety
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
Fig. 94 Correctly adjusted head restraint as
portant part of the passenger protection and
viewed from the front and the side. can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci-
dent situations »

79
 Safety

Rear head restraints Pedal area would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
– The rear head restraints have 2 positions: struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
use and non-use. Pedals ● Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area and
– One position for use (head restraint raised)
– Ensure that you can always press the accel- impair pedal operation. In the event of a sud-
››› Fig. 95. In this position, the head re- den driving or braking manoeuvre, you will
erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired
straints are used normally, protecting pas- not be able to operate the brake, clutch or ac-
to the floor.
sengers along with the rear seat belts. celerator pedal. Risk of accident!
– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
– And one position for non-use (head re-
paired to their initial positions.
straint lowered).
– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
– To fit the head restraints in position for use,
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
pull on the edges with both hands in the
the pedals ››› .
direction of the arrow.
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals
WARNING clear and which are secured to prevent them
● Under no circumstances should the rear from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
passengers travel while the head restraints mats from a specialised dealership.
are in the non-use position. See the warning
label located on the rear side fixed window
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must
››› Fig. 96. be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop
the vehicle.
● Do not swap the centre rear head restraint
with either of the outer seat rear head re-
straints. Risk of injury in case of an accident! Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet
CAUTION properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
Note the instructions on the adjustment of
the head restraints ››› page 152. WARNING
● If the pedals are obstructed, an accident
may occur. Risk of serious injuries.
● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor cov-
erings over the original floor mats. This

80
 Seat belts

Seat belts Seat belt control lamp*  during the drive, a warning sound will be

Technical data
heard for a few seconds. The warning light
will also flash .
Why wear a seat belt
The  lamp goes out when the driver and
passenger seat belts are fastened with the ig-
Number of seats
nition switched on.
Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front
and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped Rear seat belts fastened display*

Advice
with a three-point seat belt. Depending on the model version, when the
ignition is switched on, the seat belt status
WARNING display ››› Fig. 97 on the instrument panel in-
● Never transport more than the permitted forms the driver whether the passengers in
Fig. 97 Instrument panel: right rear seat oc-
amount of people in your vehicle. cupied and corresponding seat belt fastened the rear seats have fastened their seat belts.
display. The  symbol indicates that the passenger in

Operation
● Every vehicle occupant must properly fas-
ten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or
this seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt.
her seat. Children must be protected with an The control lamp illuminates to remind the When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened
appropriate child restraint system. driver to fasten his seat belt. or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis-
Before starting the vehicle: played for approximately 30 seconds. The in-
dication can be hidden by pressing the
– Fasten your seat belt securely.

Emergencies
0.0/SET button on the dash panel.
– Instruct your passengers to fasten their The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of
seat belts properly before driving off. 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats
– Protect children by using a child seat ac- is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion.
cording to the child's height and weight. An audible warning will also be heard if the
vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h
When the ignition is switched on, the control (15 mph).
lamp  in the instrument panel lights up (de-

Safety
pending on the model version) if the driver or
passenger have not fastened their seat belts.
When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed
surpasses approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the
seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened
81
 Safety

The protective function of seat belts Ensure that your passengers wear their seat WARNING
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
of substantially reducing the risk of injury
optimal protection from seat belts can be
and improving the chances of survival when
achieved only if you use them properly.
involved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
● Fasten your seat belt before every trip -
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
even when driving in town. Other vehicle oc-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
cupants must also wear the seat belts at all
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
times, otherwise they run the risk of being in-
is required by law in most countries. jured.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air- ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protection
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
Fig. 98 Drivers with properly worn seat belts worn. The front airbags, for example, are only ● Never allow two passengers (even children)
will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- triggered in some cases of head-on collision. to share the same seat belt.
den braking. The front airbags will not be triggered during ● Always keep both feet in the footwell in
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- motion.
in the proper position. These also help pre- bag trigger threshold value in the control unit
vent uncontrolled movements that may result ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi-
is not exceeded.
in serious injury and reduce the risk of being cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
thrown out of the vehicle. Therefore, you should always wear your seat ● The seat belt must never be twisted while it
belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants is being worn.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts have fastened their seat belts properly before ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the you drive off! fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.)
belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
because this can cause injuries.
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys- ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
Important safety instructions for the jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all use of seat belts ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
these features reduce the releasing kinetic in any other incorrect position.
– Always wear the seat belt as described in
energy and consequently, the risk of injury. ● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as an
This is why it is so important to fasten seat this section. overcoat over a sweater) impairs the proper
belts before every trip, even when "just driv- – Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened fit and function of the seat belts, reducing
ing around the corner". at all times and are not damaged. their capacity to protect.

82
 Seat belts

● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be Head-on collisions and the laws of called “kinetic energy” is created both in the

Technical data
blocked with paper or other objects, as this physics passengers and inside the vehicle.
can prevent the latch plate from engaging se- The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
curely.
the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of
● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher
similar items to alter the position of the belt the speed and the greater the weight, the
webbing. more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an
● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the accident.
connections, belt retractors or parts of the

Advice
buckle could cause severe injuries in the The most significant factor, however, is the
event of an accident. Therefore, you must speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
check the condition of all seat belts at regular from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h
intervals. (30 mph), for example, the corresponding ki-
● Seat belts which have been worn in an acci- netic energy is multiplied by four.
Fig. 99 A driver not wearing a seat belt is
dent and have been stretched must be re-

Operation
thrown forward violently. Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-
placed by a specialised workshop. Renewal ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the
may be necessary even if there is no apparent
event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-
damage. The belt anchorage should also be
cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed
checked.
solely by said impact.
● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to

Emergencies
moved or modified in any way. 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
retractors may not work properly. (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
Fig. 100 The unbelted passenger in the rear
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the collision, they will move forward at the same

Safety
driver who is wearing a seat belt. speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
It is easy to explain how the laws of physics head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
work in the case of a head-on collision: when collisions. »
a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy

83
 Safety

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the How to properly adjust your
body in a collision are so great that it is not
possible to brace oneself with one's hands. seatbelt
In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers
are thrown forward and will make violent con- Fastening and unfastening your seat
tact with the steering wheel, dash panel, belt
windscreen or whatever else is in the way
››› Fig. 99.
It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
Fig. 102 Position of seat belt during pregnan-
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- cy.
danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants ››› Fig. 100. Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 19.

Fasten your seat belt

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if
the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
● Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.
● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch
plate and pull it slowly across your chest and
lap.
Fig. 101 Positioning and removing the seat ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
belt buckle. appropriate seat and push it down until it is
securely locked with an audible click
››› Fig. 101.
● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.

84
 Seat belts

The seat belts are equipped with an automat- ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- The seat belts for the front and side rear oc-

Technical data
ic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full free- cle is in motion. If you do, you increase the cupants are equipped with belt tensioners.
dom of movement is permitted when the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,
shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur- ● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause se- although only in severe head-on and lateral
ing sudden braking, during travel in steep vere injuries in the event of an accident. collisions. This retracts and tightens the seat
areas or bends and during acceleration, the belts, reducing the forward motion of the oc-
● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is cupants.
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
locked. the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit The belt tensioners will not be triggered in
comfortably on the torso

Advice
The automatic belt retractors on the front the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle
seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie across overturns, or in accidents where no major
››› page 85. the pelvis, never across the stomach. The forces act on the vehicle.
seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on
Releasing the seat belt the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to Note
take up any slack.
● Press the red button on the belt buckle ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a

Operation
● For pregnant women, the lap part of the
››› Fig. 101. The latch plate is released and seat belt must lie as low as possible over the
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is
springs out ››› . not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
pelvis, never across the stomach, and always
● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls ● The relevant safety requirements must be
lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the
up easily and the trim is not damaged. abdomen ››› Fig. 102. observed when the vehicle or components of
the system are scrapped. Specialised work-
● Always engage the retractor lock when you
shops are familiar with these regulations,
Positioning seat belts

Emergencies
are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ or 1 which are also available to you.
Seat belts offer their maximum protection on- ››› page 92.
ly when they are properly positioned. ● Read and observe the warnings ››› page 82.

Maintenance and disposal of belt ten-

WARNING
sioners
● The seat belts offer best protection only
Seat belt tensioners*
when the backrests are in an upright position The belt tensioners are components of the
and the seat belts have been fastened prop-

Safety
seat belts that are installed in the seats of
erly. How the seat belt tensioner works
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of ers or remove and install parts of the system
Read the additional information carefully
another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will when performing other repair work, the seat
not protect you properly and the risk of injury
›››  page 20
belt may be damaged. The consequence may
is increased. be that, in the event of an accident, the belt »
85
 Safety

tensioners function incorrectly or may not

function at all.
Airbag system airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may
inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occu-
pant. This also applies to children.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- Brief introduction
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
do not cause any injuries or environmental tance between yourself and the front airbag.
Why is it so important to wear a seat
pollution, regulations, which are known to This way, the front airbags can completely
the specialised workshops, must be ob- belt and to sit correctly? deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
served. mum protection.
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
protection, the seat belt must always be worn The most important factors that will trigger
WARNING
properly and the correct sitting position must an airbag are: the type of accident, the angle
● Improper use or repairs not carried out by be assumed. of collision and the speed of the vehicle.
qualified mechanics increase the risk of se-
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may The airbag system is not a substitute for seat Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-
fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong cir- belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
cumstances. overall passive safety system. Please bear in rate resulting from the collision and detected
● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or mind that the airbag system can only work ef- by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
install parts of the belt tensioners or seat fectively when the vehicle occupants are occurring during the collision and measured
belts. wearing their seat belts correctly and have by the control unit remains below the speci-
● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and auto- adjusted the head restraints properly. There- fied reference values, the front, side and/or
matic retractor cannot be repaired. fore, it is most important to properly wear the curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take in-
seat belts at all times, not only because this to account that the visible damage in a vehi-
● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
is required by law in most countries, but also cle involved in an accident, no matter how
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other repair for your safety ››› page 81, Why wear a seat serious, is not a determining factor for the
work, must be performed by a specialised belt. airbags to have been triggered.
workshop only. The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
WARNING
● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- if you are not properly seated when the air-
tection for one accident and must be changed bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum-
if they have been activated. ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to
occupants assume a correct sitting position critical or fatal injuries.
while travelling. ● All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain criti-
Sharp braking before an accident may cause cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered.
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be Children up to 12 years old should always
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
86
 Airbag system

travel on the rear seat. Never transport ● a control lamp  on the dash panel WARNING

Technical data
children in the vehicle if they are not restrain- ››› page 91.
● The seat belts and airbags can only provide
ed or the restraint system is not appropriate ● key-operated switch for front passenger air- maximum protection if the occupants are
for their age, size or weight. bag, seated correctly ››› page 76, Correct position
● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if you ● a control lamp for disabling/enabling the of the vehicle occupants.
lean forward or to the side while travelling or front passenger airbag. ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag system,
assume an incorrect sitting position, there is
have the system checked immediately by a
a substantially increased risk of injury. This The airbag system operation is monitored specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a
increased risk of injury will be further in- electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-

Advice
frontal collision the system might not trigger
creased if you are struck by an inflating air- luminate for a few seconds every time the ig- correctly or may fail to trigger at all.
bag.
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating
airbag, always wear the seat belt properly. There is a fault in the system if the control
● Always adjust the front seats properly.
Airbag activation
lamp :

Operation
● does not light up when the ignition is The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
switched on ››› page 91, thousandths of a second, to provide addi-
Description of airbag system ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition tional protection in the event of an accident.
is switched on, A fine dust may develop when the airbag de-
Read the additional information carefully ploys. This is normal and it is not an indica-
›››  page 20. ● turns off and then lights up again after the tion of fire in the vehicle.

Emergencies
ignition is switched on,
The airbag system is not a substitute for the The airbag system is only ready to function
● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
seat belts. The airbag system offers addition- when the ignition is on.
al protection for the driver and passenger in moving.
combination with the seat belts. In special accidents instances, several air-
The airbag system is not triggered if: bags may activate at the same time.
The airbag system mainly comprises (as per ● the ignition is switched off In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
vehicle equipment): ● there is a minor frontal collision sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-

Safety
● an electronic control and monitoring sys- over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
● there is a minor side collision
tem (control unit)
● there is a rear-end collision Activation factors
● frontal airbags for driver and passenger,
● the vehicle turns over. The conditions that lead to the airbag system
● side airbags,
activating in each situation cannot be gener-
● curtain airbags, alised. Some factors play an important role, »
87
 Safety

such as the properties of the object the vehi- ● all doors are unlocked; Side airbags*
cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.
speed, etc. Read the additional information carefully
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
›››  page 22.
vation.
Safety instructions about air- WARNING
The control unit analyses the collision trajec-
tory and activates the respective restraint
bags ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
forward, or are not seated correctly while the
system. vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk
Front airbags
If the deceleration rate is below the prede- of injury if the side airbag system is triggered
fined reference value in the control unit the in an accident.
Read the additional information carefully
airbags will not be triggered, even though ›››  page 21. ● In order for the side airbags to provide their
the accident may cause extensive damage to maximum protection, the prescribed sitting
the car. WARNING position must always be maintained with
seat belts fastened while travelling.
● The seat belts and airbags can only provide
The following airbags are triggered in seri- ● Occupants of the outer seats must never
maximum protection if the occupants are
ous head-on collisions: carry any objects or pets in the deployment
seated correctly ››› page 76, Correct position
space between them and the airbags, or al-
● Driver airbag. of the vehicle occupants.
low children or other passengers to travel in
● Front passenger front airbag ● The deployment space between the front this position. It is also important not to at-
passengers and the airbags must not in any tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to
case be occupied by other passenger, pets the doors. This would impair the protection
The following airbags are triggered in seri- and objects. offered by the side airbags.
ous side-on collisions:
● The airbags provide protection for just one ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only
● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- accident; replace them once they have de- for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
dent. ployed. heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- ● It is also important not to attach any ob- ● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
cident. jects such as cup holders or telephone must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
mountings to the surfaces covering the air- ster because the system may be damaged. In
In an accident with airbag activation: bag units. this case, the side airbags would not be trig-
● Do not attempt to modify components of gered.
● the interior lights switch on (if the interior
the airbag system in any way. ● Under no circumstances should protective
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
covers be fitted over seats with side airbags
● the hazard warning lights switch on; unless the covers have been approved for use

88
 Airbag system

in your vehicle. Because the airbag deploys areas with holes or openings in the door pan- ● There must be no other persons, animals or

Technical data
from the side of the backrest, the use of con- el. objects between the occupants of the outer
ventional seat covers would obstruct the side ● Never drive if the interior door panels have seats and the deployment space of the head-
airbag, seriously reducing the airbag's effec- been removed or if the panels have not been protection airbags so that the head-protec-
tiveness. correctly fitted. tion airbag can deploy completely without re-
● Any damage to the original seat upholstery striction and provide the greatest possible
● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers
or around the seams of the side airbag units protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have
in the door panels have been removed, un- not been expressly approved for use in your
must be repaired immediately by a special- less the holes left by the loudspeakers have
ised workshop. vehicle may not be attached to the side win-
been closed properly.

Advice
dows
● The airbags provide protection for just one ● Always check that the openings are closed ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only
accident; replace them once they have de- or covered if additional loudspeakers or other
ployed. for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any
equipment are fitted inside the door panels. heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.
● Any work on the side airbag system or re- ● Any work carried out to the doors should be Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hang-
moval and installation of the airbag compo- made in an authorised specialised workshop. ers.
nents for other repairs (such as removal of

Operation
● The airbags provide protection for just one
the front seat) should only be performed by a
specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may accident; replace them once they have de-
occur during the airbag system operation. Head-protection airbags* ployed.
● Do not attempt to modify components of ● Any work on the head-protection airbag
the airbag system in any way. Read the additional information carefully system or removal and installation of the air-
›››  page 23. bag components for other repairs (such as re-

Emergencies
● The side and head airbags are managed
moval of the roof lining) should only be per-
through sensors located in the interior of the formed by a specialised workshop. Other-
WARNING
front doors. To ensure the correct operation of wise, faults may occur during the airbag sys-
the side and curtain (head) airbags neither ● In order for the head-protection airbags to
tem operation.
the doors nor the door panels should be provide their maximum protection, the pre-
● Do not attempt to modify components of
modified in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeak- scribed sitting position must always be main-
ers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag tained with seat belts fastened while travel- the airbag system in any way.
system may not work correctly. All work car- ling. ● The side and head airbags are managed
ried out on the front door must be done in a through sensors located in the interior of the

Safety
● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must
specialised workshop. be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a front doors. To ensure the correct operation of
● In a side-on collision the side airbags will screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. the side and curtain airbags neither the
not work if the sensors do not correctly meas- See your technical service to make this ad- doors nor the door panels should be modified
ure the pressure increase on the interior of justment. in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the
the doors, due to air escaping through the front door is damaged, the airbag system
may not work correctly. All work carried out »
89
 Safety

on the front door must be done in a special- ››› Fig. 103. About 3/4 of the key should en-
ised workshop. ter; this is as far as it will go.
● Turn the key gently to the  position. If
you have difficulty, ensure that you have in-
serted the key as far as it will go.
Deactivating airbags ● Close the front passenger door.

Activation and deactivation of front ● Check, with the ignition switched on, that
the   control lamp remains lit where it
passenger airbag*
says      in the centre of the
dash panel ››› Fig. 104.
Fig. 104 Centre side of dash panel: control
lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag
in centre console. Connect the front passenger front airbag
● Switch the ignition off.
Deactivate the front passenger front airbag ● Open the front passenger door.
only if you have to use a rear-facing child
seat in the front passenger seat. ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the ››› Fig. 103. About 3/4 of the key should en-
rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the ter, as far as it will go.
front passenger airbag.
● Turn the key gently to the  position. If you
Fig. 103 Switch for activating and deactivat-
ing the front passenger airbag. have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted
Front passenger front airbag switch
the key as far as it will go.
When the front passenger airbag is deactiva- ● Close the front passenger door.
ted, this means that only the front passenger
front airbag is deactivated. All the other air- ● Check, with the ignition switched on, that
bags in the vehicle remain activated. the   control lamp does not remain lit
where it says      in the cen-
Disconnect the front passenger front airbag tre of the dash panel ››› Fig. 104. The  
control lamp lights up for 60 seconds and
● Switch the ignition off. then goes off.
● Open the door on the front passenger side.
● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
90
 Airbag system

WARNING   It lights up on the dash panel belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to

Technical data
● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for
trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.
Front passenger The control lamp switches off auto- ● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-
disabling or switching on the airbag. front airbag ena- matically 60 seconds after the igni-
● Always switch off the ignition before disa-
taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the sys-
bled. tion is switched on
tem checked immediately by a specialised
bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do
workshop.
so could result in a fault in the airbag deacti- Several warning and control lamps light up
vation system. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ● Do not mount a child seat in the front pas-
● Never leave the key in the airbag disabling ed on, signalling that the function is being senger seat or remove the mounted child
seat! The front passenger front airbag may

Advice
switch as it could get damaged or enable or verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
deploy during an accident in spite of the
disable the airbag during driving. onds.
fault.
● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system
reactivate it as soon as possible so that it can control lamp  remains on or flashes, it indi-
fulfil its protective function. CAUTION
cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat
belt tensioner system ››› . Have the system Always pay attention to any lit control lamps

Operation
checked immediately by a specialised work- and to the corresponding descriptions and in-
Airbag system control lamps structions to avoid damage to the vehicle or
shop.
harm to the occupants.
If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,
It lights up on the combi-in- the warning lamp      re-
 strument mains lit on the dash panel to remind you

Emergencies
Fault in airbag that the airbag is deactivated. If, with the
Have the system checked immedi- front passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp
system and seat
ately by a specialised workshop.
belt tensioners. does not remain lit or if it is lit together with
the control lamp  on the dash panel, there
  It lights up on the dash panel is a fault in the airbag system ››› . If the
control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the
Front passenger
Check whether the airbag should
disabling of the airbag system ››› . Have the
front airbag disa- system checked immediately by a specialised

Safety
remain disabled
bled. workshop.

WARNING
In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat
belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat

91
 Safety

Transporting children safely These systems have been especially de-

signed and approved, complying with the
Read and always observe the safety informa-
tion included in the following chapters:
ECE-R44. regulation.
Safety for children ● Safety distance with respect to the passen-
SEAT recommends securing the child seats ger airbag ››› page 86.
shown on the website as described below:
Introduction ● Objects between the passenger and the
● Child seats in the opposite direction of passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags
For safety reasons, as we have learned from travel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket on page 88.
accident statistics, we recommend that chil- (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).
dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear The passenger side front airbag, when ena-
● Child seats in the direction of travel (group bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX backward since the airbag can strike the seat
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea- DUO Plus). with such force that it can cause serious or
sons, the child seat should be installed in the ● Child seats in the direction of travel (group fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or 2): seat belt and ISOFIX (RÖMER KIDFIX XP ©). should always travel on the rear seat.
in the centre back seat. ● Child seats in the direction of travel (group Therefore we strongly recommend you to
The physical laws involved and the forces 3): with seat belt (TAKATA MAXI PLUS©). transport children on the rear seats. This is
acting in a collision apply also to children the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
››› page 83. But unlike adults, children do not observe any statutory requirements when in-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-
have fully developed muscle and bone struc- bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 90.
stalling and using child seats. Always read When transporting children, use a child seat
tures. This means that children are subject to
and note ››› page 92. suitable for the age and size of each child
a greater risk of injury.
We recommend you always carry the manu- ››› page 94.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
always use special child restraint systems WARNING
gether with the on-board documentation.
when travelling in the vehicle.
● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-
We recommend the use of child safety prod- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- Important information regarding the ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
gramme, which includes systems for all ages front passenger's airbag accident increases.
made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see ● An inflating front passenger airbag can
www.seat.com). Read the additional information carefully strike the rear-facing child seat and project it
›››  page 23. with great force against the door, the roof or
the backrest.

92
 Transporting children safely

● Never install a child seat facing backwards accident. This is particularly important if the WARNING

Technical data
on the front passenger seat unless the front child is travelling on the front passenger seat
When travelling, children must be secured in
passenger front airbag has been disabled. and the airbag system is triggered in an acci-
the vehicle with a restraint system suitable
Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! dent; as this could cause serious injury or
for age, weight and size.
However, if it is necessary, in exceptional ca- even death.
ses, to transport a child in the front passen- ● Read and always observe information and
● A suitable child seat can protect your child!
ger seat, the front passenger front airbag warnings concerning the use of child seats
must always be disabled ››› page 90, Activa-
● Never leave a child alone in the child seat ››› page 92.
tion and deactivation of front passenger air- or inside the vehicle because depending on
the season, very high temperatures may be

Advice
bag*. If the passenger seat has a height ad- WARNING
justment option, move it to the highest, most reached inside a parked vehicle, which could
upright position. If it is a fixed seat, it should be fatal. The retaining rings are designed only for use
be moved to the rearmost position possible. ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system child
must not wear a normal seat belt without a seats.
● For those vehicles that do not include a key
lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehi- child seat, as this could cause injuries to the ● Never secure other child seats that do not
abdominal and neck areas during a sudden

Operation
cle must be taken to a technical service. Do have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* system, or
not forget to reconnect the airbag when an braking manoeuvre or in an accident. retaining belts or objects to the fastening
adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat. ● Do not allow the seat belt to become twis- rings - this can result in potentially fatal inju-
ted and the seat belt should be properly in ries to the child.
● All vehicle occupants, especially children,
must assume the proper sitting position and place ››› page 81. ● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-
be properly belted in while travelling. ● Only one child may occupy a child seat rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* se-
››› page 93, Child seats. curing rings.

Emergencies
● Never hold children or babies on your lap,
this can result in potentially fatal injuries to ● When a child seat is mounted in the rear
the child! seats, the door child-proof lock should be ac- WARNING
● Never allow a child to be transported in a tivated ››› page 138.
An undue installation of the safety seat will
vehicle without being properly secured, or to increase the risk of injury in the event of a
stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. crash.
In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal in- Child seats ● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the

Safety
luggage compartment.
juries to themselves and to the other vehicle
occupants. Safety instructions ● Never secure or tie luggage or other items
to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper
● If children assume an improper sitting posi-
Read the additional information carefully ones (Top Tether).
tion when the vehicle is moving, they expose
themselves to greater risk of injury in the ›››  page 23.
event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an
93
 Safety

Categorisation of child seats into We recommend you to always include the list of vehicle models for which they can be
groups manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual installed.
together with the on-board documentation. ● i-Size: Child seats with i-Size approval must
Use only child seats that are officially ap- SEAT recommends you use child seats from meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-
proved and suitable for the child. the Original Accessories Catalogue. These R 129 standard in relation to installation and
These seats are subject to the ECE-R 44 or child seats have been designed and tested safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you
ECE-R 129 standard. ECE-R stands for: Eco- for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-
nomic Commission for Europe Regulation. right child seat for your model and age group cle.
at SEAT dealers.
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
ries:
Child seats by approval category Attachment systems
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 Child seats may have the approval category
months) Depending on the country, different attach-
of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific
ment systems are used for safely installing
(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-
Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 child seats.
Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).
months)
● Universal: Child seats with universal appro- Attachment systems overview
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 val can be installed in all vehicles. There is ● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-
years old) no need to consult any list of models. In the ment system allowing quick and safe attach-
Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-
years old) child seat is additionally provided with a Top tachment establishes a rigid connection be-
Tether belt. tween the child seat and the car body.
Group 3: From 22 to 36 kg (over around 7 ● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in
years old) addition to the standard requirements of uni- The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,
versal approval, requires safety devices to called connectors. These connectors are fit-
Child seats that have been tested and ap- ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found
lock the child seat, which require additional
proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 between the seat cushion and the backrest of
testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap-
standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or ECE- the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISOFIX
proval include a list of vehicle models for
R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle with attachment systems are used mainly in Eu-
which they can be installed.
the test number below it). rope ›››  page 27. If necessary, ISOFIX at-
● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and tachment may have to be supplemented with
requires a dynamic test of the child seat for a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.
observe any statutory requirements when in- each vehicle model separately. Child seats
stalling and using child seats. with vehicle-specific approval also include a
94
 Transporting children safely

● Automatic three-point seat belt. Whenever ● Baby carriers or child seats in the opposite

Technical data
possible, it is preferable to attach the child direction of travel: ISOFIX and support brack-
seats with the ISOFIX system rather than at- et or iSize.
taching them with an automatic three-point ● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-
seat belt ›››  page 25. FIX and Top Tether.
Additional attachment:
WARNING
● Top Tether: The Top Tether belt is guided Incorrect use of the support bracket can
over the back of the rear seat and attached to

Advice
cause serious or fatal injury.
an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points ● Make sure the support bracket is correctly
are located at the back of the rear seat back- and safely installed.
rest on the boot side ›››  page 30. The
rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are
marked with an anchor symbol.

Operation
● Support bracket: Some child seats rest on
the floor of the vehicle with a support brack-
et. The support bracket prevents the child
seat from tipping forward in the event of im-
pact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket
should only be used in the passenger seat

Emergencies
and side rear seats ››› . For the assembly of
this type of seat you should also consult the
list of approved vehicles for this assembly,
available in the instructions for child restraint
systems.

Recommended systems for attaching child

seats

Safety
SEAT recommends attaching child seats as
follows:

95
 Safety

Event Data Recorder Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-

cludes data from systems such as:
tem quality. Any data used for the purposes
of research will be treated anonymously (in
other words, no reference will be made to the
Description and operation ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).
● Emergency brake assist system (Front As-
Your vehicle has an event data recorder
sist)
(EDR).
● Park Pilot system
The EDR’s function is to record data in the
event of a mild or serious accident. These da- The EDR data are only recorded in specific ac-
ta are used to support the analysis of how cident situations. No data are recorded in
different vehicle systems behaved. normal driving conditions.
The EDR records, over a reduced time range No audio or video data inside or around the
(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv- vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstances
ing data and data from the restraint systems, are personal data such as name, age, or gen-
such as: der recorded. Nevertheless, third parties
(such as criminal proceedings authorities)
● How different vehicle systems worked.
may relate the contents of the EDR data to
● Whether the driver and the occupants were other data sources and create a personal ref-
wearing their seatbelts. erence in the context of an accident investi-
● How hard the acceleration or brake pedal gation.
was pressed. In order to read the EDR data it is necessary
● Vehicle speed. to access (if legally permitted to do so) the
vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-
These data will provide a better understand- face while the vehicle is switched on.
ing of the circumstances of the accident.
SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless
Data from the driving assist systems are also the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee
recorded. This includes data such as whether or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-
the systems were inactive or active and if ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-
such action had an impact on the vehicle’s tractual provisions.
dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the
aforementioned situations, accelerating or Due to legal requirements in safety-related
decelerating the vehicle. products, SEAT may use the EDR data for field
research and in order to improve vehicle sys-
96
 Self-help

Emergencies Note ● Box spanner for wheel bolts*

Technical data
● The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher ● Jack*
are not part of the vehicle's standard equip- ● Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cov-
Self-help ment. ers* / wheel bolt cap clip.
● The first aid kit must comply with legal re-
Emergency equipment quirements. Some of the items listed are only provided in
certain model versions, or are optional ex-
● Observe the expiry date of the contents of
tras.
Emergency warning triangle* the first aid kit. After it has expired you

Advice
should purchase a new one.
The use of reflective warning triangles is WARNING
● The fire extinguisher must comply with le-
obligatory in emergencies in some countries. gal requirements. ● The factory-supplied jack is only designed
As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light for changing wheels on this model. On no ac-
● Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully
bulbs. count attempt to use it for lifting heavier ve-
functional. The fire extinguisher should,
hicles or other loads. Risk of injury.
The warning triangle is under the storage therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker

Operation
on the fire extinguisher will inform you of the ● Use the jack only on a firm, level ground.
compartment which is located under the lug-
gage compartment floor. next date for checking. ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is
● Before acquiring accessories and emergen- on the jack. Risk of accident.
Note cy equipment see the instructions in “Acces- ● If work is to be carried out underneath the
sories and spares” ››› page 259. vehicle, this must be secured by suitable
● The warning triangle is not part of the vehi-
means. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.

Emergencies
cle's standard equipment.
● The warning triangle should meet legal re-
quirements. Vehicle tools Note
The jack does not generally require any main-
Read the additional information carefully tenance. If required, it should be greased us-
›››  page 65 ing universal type grease.
First-aid kit and fire extinguisher*
Depending on the equipment, the tools and
The first-aid kit can go in the storage com- anti-puncture kit* are stored under the floor

Safety
partment which is located under the luggage panel in the luggage compartment.
compartment floor.
The tool kit includes:
The fire extinguisher* is attached to the lug-
gage compartment carpet with Velcro. ● Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts*
● Towline anchorage
97
 Emergencies

Tyre repair WARNING manual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk of

vehicle involuntary movement.
Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* gerous, especially when filling the tyre at the
roadside. Please observe the following rules WARNING
Read the additional information carefully to minimise the risk of injury:
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
›››  page 64 ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. same performance properties as a conven-
The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) Park it at a safe distance from surrounding tional tyre.
will reliably seal punctures caused by the traffic to fill the tyre.
● Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
penetration of a foreign body of up to about ● Ensure the ground on which you park is flat
● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and
4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign ob- and solid.
fast cornering.
jects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. ● All passengers and particularly children
● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
must keep a safe distance from the work area.
After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
you must again check the tyre pressure about ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn the tyre.
10 minutes after starting the engine. other road users.
● Use the tyre mobility system only if you are
You should only use the tyre mobility set if For the sake of the environment
familiar with the necessary procedures. Oth-
the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are erwise, you should seek professional assis- Dispose of used or expired sealant observing
familiar with the procedure and you have the tance. any legal requirements.
necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you ● The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo-
should seek professional assistance. rary emergency use only until you can reach Note
the nearest specialised workshop.
Do not use the tyre sealant in the following ● A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at
● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo- SEAT dealerships.
cases: bility set as soon as possible.
● Take into account the separate instruction
● If the wheel rim has been damaged. ● The sealant is a health hazard and must be manual of the tyre mobility set* manufactur-
● In outside temperatures below -20°C (-4°F). cleaned immediately if it comes into contact er.
with the skin.
● In the event of cuts or perforations in the
● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the
tyre greater than 4 mm.
reach of small children.
● If you have been driving with very low pres-
● Never use a jack, even if it has been ap-
sure or a completely flat tyre.
proved for your vehicle.
● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by
● Always stop the engine, apply the hand-
date. brake lever firmly and engage gear if using a

98
 Self-help

Contents of the tyre mobility system* 7 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- heating! Before switching on the air compres-

Technical data
toring system (it can also be integrated in sor again, let it cool for several minutes.
the inflator tube).
8 Tube for inflating tyres
9 12 volt connector Check after 10 minutes of driving
10 Bottle of sealant
Screw in the inflator tube ››› Fig. 105 8
11 Spare tyre valve again and check the pressure on the gauge

Advice
7 .
The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the
lower end for the valve insert. The valve in-
sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:
way. This also applies to its replacement part ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed
11 . sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
● You should obtain professional assistance

Operation
Fig. 105 Standard representation: contents of WARNING ››› .
the anti-puncture kit.
When inflating the wheel, the air compressor
and the inflator tube may become hot. 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
the floor covering in the luggage compart- ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. ● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value
ment. It includes the following components ● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or again.

Emergencies
››› Fig. 105: hot air compressor on flammable material. ● Carefully resume your journey, without ex-
● Allow them to cool before storing the de- ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph), until you reach
1 Valve insert remover vice. the nearest specialised workshop and re-
2 Sticker indicating maximum speed “max. ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at place the tyre.
80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
3 Filler tube with cap too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a WARNING
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
4 Air compressor tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous

Safety
and can cause accidents and serious injury.
5 ON/OFF switch
● Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure
6 Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated CAUTION is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.
in the inflator tube).
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- ● Seek specialist assistance.
mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over-

99
 Emergencies

Changing the windscreen wiper ● Clean the windscreen wiper blades and all Towing or tow-starting
windows regularly.
blades
● The wiper blades should be changed once General information
or twice a year.
Changing the windscreen and rear Read the additional information carefully
window wiper blades ›››  page 70.
CAUTION
Read the additional information carefully ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could Tow-starting means starting the engine of
›››  page 73. scratch the glass. the vehicle while another pulls it.
Perfect windscreen wiper blade condition is ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint Towing means one vehicle pulling another
essential for clear vision. Damaged wiper thinner or similar products to clean the win- that is not roadworthy.
blades should be replaced immediately. dows. This could damage the windscreen
wiper blades. If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access
The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as ● Never move any windscreen wiper by hand.
system, towing is only allowed with the igni-
standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is This could cause damage. tion on!
responsible for ensuring that the wipe is si- The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is
● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the
lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the towed with the engine switched off and the
windscreen wiper arms, the latter should only
noise of the water as it is wiped across the be lifted off the windscreen when in service ignition connected. Depending on the battery
windscreen will be louder. position. charge status, the drop in voltage may be so
Check the condition of the wiper blades regu- large, even after just a few minutes, that no
larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, Note electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.
they should be changed if they are damaged, the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with
● The windscreen wiper arms can be moved
or cleaned if they are dirty ››› . the Keyless Access system, the steering
to the service position only when the bonnet
wheel could lock up.
If this does not produce the desired results, is properly closed.
the setting angle of the windscreen wiper ● You can also use the service position, for WARNING
arms might be incorrect. They should be example, if you want to fix a cover over the
checked by a specialised workshop and cor- windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of If the vehicle has no electrical power, the
rected if necessary. ice. brake lights, turn signals and all other lights
will no longer function. Do not have the vehi-
cle towed away. Failure to follow this instruc-
WARNING
tion could result in an accident.
Do not drive unless you have good visibility
through all windows!

100
 Self-help

WARNING For technical reasons, towing the following deactivated. If the vehicle has no power sup-

Technical data
vehicles is not allowed: ply or there is an electric system fault, the
The risk of accidents is high when tow-start-
engine must be tow-started to deactivate the
ing, for example, the towed vehicle can easily ● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
electronic parking brake and the electronic
be driven into the towing vehicle.
● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- lock of the steering column.
cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access
CAUTION locking and ignition system the steering re-
If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubricant mains locked and the electronic parking
in the automatic transmission the car may brake cannot be deactivated nor can the elec-

Advice
only be towed with the driven wheels lifted tronic lock of the steering column be re-
clear of the road, or transported on a special leased if they are activated.
car transporter or trailer. ● If the battery is flat, it is possible that the
engine control units may not operate correct-
CAUTION ly.

Operation
Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in at-
tempt to start it. There is risk of damage to However, if the vehicle must absolutely be
the catalytic converter. tow-started (in the case of manual gearbox-
es):
Note ● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.

● Please observe related legal requirements. ● Keep the clutch pressed down.

Emergencies
● Switch on the hazard warning lights of both ● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-
vehicles. However, observe any regulations ing lights.
to the contrary. ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the
● The tow rope must not be twisted. Other- clutch.
wise the front tow line anchorage could be ● Once the engine starts, press the clutch
pulled off the vehicle.
and disengage the gear to avoid colliding
with the towing vehicle.

Safety
Indications for tow-starting Note
The vehicle can only be tow-started if the
Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star-
electronic parking brake and, if appropriate,
ted. The jump start should be used instead
the electronic lock of the steering column are
›››  page 71.
101
 Emergencies

Anchoring the front tow line – Take the towline anchorage from the on-
board tool set.
– Remove the cover by pressing down on its
right-hand side until it is unclipped
››› Fig. 106.
– Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in
the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 107.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage

and fit the cover back on the bumper. Put the
towline anchorage back in the vehicle tool Fig. 109 Right side of the rear bumper: tow-
kit. The towline anchorage should always be line anchorage screwed in.
Fig. 106 Right side of the front bumper: re- kept in the vehicle.
move the lid. The rear towline anchorage should only be
mounted if you wish to tow another vehicle.
Rear towline anchorage On the right of the rear bumper there is a cov-
er which covers a threaded hole.
– Take the towline anchorage out of the vehi-
cle tool set ››› page 97.
– Remove the cover by pressing down on its
right-hand side until it is unclipped
››› Fig. 108.
– Screw the towline anchorage into the screw
connection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 109
Fig. 107 Right side of the front bumper: tow-
line anchorage screwed in.
and tighten with the wheel brace.

Fig. 108 Right side of the rear bumper: cover- After use, unscrew the towline anchorage
The front towline anchorage is only mounted and put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace
if the vehicle has to be towed. cap.
the cover on the bumper. The towline anchor-
There is a cover with an opening into which age should always be kept in the vehicle.
the towline anchorage is screwed on the right
part of the front bumper.
102
 Self-help

WARNING Towing a vehicle equipped with auto- Note

Technical data
● If the towline anchorage is not screwed in matic gearbox ● If it is not possible to tow the vehicle in the
as far as the stop, there is a risk of the screw normal way, or if it has to be towed further
connection shearing off during towing (acci- Certain restrictions must be observed when than 50 km (30 miles), it must be transported
dent risk). towing your vehicle. on a special car transporter or trailer.
● If your car has a towing bracket, only use Please observe the relevant instructions ● Should the power supply to the selector
special towing ropes. Risk of accident! ››› page 100. lever be interrupted in position P, the selector
lever will be locked. Before the vehicle can be
The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or

Advice
recovered/manoeuvred you must manually
CAUTION tow rope in the normal way, with all four release the selector lever.
In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, only wheels on the ground. When doing so,
use special tow bars to prevent damage to please note the following points:
the ball joint. These tow bars have been spe-
cially approved for use with towing brackets. ● Make sure the selector lever is in the N po-
sition.

Operation
● The vehicle must not be towed faster than
Towing vehicles with a manual gear- 50 km/h (30 mph).
box ● The vehicle must not be towed further than
50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engine
Towing is relatively straightforward. is not running, the gearbox oil pump does

Emergencies
not work and the gearbox is not adequately
Please observe the relevant instructions lubricated for higher speeds or longer distan-
››› page 100. ces.
The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or
tow rope in the normal way, with all four If the vehicle has to be towed with a break-
wheels on the road; it can also be towed with down truck, it must only be suspended at the
either the front or rear wheels lifted off the front wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo-
road. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h cated on the front wheels. If the car is towed

Safety
(30 mph). with the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e.
travelling backwards), the drive shafts also
turn backwards. The planetary gears in the
automatic gearbox then turn at such high
speeds that the gearbox will be severely
damaged in a short time.
103
 Emergencies

Fuses and bulbs ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only ● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-
replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper- pear in the following tables.
age (same colour and markings) and size. ● Some of the equipment listed in the tables
Fuses ● Never repair a fuse. below pertain only to certain versions of the
● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple model or are optional extras.
Introduction
or similar. ● Please note that the above lists, while cor-
rect at the time of printing, are subject to
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
change.
electrical components. Likewise, an electrical CAUTION
component can be protected by several ● To prevent damage to the vehicle's electric
fuses. system, before replacing a fuse always turn
off the ignition, the lights and all electrical Fuses to the left of the instrument
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
elements and remove the key from the igni- panel
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
tion.
fuse blows after a short time, you must have Read the additional information carefully
the electrical system checked by a special- ● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating
fuse, you could cause damage to another part ›››  page 62
ised workshop as soon as possible.
of the electrical system. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
WARNING ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- amperage (same colour and markings) and
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can size.
The high voltages in the electrical system can
damage the electrical system.
give serious electrical shocks, causing burns
and even death! ● Always carefully remove the fuse box cov- No. Consumer/Amps
ers and refit them correctly to avoid problems
● Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni- 1 Tow Hook 20
with your vehicle.
tion system.
2 Cigarette lighter /Power point 20
● Take care not to cause short circuits in the
electrical system. Note
3 Sound amplifier 30
● One component may have more than one
fuse. 6 Central locking 40
WARNING
● Several components may run on a single 8 Heating fan/Climatronic 30
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
fuse.
bridging a current circuit without fuses can 10 Tow Hook 20
cause a fire and serious injury. ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter. These should 11 CNG Solenoid Valves 7.5
only be changed by a specialised workshop.

104
 Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumer/Amps No. Consumer/Amps No. Consumer/Amps

Technical data
Lights switch, steering column LSS 33 Left Door Window Control 30 58 Double Water Pump 7.5
13 and SMLS, diagnostic port, rain/light 7.5
sensor 35 Left Lights Power Supply 40 59 Heated rear view mirrors 10

14 steering column LSS: wiper controls 10 36 Signal Horn 20 60 Tow Hook 30

15 Instrument panel 7.5 37 Heated seats control unit 30 61 Tow Hook 30

16 Right Lights Power Supply 40 38 BCM Power C63 30

Advice
17 Right Door Window Control 30 39 BSD, PDC, MRR 10 Fuse arrangement in engine compart-
18 Windscreen wipers 30 Lights switch, diagnostic port, head- ment
light range control, steering column
19 Radio, Multimedia System 25 40 LSS: lights, halogen headlights, re- 7.5 Read the additional information carefully
verse light switch, electrochromic mir- ›››  page 62

Operation
20 Heated Rear Window 30 ror, RKA without radio
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
21 SCR Control Unit 30 Regulation of unfolded exterior mir-
41 7.5 amperage (same colour and markings) and
rors,
23 Rear View Camera 7.5 size.
Clutch pedal, ignition relays, CNG re-
Connectivity Box, external audio 42 7.5
lay coil, AC pressure sensor No. Consumer/Amps
24 source wiring (Double USB-Aux IN), 5

Emergencies
telephone amplifier, MIB display 43 DWP relay coil, rear window wiper mo- MPI Engine Injection Module 10
15
tor, heated nozzles
25 Steering Column Electronics (MFL) 7.5 1 TSI Engine Injection Module 15
44 Airbag 7.5
26 Gateway 7.5 Diesel Engine Injection Module 30
45 Leimo Plus left headlight 7.5
27 Active Suspension Control Unit 7.5 Fuel metering valve (TJ4/T6P/TJ7), Low
46 Leimo Plus right headlight 7.5 temperature coolant pump
28 DWA Sensor 7.5
(TJ4/T6P/TJ7); Oil Pressure Regulating

Safety
Steering Column Lock, Kessy Control 2 7.5
29 DWA Horn 7.5 48 7.5 Valve (TJ1), Coolant Valve AGR (TJ1),
Unit High and Low Water Bumps (TJ1), SCR
9AA/9AB climate control unit 7.5 relay coil
49 SCR Relay Coil 7.5
31
9AK Climatronic control unit 15 53 Automatic gearbox lever, ZSS 7.5
3 Lambda probes 15 »
32 Steering Column LSS, without Kessy 7.5
105
 Emergencies

No. Consumer/Amps No. Consumer/Amps Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
there are different sets of headlights and tail
4
Petrol engine pump relay (MPI), Gauge
15
TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moderate
20 lights:
control unit (TSI and diesel) 25 climate countries
● Halogen headlights.
Pressure transducer, EPW Solenoid PTC1 40
Valve, TOG Sensor, PWM Electric fan, ● Full-LED main headlights*
5 Camshaft Control Valve, Active Carbon 10 TJ1/TJ4/TJ7/T6P or TH4/T5I Electric fan ● Halogen headlights with LED daytime run-
26 50
Tank Valve and Oil Pressure Regulat- for warm climate countries
ning lights*
ing Valve (TSI)
TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moderate ● Rear bulb light
30
Ignition coils (MPI and TSI) 20 27 climate countries
● LED rear light*
6 Glow plug relay, Suction hose resist- PTC2 40
7.5
ance (diesel) Full-LED headlight system*
28 PTC3 40
7 Vacuum pump (TSI) 15 Full-LED headlights handle all light functions
(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped
Injectors and EKP Relay Coil (MPI and
8 10 beam and route light) with light emitting di-
CNG), Fuel metering valve (diesel)
Changing bulbs odes (LEDs) as a light source.
9 Servo sensor 7.5
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
General notes
10 Vref Battery: Gateway, BDM and BCM 7.5 lifetime of the vehicle and the bulbs cannot
Read the additional information carefully be replaced. In case of headlight failure, go
Engine Injection Module, Main Engine
14
Relay, ESC
7.5
›››  page 63 to an authorised workshop to have it re-
placed.
15 Automatic Gearbox DQ200 and AQ160 30 Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of
practical skill. WARNING
17 50 Diag 7.5
If you choose to change the engine compart- ● Take particular care when working on com-
18 Starter Motor 30 ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a ponents in the engine compartment if the en-
ESC (Pump) 60 dangerous area ››› in Safety notes for work gine is warm, there is a risk of burns.
20 in the engine compartment on page 273. ● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The
ABS (Pump) 40 glass can break when you touch the bulb,
Always use identical bulbs with the same
21 ESC/ABS (Valves) 25
causing injury.
designation. The name can be found on the
● When changing bulbs, please take care not
TH4 Electric fan without A/C for mod-
base of the bulb holder.
24 30 to injure yourself on sharp parts in the head-
erate climate countries light housing.
106
 Fuses and bulbs

CAUTION ated by the bulb, they will be deposited on – Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit

Technical data
the reflector and will impair its surface. the new one.
● Remove the ignition key before working on
the electric system. Otherwise, a short circuit ● Depending on the level of equipment fitted – Fit the bulb connector 2 .
could occur. in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or
all of the interior and/or exterior lighting. – Fit cover 1 , turning it towards the right.
● Switch off the lights or parking lights be-
LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds that – Check whether the new bulb is working.
fore you change a bulb.
of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an
authorised workshop for its replacement.
For the sake of the environment

Advice
Please ask your specialist retailer how to dis-
pose of used bulbs in the proper manner.
Change the front bulbs
Note
Main beam headlight bulb
● Depending on weather conditions (cold or

Operation
wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail
lights and the turn signals may be temporari-
ly misted. This has no influence on the useful
life of the lighting system. By switching on
the lights, the area through which the beam
of light is projected will quickly be demisted.

Emergencies
However, the edges may continue to be mis-
ted.
● Please check at regular intervals that all
lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
not only in the interest of your own safety, Fig. 110 In the engine compartment: main
but also that of all other road users. beam headlight bulb.
● Before changing a bulb, make sure you

Safety
have the correct new bulb. – Raise the bonnet.
● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with – Turn the cover 1 anti-clockwise and take it
your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel out ››› Fig. 110.
instead. The residue left by the fingerprints
– Remove the bulb connector 2 by pulling it
would vaporise as a result of the heat gener-
outwards.
107
 Emergencies

Dipped beam headlight – Move the loop ››› Fig. 111 1 in the direc- Turn signal light and DRL (daytime
tion of the arrow and remove the cover. running light)1)
– Remove the bulb connector ››› Fig. 112 2 .
– Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 112 3
pressing inwards to the right.
– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
that the lug on the base fits into the recess
on the reflector.
– Fit the connector.
– Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure
Fig. 111 In the engine compartment: remove that the gasket sits well on the casing cover
the lid. during the operation. Fig. 113 In the engine compartment: turn sig-
– Check whether the new bulb is working. nal light bulb 1 and DRL (daytime running
light) bulb 2 .

– Raise the bonnet.

– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 113 1 or 2 to
the left and pull.
– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anticlockwise at the
same time.
– Installation involves all of the above steps
Fig. 112 In the engine compartment: dipped in reverse sequence.
beam headlight.

– Raise the bonnet.

1) In headlight versions with LED DRL, this light

source cannot be replaced. It is designed to last the

length of the vehicle’s service life. In case of failure,
go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.
108
 Fuses and bulbs

Fog light bulb 3. Remove the bulb connector 2 .

Technical data
4. Turn the bulb holder 3 to the left and
pull.
5. Remove the bulb by pressing on it and
turning it anticlockwise at the same
time.
6. Replace the bulb, making sure that the
fixing guides are in the right position

Advice
and then press it and turn it clockwise.
7 To install the headlight go back through Fig. 117 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail
the above steps in reverse. light.
Fig. 114 Fog light: extracting the grille 8. Check that the bulb works properly.
Follow the steps indicated:

Operation
1. Check which of the bulbs is defective.
Change the rear bulbs 2. Open the rear lid.
3. Remove the lid, levering the flat side of
Rear bulbs (in the side panel) a screwdriver into the recess
››› Fig. 116 1 .

Emergencies
4. Remove the bulb connector 2 .
5. Unscrew the light securing bolt 3 by
hand or using a screwdriver.
Fig. 115 Fog light: remove the bulb holder 6. Remove the light from the body, gently
pulling it toward you, and place on a
Follow the steps indicated: clean, smooth surface.
7. Remove the bulb holder unlocking the

Safety
1. Lever the groove with a screwdriver retaining tabs ››› Fig. 117 A .
››› Fig. 114 (arrow). Next, unclip the clips
located on the edge of the grille, pulling 8. Change the damaged bulb.
Fig. 116 Luggage compartment: access to the
on it. bolt securing the tail light unit. 9. To refit follow the steps in reverse order,
2. Remove the 3 screws ››› Fig. 115 1 and taking special care when fitting the bulb »
remove the fog light.
109
 Emergencies

holder. The securing tabs must click into Note

place.
● For LED lights, you can only change the turn
signal and reverse light bulbs.
CAUTION
Take care when removing the rear light unit to
make sure there is no damage to the paint-
work or any of its components. Number plate light
– Insert the flat part of a screwdriver into the
Note special slot and remove the bulb.
● Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to
Fig. 119 Remove the bulb holder. – Remove the bulb holder, by turning it until
place under the glass on the rear light unit, to
it is free.
avoid any scratches.
Follow the steps indicated: – Change the bulb.
● For LED lights, you can only change the turn
signal and reverse light bulbs. 1. Check which of the bulbs is defective. – Replace the bulb holder, by turning it until
2. Open the rear lid. it fits fully.
3. Remove the rear lid cover in the direc- – Fit the light into the space and press until
Rear lights (in the rear lid) tion indicated ››› Fig. 118. you hear a “click”.
4. Remove the bulb connector
››› Fig. 119 1 .
5. Remove the bulb holder unlocking the
retaining tabs A .
4. Change the damaged bulb.
6. Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints
from the glass part of the bulb.
7. Check that the new bulb works properly.
8. Carry out the same actions in reverse or-
Fig. 118 Rear lid open: remove the lid. der for assembly and pay special atten-
tion to placing the bulb holder, ensuring
that the tabs are properly secured.

110
 Fuses and bulbs

Side turn signals Changing the interior bulbs – First fit the glass with the fastening tabs

Technical data
over the frame of the switch. Next press the
front part until the two long tabs click on
Interior light and front reading lights
the support.

Note
In LED courtesy lights it is not possible to re-
place the light sources. If the light does not
work, take the vehicle to an official Service.

Advice
Fig. 120 Turn signal integrated in the rear
view mirror

Operation
Fig. 121 Front reading light.
The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-
grated in the rear view mirrors. To remove the glass
In case of failure, go to an authorised work- – Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas-
shop to have it replaced. ing and the glass ››› Fig. 121.

Emergencies
– Carefully remove the glass, levering it to
avoid possible damage.
Additional brake light
Given the difficulty involved in the replace- To replace the bulbs
ment of this light it should be done by Tech- – Pull the bulbs outwards.
nical Services.
– To remove the central bulb, hold and press
to one side.

Safety
Assembly
– Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen-
tly on the outer edge of the side light.

111
 Emergencies

Luggage compartment light* – Change the bulb.

– Connect the cable again.
– Refit the bulb and press it in until it engag-
es.

Fig. 122 Boot light.

Fig. 123 Boot light.

– Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside

edge using the flat side of a screwdriver
››› Fig. 122.
– Disconnect the cable.
– Press the bulb sideways and remove it from
its housing ››› Fig. 123.

112
 Operation

Fig. 124 Dash panel.

114
 Controls and displays

Operation – Warning and indication lamps . . . 47 – Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Technical data
9 Lever for: – Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . 287
– Windscreen wipers and washer . . 149 Handbrake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Controls and displays
19

– Rear window washer system* . . . 149 20 Starter button (Keyless Access lock-
– Multi-function display control* . . 37 ing and ignition system) . . . . . . . . . . 176
General instrument panel
10 Infotainment system: 21 Depending on the equipment:
1 Electric window controls . . . . . . . . . . 141 – USB/AUX-IN input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
11 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Advice
2 Door release lever – Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-
12 Depending on the equipment,
3 Control for adjusting electric exteri- glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . 156 er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
or mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 22 Driver seat heating control* . . . . . . . 154
– CD player* and/or SD card*
4 Air vents ››› Booklet Radio 23 Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-
5 Lever for: 13 Passenger airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Operation
– Turn signals/main beam head- 14 Front passenger airbag disconnec- 24 Steering column control lever* . . . . 20
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 tion switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 25 Fuse housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
– Cruise control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 15 Switches for: 26 Bonnet release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
6 Depending on equipment fitted: – Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . 167 27 Headlight range control* . . . . . . . . . . 148
– Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . 205 – Air conditioning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 28 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Emergencies
7 Steering wheel with horn and – Climatronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Note
– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 16 Front passenger seat heating con-
trol* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 ● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-
– On-board computer controls . . . . 37
tion is only fitted on certain models or are op-
– Controls for radio, telephone, 17 Gear lever tional extras.
navigation and speech dialogue – Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 ● A separate Instructions Manual is enclosed
system ››› Booklet Radio if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted
– Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Safety
– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- radio, CD player, AUX IN connection or navi-
18 Depending on the equipment, but-
shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 190 gation system.
tons for:
8 Instrument panel and warning ● The arrangement of switches and controls
– Central locking* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 on right-hand drive models* may be slightly
lamps:
– Start-Stop operation button . . . . . 202 different from the layout shown in »
– Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
– SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
115
 Operation

››› page 115. However, the symbols used to

identify the controls are the same.

116
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Technical data
Instruments
General instrument panel

Advice
Operation
Emergencies
Fig. 125 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

The layout of the instruments depends upon change up a gear or move the selector 5 Speedometer.
the model and the engine. lever to D (or lift your foot off the acceler- 6 Fuel gauge ››› page 121.
ator) before the needle reaches the red
1 Rev counter (with the engine running, in zone ››› . WARNING

Safety
hundreds of revolutions per minute)
››› page 118. 2 Engine coolant temperature display Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
››› page 120. the risk of injury.
The beginning of the red zone of the rev
3 Displays on the screen ››› page 118. ● Do not operate the instrument panel con-
counter indicates the maximum speed in
any gear after running-in and with the en- 4 Adjuster button and display trols when driving. »
gine hot. However, it is advisable to ››› page 120.
117
 Operation

CAUTION CAUTION ● Service interval display ›››  page 43.

● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs ● Second speed display ››› page 119.
Never allow the rev counter needle
and heavy acceleration and do not make the ››› Fig. 1251 to go into the red zone on the ● Speed warning function ›››  page 42.
engine work hard. scale for more than a very brief period, other- ● Start-Stop system status display
wise there is a risk of engine damage.
››› page 202.
● Active cylinder management display
Rev counter For the sake of the environment
(ACT®)* ››› page 198
Changing up a gear early will help you to save ● Low consumption driving status ()
The rev counter indicates the number of en- fuel and minimise emissions and engine
gine revolutions per minute ››› Fig. 125 1 . ››› page 119
noise.
● Engine code (MKB) ››› page 119.
Together with the gear-change indicator, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable Distance travelled
Indications on the display
speed. The odometer registers the total distance
A variety of information can be viewed on the travelled by the car.
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates
the maximum engine speed which may be instrument panel display ››› Fig. 125 3 de- The odometer (trip) shows the distance
used briefly when the engine is warm and af- pending on the vehicle equipment: travelled since the last odometer reset. The
ter it has been run in properly. Before reach- ● Bonnet, rear lid and doors open last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-
ing this range, you should change to a higher ›››  page 40. ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.
gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or for
automatic gearboxes put the selector lever in
● Information and warning texts. ● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 125 4 to re-
“D” or take your foot off the accelerator ped- ● Mileage. set the trip recorder to 0.
al. ● Time. ● Keep the button 4 pressed for about 3
seconds and the previous value will be dis-
We recommend that you avoid high revs and ● Navigation instructions.
played.
that you follow the recommendations on the ● Outside temperature.
gear-change indicator. Consult the additional
information in ›››  page 41, Gear-change
● Compass. Time
indicator. ● Shift lever position ››› page 188. ● To set the time, keep the button ››› Fig. 125
● Recommended gear (manual gearbox) 4 pressed for more than 3 seconds to select
›››  page 41. the hour or minute display.
● Multifunction display (MFD) and menus
with different setting options ›››  page 37.
118
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

● To continue setting the time, press button Recommended gear (manual gearbox) Start-Stop operating display

Technical data
4 . Hold button down to scroll through the The recommended gear in order to save fuel Updated information relating to the status is
numbers quickly. is displayed on the instrument panel while displayed on the instrument panel
● Once you have set the time, the second you are driving ›››  page 41. ››› page 202.
count will begin from 0 automatically.
● Press the button 4 again in order to finish Second speed display (mph or km/h) Low consumption driving status (ECO)*
setting the time. In addition to the speedometer, the speed Depending on the equipment, when driving,
● Once you have set the time, the time indi- can also be displayed in a different unit of the “ECO” display appears on the instrument

Advice
cator will disappear and the changes will re- measurement (in miles or in km per hour). panel when the vehicle is in low consump-
main. tion status due to active cylinder manage-
This option cannot be deactivated in models
ment (ACT®)* ››› page 198.
The time can also be set on the Easy Connect destined for countries in which the second
system using the  button and the function speed must always be visible.
Identifying letters on engine (MKB)
button SETTINGS > Date and time The second speed display can be adjusted in
Hold the button ››› Fig. 125 4 down for more

Operation
››› page 122. the Easy Connect system by means of the 
than 15 seconds to display the identifying
button and the function button SETTINGS >
letters of the vehicle engine (MKB). To do
Compass Units ››› page 122.
this, the ignition must be switched on and
With the ignition on and the navigation sys- the engine switched off.
tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to Speed warning
the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis- When the speed setting is exceeded, this will WARNING

Emergencies
played on the instrument panel. be indicated on the instrument panel display. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
This is very useful, for example when using symbols on page 122.
Selector lever position winter tyres that are not designed for driving
The selected gear is displayed on the side of at the maximum speed of the vehicle
›››  page 42. WARNING
the selector lever and on the instrument pan-
el display. In positions D and S, and with the Even though outside temperatures are above
The speed warning settings can be adjusted
Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis- freezing, some roads and bridges may be icy.
in the Easy Connect system by means of the

Safety
played.  button and the function button SET- ● At outside temperatures above +4°C
TINGS > Driver Assistance (+39°F), even when the “ice crystal” symbol
is not visible, there may still be patches of ice
››› page 122.
on the road.
● The outside temperature sensor takes a
guideline measurement. »
119
 Operation

Note the measurement units (kilometres Coolant temperature gauge

“km”/miles “m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*.
● Different versions of the instrument panel
Please refer to the Easy Connect* Instructions
are available and therefore the versions and
Manual for more details.
instructions on the display may vary. In the
case of displays without warning or informa-
tion texts, faults are indicated exclusively by Odometer/trip recorder
the warning lamps. The odometer shows the total distance cov-
● Depending on the equipment, some set- ered by the vehicle.
tings and instructions can also be carried out
The trip recorder shows the distance that has
in the Easy Connect system.
been travelled since it was last reset. It is
● When several warnings are active at the
used to measure short trips. The last digit of
same time, the symbols are shown succes-
the trip recorder indicates distances of 100
sively for a few seconds and will stay on until Fig. 127 Instrument panel: coolant tempera-
metres or tenths of a mile.
the fault is rectified. ture gauge
The trip recorder can be set to zero by press-
ing 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 126. For vehicles with no coolant temperature
gauge, a control lamp  appears for high
Odometer
Fault display coolant temperatures ››› page 278. Please
note ››› .
If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the
letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder The coolant temperature gauge only works
display. Have the fault repaired immediately, when the ignition is switched on ››› Fig. 127.
as far as is possible. In order to avoid engine damage, please read
the following notes for the different tempera-
ture ranges.

Engine cold
If only the diodes in the lower part of the
scale light up, this indicates that the engine
Fig. 126 Instrument panel: odometer and re- has not yet reached operating temperature.
set button. Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and
do not make the engine work hard.
The distance covered is displayed in “kilome-
tres” or miles “m”. It is possible to change
120
 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Normal temperature moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can re- CAUTION

Technical data
If in normal operations, the diodes light up duce the cooling effect, which could cause
Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An ir-
until the central zone, it means that the en- the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis-
regular fuel supply could cause misfiring. In
gine has reached operating temperature. At tance.
this way the unburned fuel can reach the ex-
high outside temperatures and when making haust system, which could cause the catalytic
the engine work hard, the diodes may contin- converter to overheat resulting in damage.
ue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This Fuel level
is no cause for concern, provided the control
lamp  does not light up on the instrument

Advice
panel digital display. Warning and control lamps
Heat range Warning symbols
When the diodes light up in the upper area of
Read the additional information carefully
the display and the control lamp appears 
›››  page 47

Operation
on the instrument panel display, the coolant
temperature is excessive ››› page 278. There are red warning symbols (priority 1)
and yellow warning symbols (priority 2).
CAUTION
Fig. 128 Fuel gauge. Warning messages, Priority 1 (red)
● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and If one of these faults occurs, the warning

Emergencies
making the engine work hard for approxi- The display ››› Fig. 128 only works when the lamp will light up or flash and will be accom-
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine ignition is switched on. When the display rea- panied by three audible warnings. This is a
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm al- ches the reserve mark, the lower diode lights danger warning. Stop the vehicle and switch
so depends on the outside temperature. If up in red and the control lamp  appears off the engine. Check the fault and correct it.
necessary, use the engine oil temperature* ››› page 117. When the fuel level is very low, Obtain professional assistance if necessary.
›››  page 42 as a guide. the lower diode flashes in red.
If several priority 1 faults are detected at the
● Additional lights and other accessories in The fuel range is displayed on the instrument same time, the symbols will be displayed one
front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect panel ››› Fig. 125 3 .

Safety
after the other for about 2 seconds at a time
of the coolant. At high outside temperatures
and high engine loads, there is a risk of the You can consult the tank capacity of your ve- and will continue until the fault is corrected.
engine overheating. hicle in the ›››  page 57 section. No menus will be shown in the display for the
● The front spoiler also ensures proper distri- duration of a priority 1 warning message. »
bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is

121
 Operation

Examples of priority 1 warning messages

(red)
Examples of priority 2 warning reports (yel-
low):*
Introduction to the Easy
● Brake system symbol  with the warning ● Fuel warning light with the information text Connect system*
message STOP BRAKE FLUID INSTRUC- PLEASE REFUEL.
TION MANUAL or STOP BRAKE FAULT IN- System settings (CAR)*
STRUCTION MANUAL. WARNING
● Coolant symbol  with the warning mes- If the warning lamps and messages are ignor- CAR menu
sage STOP SEE COOLANT INSTRUCTION ed, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may
MANUAL. cause accidents and severe injuries. Read the additional information carefully
● Engine oil pressure symbol  with the ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text ›››  page 34
warning message STOP ENGINE OIL messages. To select the settings menus, depending on
PRESSURE LOW! INSTRUCTION MANUAL. ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. the version, press the Easy Connect button
● Park the vehicle away from traffic and en-  and the SETTINGS function button, OR
Warning messages, Priority 2 (yellow) sure that there are no highly flammable ma- press the  button and then SETTINGS .
If one of these faults occurs, the correspond- terials under the vehicle that could come into The actual number of menus available and
contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry
ing warning lamp lights up and is accompa- the name of the various options in these me-
grass, fuel).
nied by an audible warning. Check the corre- nus will depend on the vehicle’s electronics
sponding function as soon as possible al- ● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
and equipment.
though the vehicle may be used without risk. dent for the driver and for other road users. If
necessary, switch on the hazard warning When the function button check box is activa-
If several priority 2 warning messages are de- lamps and put out the warning triangle to ad- ted , the function is active.
tected at the same time, the symbols are dis- vise other drivers.
Pressing the menu button  will always take
played one after the other for about 2 sec- ● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
you to the last menu used.
onds at a time. After a set time, the informa- engine and allow it to cool.
tion text will disappear and the symbol will ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a Any changes made using the settings menus
be shown as a reminder at the side of the hazardous area and could cause severe inju- are automatically saved on closing those me-
display. ries ››› page 273. nus.
Priority 2 warning messages will not be
Menu Vehicle settings Page
shown until all Priority 1 warning messages CAUTION
have been dealt with! ESC system ››› page 181
Failure to heed the control lamps and text
messages when they appear may result in Tyres ››› page 287
faults in the vehicle.

122
 Introduction to the Easy Connect system*

Menu Vehicle settings Page

Technical data
Lights ››› page 143
››› page 214
Driver assistance ››› page 210
››› page 231
Parking and manoeuvring ››› page 244
Ambient lighting ››› page 148

Advice
Mirrors and windscreen wipers
››› page 151
››› page 33

Opening and closing

››› page 142
››› page 132

Operation
Instrument panel ››› page 38
Date and time –

Units –

Service ››› page 43

Emergencies
Factory settings –

WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident, with
the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect
system while driving could distract you from
traffic.

Safety
123
 Operation

Communications and multi-

media
Steering wheel controls*
General information
The steering wheel includes a multifunction
module from where it is possible to control
the audio, telephone and radio/navigation
functions without needing to distract the
driver.
There are two versions of the multifunction
module:
● Audio, telephone and navigation with voice
control version: for controlling the audio
functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,
iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system
from the steering wheel.
● Audio, telephone and navigation without
voice control version: for controlling the au-
dio functions available (radio, audio CD,
MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth sys-
tem from the steering wheel.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment.

124
 Communications and multimedia

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Technical data
Advice
Fig. 129 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Operation
Turn announcement volume
up/down. You do not need to
Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do
A be in navigation mode but
not need to be in audio mode not need to be in audio mode not need to be in audio mode not need to be in telephone
Turn there has to be an announce-
(radio). (media). (media). mode.
ment active when you adjust
the volume.

Emergencies
A Mute the current navigation an-
Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.
Press nouncement.

Activate/deactivate voice control.

B a) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). When the system is in telephone mode this button’s function
is deactivated during the ongoing call, and without Radio/Media functionality (except AUX).

Short press: Switch to the pre- – There is no active call: Ra-

vious/next song. dio/Media functionality (ex- No function for the other
Search for the previous/next

Safety
C / D No function cept AUX) modes (navigation, assistants,
stationb).
Hold down: Fast rewind/for- vehicle status, travel data).
wardc). – Active call: no function

Change instrument panel menu.

E / F a)
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). »
125
 Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Coloured instrument panel: switch to the previous menu.
G
Monochrome instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

– There is no active call: List of

latest calls. – Active route: access the view
Coloured instrument panel: List
Coloured instrument panel: to halt guidance to destination.
H of stations available (only if
next track (only if the instru- No function – Active call: access the call
Turn the instrument panel is in au-
ment panel is in audio menu). options list (call on hold, hang – No active route: list of recent
dio menu).
up, mute microphone, private destinations.
number, etc.).

H
Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.
Press
a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
c) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

126
 Communications and multimedia

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Technical data
Advice
Fig. 130 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Operation
Turn announcement volume
up/down. You do not need to
Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do
A be in navigation mode but
not need to be in audio mode not need to be in audio mode not need to be in audio mode not need to be in telephone
Turn there has to be an announce-
(radio). (media). (media). mode.
ment active when you adjust
the volume.

Emergencies
A Mute the current navigation an-
Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.
Press nouncement.

– Incoming call: pick up (short press), reject (hold down).

– Active call: hang up active call (short press).
B a)
– No active/incoming call: open telephone menu (short press), redial the last active call (hold down).
These functions can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

Short press: Switch to the pre- – There is no active call: Ra-

Safety
vious/next song. dio/Media functionality (ex- No function for the other
Search for the previous/next
C / D No function cept AUX) modes (navigation, assistants,
stationb).
Hold down: Fast rewind/for- vehicle status, travel data).
wardc). – Active call: no function

Change instrument panel menu.

E / F a)
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). »
127
 Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephonea) Navigationa)

Cycles through the audio source: FM/AM – CD – SD - USB - AUX - BT Audio (only those that are available).
G
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

– There is no active call: List of

latest calls. – Active route: access the view
Coloured instrument panel: List
Coloured instrument panel: to halt guidance to destination.
H of stations available (only if
next track (only if the instru- No function – Active call: access the call
Turn the instrument panel is in au-
ment panel is in audio menu). options list (call on hold, hang – No active route: list of recent
dio menu).
up, mute microphone, private destinations.
number, etc.).

H
Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.
Press
a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
c) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

128
 Communications and multimedia

Multimedia Connectivity Box* / Wireless Charger* With the Wireless Charger you only have the

Technical data
wireless charging function if your mobile de-
vice has Qi technology.
USB/AUX-INPort
The Connectivity Box/Wireless Charger is in
the storage compartment area of the centre
console ››› Fig. 133.
The operating description is located in the re-
Fig. 132 Related video spective Instruction Manuals of the audio

Advice
system or the navigation system.

Note
Your mobile device must support the Qi wire-
less inductive charging interface standard for
proper operation.

Operation
Fig. 131 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Depending on the special characteristics and

the country, the vehicle may have a
USB/AUX-IN port.
The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the Fig. 133 Centre console: Connectivity Box.

Emergencies
storage compartment area of the centre con-
sole ››› Fig. 131. Depending on the features and the country,
the vehicle may have one of these two op-
The operating description is located in the re- tions: Connectivity Box or Wireless Charger.
spective Instruction Manuals of the audio
system or the navigation system. With the Connectivity Box you can charge
your mobile device wirelessly with Qi1) tech-
nology as well as reduce the radiation in the

Safety
vehicle and have better reception.

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile

phone wirelessly.
129
 Operation

Opening and closing Duplicate keys Remote control*

If you need a replacement key, go to a Techni-
cal Service with your vehicle identification
Keys number.
Set of keys WARNING
● An incorrect use of the keys can cause seri-
ous injuries.
● Never leave children or disabled persons in
the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may
not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on
their own.
Fig. 135 Assignment of buttons on the re-
● An uncontrolled use of the key could start
mote control key.
the engine or activate any electric equipment
(e.g. electric windows), causing risk of acci-
dent. The doors can be locked using the re-
mote control key. This could become an ob-
Fig. 134 Set of keys. stacle for assistance in an emergency situa-
tion.
The set of keys may consists of the following, ● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An
depending on the version of your vehicle: unauthorised use of your vehicle could result
● a remote control key ››› Fig. 134 A in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always
take the key with you when you leave the ve-
● a key without remote control B , hicle.
● a plastic key tab* C . ● Never remove the key from the ignition if
the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- Fig. 136 Vehicle key with alarm button.
or ing could suddenly block and it would be im-
possible to steer the vehicle. The radio frequency remote control key is
● two keys with remote control A
used to lock and unlock the vehicle from a
● a plastic key tab* C .
CAUTION distance.
There are electronic components in the re- By using button 4 ››› Fig. 135 on the control,
mote control key. Avoid wetting and hitting the key shaft is released.
the keys.
Unlocking the vehicle  ››› Fig. 135 1 .
130
 Opening and closing

Locking the vehicle  ››› Fig. 135 2 . ● If the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked SEAT recommends you ask a specialised

Technical data
by using the radio frequency remote control, workshop to replace the battery.
Unlocking the rear lid. Press button 
››› Fig. 135 3 until all the turn signals on the the remote control key will have to be re- The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-
synchronised. For this, go to your technical
vehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking but- cle key, under a cover.
services.
ton  3 is pressed, you have 2 minutes to
open the door. Once this time has passed, it Changing the battery
will lock again. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 130.
Replacing the battery
Moreover, the battery indicator on the key ● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-

Advice
››› Fig. 135 (arrow), will flash. hicle key ››› Fig. 137 in the direction of the ar-
The remote control transmitter and the bat- row ››› .
teries are integrated in the key. The receiver ● Extract the battery from the compartment
is inside the vehicle. The maximum range de- using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 138.
pends on different factors. The range is re- ● Place the new battery in the compartment

Operation
duced as the batteries start to lose power. as shown ››› Fig. 138, pressing in the oppo-
site direction to that shown by the arrow
Alarm button* ››› .
Only press alarm button in the event of an ● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 137, pressing
emergency ››› Fig. 136 5 ! When the alarm it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite
button is pressed, the vehicle horn is heard Fig. 137 Vehicle key: opening the battery
direction to that shown by the arrow until it

Emergencies
and the turn signals are switched on for a compartment.
clicks into place.
short time. When the alarm button is pressed
again, the alarm is switched off. CAUTION
● If the battery is not changed correctly, the
WARNING
vehicle key may be damaged.
Read and observe the relevant warnings ››› ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
in Set of keys on page 130.
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-

Safety
place the dead battery with another of the
Note same voltage, size and specifications.
● The remote control key works only when ● When fitting the battery, check that the po-
you are in its scope. larity is correct. »
Fig. 138 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

131
 Operation

For the sake of the environment Spare remote control keys are available at – Locking system “Safe*”
your Technical Service, where they must be – Selective* unlocking system
Please dispose of your used batteries correct-
matched to the locking system.
ly and with respect for the environment. – Self-locking system to prevent involunta-
Up to five remote control keys can be used. ry unlocking
– Automatic speed dependent locking and
Synchronising the remote control key unlocking system*
Central locking system – Emergency unlocking system
If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door
with the remote control, it should be re-
synchronised.
Description Unlocking the vehicle*
– Press button  ››› Fig. 135 on remote
Read the additional information carefully control to unlock all the doors and rear
While the vehicle is open: ›››  page 15. lid.
– Press the  button 2 ››› Fig. 135 on the re- The central locking system enables you to
mote control.
lock and unlock all doors and the rear lid by Locking the vehicle*
– Then close the vehicle using the key shaft just pushing the button. – Press button  ››› Fig. 135 on the remote
within one minute. control to lock all doors and the rear lid
Central locking can be activated by using any
of the following options: or turn the key in the door to lock all
While the vehicle is closed: doors and the rear lid.
– Press the  button 1 ››› Fig. 135 on the re- ● the key, by inserting it into the driver door
mote control. cylinder and rotating it in the opening direc- WARNING
tion. Depending on the vehicle version, ei-
– Then close the vehicle using the key shaft ● Locking from the outside carelessly or with-
ther all doors will be unlocked or only the
within one minute. out good visibility may lead to bruising, par-
driver door will be unlocked. All doors will be ticularly in the case of children.
locked on locking the vehicle using the key.
It is possible that the vehicle could no longer ● When locking a vehicle, never leave chil-
be opened and closed with the remote con- ● the interior central lock button dren unaccompanied inside, as from the out-
trol if the button  is repeatedly pressed out- ››› page 134. side it will be difficult to provide assistance if
side of the effective range of the radio fre- ● the radio frequency remote control, using required.
quency remote control. The remote control the buttons on the key ››› page 130. ● Having the doors locked prevents intruders
key will have to be resynchronised. from getting in, for example when stopped at
Various functions are available to improve a traffic light.
the vehicle safety:

132
 Opening and closing

Note Deactivation Safe deactivated with an alarm: the warning

Technical data
Rotate the key inserted in the lock cylinder lamp stays off.
For anti-theft security, only the driver door is
fitted with a lock cylinder. twice towards the locking direction.
WARNING
To activate the system using the remote con-
No one should remain inside the vehicle if the
trol, press the lock button on the remote
“Safe” system is activated because opening
Safe security system*1) twice  in less than five seconds. the doors will not be possible in the event of
On deactivating the “Safe” system, the alarm an emergency neither from the inside nor the
This is an anti-theft device which consists of outside and help from the outside is made
volumetric sensor is also deactivated.

Advice
a double lock for the door locks and a deacti- difficult. Danger of death. Passengers could
vation function for the boot in order to pre- With the “Safe” switched off, doors can be become trapped inside in case of emergency.
vent forced entry. opened from the interior but not from the ex-
terior.
Activation See “Selective unlocking system*” Selective unlocking system*
The “safe” system is activated when the vehi-

Operation
cle is locked using the key or the remote con- “Safe” status This system allows to unlock either just the
trol. driver door or all the vehicle.
On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi-
To activate it with the key, rotate once it is in- ble from outside the vehicle through the win-
Driver door unlock button
serted in the door lock cylinder in the locking dow which shows the “Safe” system status.
direction. Unlock once. Use either the key or the remote
We will know that “Safe” system is activated

Emergencies
control.
To activate the system using the remote con- by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator
trol, press the lock button once  on the re- will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted Once the key is inserted in the lock cylinder,
mote. with an alarm, until they unlock. rotate once in the unlock direction. The driver
door will remain without “Safe” and un-
Once this system is activated, opening doors Remember:
locked. In vehicles fitted with an alarm, see
from the outside and the inside is not possi-
Safe activated with or without an alarm: the Anti-theft Alarm section ››› page 138.
ble. The rear lid can not be opened. The cen-
warning lamp flashes continuously.
tral lock button does not work. Using the remote control, press the unlock

Safety
Safe deactivated without an alarm: the warn- button on the remote  once. The “Safe” sys-
When the ignition is switched off, the instru-
ing lamp stays off. tem for all the vehicle is deactivated, only the »
ment panel display indicates that the “Safe”
system is on.

1) Available depending on market and version.

133
 Operation

driver door is unlocked and both the alarm Automatic speed-dependent locking luggage compartment. It is possible to lock
and the warning lamp are also turned off. and unlocking system* the vehicle from inside with the central lock-
ing, after turning the ignition off and back on
Unlocking all doors and the luggage com- This is a safety system which prevents access again.
partment to the vehicle from the outside when it is run-
The unlock button on the remote control ning (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light).
must be pressed twice  so that all doors Central lock button*
and the luggage compartment can be Locking
opened. The doors will lock automatically if the speed
Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivate of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. The rear lid
the “Safe” system for all vehicle, to unlock all will lock automatically if the speed of 6 km/h
doors and to use the luggage compartment. (4 mph) is exceeded.
The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi- If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doors
cles fitted with one) are turned off. open, when starting again and exceeding the
mentioned speed, all doors will lock again.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
See ›››  page 16. Unlocking
On withdrawing the ignition key, the vehicle Fig. 139 Central lock button.
will returns to its status prior to self-locking.
Self-locking system to prevent invol- Each door can be unlocked and opened inde- Read the additional information carefully
untary unlocking pendently from the inside (for example, when ›››  page 15
a passenger gets out). To do it, simply oper- The central lock button allows you to lock and
It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- ate the lever inside the door. unlock the vehicle from the inside.
intentional unlocking of the vehicle.
WARNING The central lock button also works with the
If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the
ignition switched off, except when the “safe”
doors (including the boot) are opened within The door handles must not be operated when system is activated.
30 seconds, it re-locks automatically. the vehicle is running: the door would open.
Please note the following if you lock your ve-
hicle with the central lock button:
Note
If the airbags are triggered during an acci-
dent, the vehicle is unlocked, except for the

134
 Opening and closing

● Locking the doors and rear lid prevents ac-

Technical data
cess from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g.
when stopped at a traffic light).
● The driver door cannot be locked while it is
open. This avoids the user from forgetting his
key inside the vehicle. Fig. 141 Technology
● All doors can be unlocked separately from
inside the vehicle. To do so, pull the door re-

Advice
lease lever once.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
WARNING with Keyless Access* Fig. 143 Keyless Access locking and ignition
system: sensor surface A for unlocking in-
● If the vehicle is locked, children and disa-
side the door handle and sensor surface B
bled people may be trapped inside it. for locking on the exterior of the handle.
● Repeated operation of central locking will

Operation
prevent the central lock button from working Depending on the equipment, the vehicle
for a few seconds. Then, it can only be un- may have the Keyless Access system.
locked in case it has been previously locked.
After few seconds, the central locking be- Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-
comes operative again. tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle
● The central lock button is not operative without actively using its key. To do this, all

Emergencies
when the vehicle is locked from the outside that is required is to have a valid vehicle key
(with the remote control or the key). in the detection area where you are attempt-
Fig. 142 Keyless Access locking and ignition ing to access the vehicle ››› Fig. 142 and to
system: In the proximity of the car. touch one of the sensor surfaces on the door
handles ››› Fig. 143 ››› .
Related videos Keyless Access
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via
the driver door only. When doing so, the re-

Safety
mote control key must be no further than ap-
prox. 1.5 m from the door handle.
It does not matter where you carry the key, for
instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or
Fig. 140 Convenience in a briefcase. »
135
 Operation

Once the doors have been locked, they can- Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a ● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B
not be opened again immediately. This will double flash of the indicator lights; locking (arrow) on the driver door handle. The door
enable you to check that the doors are prop- by a single flash. that is used must be closed.
erly closed.
If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and
On vehicles with a “Safe” security system:
If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock the rear lid are closed leaving the last key
shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Exit)
only the driver’s door, the side being un- used inside the vehicle and none outside,
locked, or the entire vehicle. The necessary the vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ● Switch the ignition off.
adjustments can be performed in vehicles vehicle's indicator lights will flash four times. ● Close the driver's door.
with a driver information system The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if
● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B
›››  page 34. you do not open any door or the rear lid.
(arrow) on the driver door handle. The vehicle
The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- locks with the “Safe” ››› page 133 system.
General information
onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open The door that is used must be closed.
If a valid key is located in the proximity of the any door or boot hatch. ● Touch (twice) the sensor surface B (arrow)
car ››› Fig. 142, the Keyless Access locking
of the driver door handle to lock the vehicle
and starting system gives the key entry as Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless- without activating the “Safe” security system
soon as one of the sensor surfaces on the Entry) ››› page 133.
driver door handle is touched. The following ● Grip the driver door lever. In doing this, the
features are then available without having to
sensor surface ››› Fig. 143 A (arrow) on the Unlocking and locking the boot hatch
use the vehicle key actively:
handle is touched and the vehicle unlocks. When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-
● Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using ● Open the door. matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-
the handle of the front driver’s door or the id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 142.
softtouch/handle on the rear lid. On vehicles with selective opening or info-
tainment system configuration, pulling the Open or close the rear lid normally.
● Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the
door handle twice will unlock all doors. After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If
sensor on the driver door handle.
the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid
● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the en- On vehicles without a “Safe” security sys- will not lock automatically after closing it.
gine with the starter button ››› page 176. tem: shutting and locking doors (Keyless-Ex-
it) What happens when locking the vehicle with
The central locking and locking systems oper-
ate in the same way as a normal locking and ● Switch the ignition off. a second key
unlocking system. Only the controls change. ● Close the driver's door. If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and
it is locked from the outside with a second
vehicle key, the key inside the vehicle is
136
 Opening and closing

blocked for engine ignition ››› page 173. In ● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve- SETTINGS and Opening and closing function but-

Technical data
order to enable engine ignition, the  button hicle has automatic gearbox), since other- tons.
on the key inside the vehicle needs to be wise the vehicle cannot be locked.
pressed. ● Close the door. CAUTION
● Push the central locking button  on the The sensor surfaces on the door handles
Automatically disabling sensors could engage if hit with a water jet or high
remote control and touch the locking sensor
pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key
If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a surface ››› Fig. 143 B on the driver door han-
long period of time, the proximity sensors on in the proximity. If at least one of the electric
dle once within the following 5 seconds. Do
the passenger doors are automatically disa- windows is open and the sensor surface B

Advice
not grip the door handle, otherwise the vehi- (arrow) on the handle is activated continu-
bled. cle will not lock. Deactivation is also possible ously, all windows will close.
If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- if the vehicle is locked through the driver’s
dles is often activated in an unusual manner door lock.
Note
with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches ● To check that the function has been deacti-
of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull ● If the vehicle battery has little or no charge,

Operation
sensors are disabled for a certain period of on the door handle. The door should not or the vehicle key battery is almost or entire-
open. ly out of charge, you will probably not be able
time.
to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless
Sensors will again be enabled: The next time the door can only be unlocked Access system. The vehicle can be unlocked
via the remote control or the lock cylinder. or locked manually.
● After a time.
The next time the door is locked/unlocked, ● To control the proper locking of the vehicle,

Emergencies
● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the  Keyless Access will be active again. the release function is disabled for approx. 2
button on the key. seconds.
● OR: if the boot is opened. Convenience functions ● If the message Keyless access system
faulty is displayed on the screen of the
● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with To close all the electric windows using the
dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the
the key. convenience function, keep a finger on the operation of the Keyless Access system. Con-
locking sensor surface B (arrow) of the door tact a specialised workshop. SEAT recom-
Keyless Access temporary disconnection handle for a few seconds until the windows mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Safety
function* have closed. ● Depending on the function set on the info-
You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac- The doors opened by touching the sensor tainment system for the mirrors, the exterior
cess unlocking for a locking and unlocking surface of the door handle depend on the mirrors will unfold and the surround lighting
cycle. settings that have been activated in the Easy will come on when unlocking the vehicle us-
Connect system with the  button and the ing the sensor surface on the driver door han-
dle. »
137
 Operation

● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle or tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- tivated by inserting the key in the groove
the system fails to detect one, a warning will cidentally while the vehicle is running. when the door is open, as described above.
display on the dash panel screen. This could This function is independent of the vehicle
happen if any other radio frequency signal in-
electronic opening and locking systems. It
terferes with the key signal (e.g. from a mo-
bile device accessory) or if the key is covered
only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- Anti-theft alarm*
by another object (e.g. an aluminium case). ted and deactivated manually, as described
below: Description of anti-theft alarm sys-
● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a lay-
er of salt, the correct functioning of the sen- tem*
sors on the door handles may be affected. In
Activating the childproof lock
this case, clean the vehicle. – Unlock the vehicle and open the door in The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to
● If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic which you wish to activate the childproof break into the vehicle or steal it. The system
gearbox, it may only be locked in the gear lock. will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-
stick is in position P. nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.
– With the door open, rotate the groove in
the door using the ignition key, anti-clock- The anti-theft alarm system is automatically
wise for the left-hand side doors ››› Fig. 144 switched on when locking the vehicle. The
Childproof lock and clockwise for the right-hand side system is immediately activated and the turn
doors. signal light located on the driver door will
flash along with the turn signals, indicating
Deactivating the childproof lock that the alarm and the locking security sys-
– Unlock the vehicle and open the door
tem (double lock) have been turned on.
whose childproof lock you want to deacti- If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,
vate. they will not be included in the protection
– With the door open, rotate the groove in
zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-
nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-
the door using the ignition key, anti-clock-
quently closed, they will be automatically in-
wise for the right-hand side doors, and
cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle
clockwise for the left-hand side doors
and the turn signals will flash accordingly
Fig. 144 Childproof lock on the left hand side ››› Fig. 144.
when the doors close.
door.
Once the childproof lock is activated, the
● The turn signal light will flash twice on
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors door can only be opened from the outside.
opening and deactivating the alarm.
from being opened from the inside. This sys- The childproof lock can be activated or deac-

138
 Opening and closing

● The turn signal light will flash once on clos- Opening all the doors in manual mode ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated when

Technical data
ing and activating the alarm. In vehicles without an alarm, when opening the vehicle is locked from within using the
the driver door manually, all doors are central locking button .
When does the system trigger an alarm? opened. ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat
The system triggers an alarm, if the following then the anti-theft alarm will not operate cor-
unauthorised actions are carried out when How to switch the alarm off rectly.
the vehicle is locked: To deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn the
● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if
the battery is disconnected or not working for
● Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the key in the opening direction, open the door
any reason.

Advice
vehicle key without switching on the ignition and switch the ignition on, or press the un-
lock button  on the remote control. ● The alarm is triggered immediately if one of
in the next 15 seconds (in certain markets, the battery cables is disconnected while the
such as the Netherlands, the alarm is activa- In vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm alarm system is active.
ted immediately). system, you have 15 seconds to insert the
● A door is opened. key in the ignition lock and activate the igni-
tion if the vehicle is opened using the driver

Operation
● Opening the bonnet. Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-
door key.
● The rear lid is opened. tow system*
Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.
● Ignition switched on with a non-validated
and the ignition will be blocked. Monitoring or control function incorporated
key.
in the anti-theft alarm* which detects unau-
● Movements in the driving compartment Note thorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-

Emergencies
(vehicles with a volume sensor). ● After 28 days, the indicator light will be sound.
● Towing of the vehicle1). switched off to prevent the battery from
● Vehicle tilt angle1). draining if the vehicle has been left parked Activation
for a long period of time. The alarm system – It is automatically switched on when the
● Undue manipulation of the alarm. remains activated.
anti-theft alarm is activated.
● Battery handling. ● The alarm will trigger again if attempts are
made to open another protection zone. Deactivation
In this case, the acoustic signals will go off

Safety
● The alarm system can be activated or deac-
and the turn signal will flash for approximate- – Open the vehicle with the key, either me-
tivated using the radio frequency remote con-
ly 30 seconds. This cycle may be repeated up chanically or by pressing the  button on
trol ››› page 130.
to 10 times depending on the country. the remote control. If the vehicle is opened »

1) With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection

139
 Operation

mechanically, the time period from when False alarms anti-tow system will only be activated once
the door is opened until the key is inserted Interior monitoring will only operate correctly all the doors are closed (including the rear
into the contact should not exceed 15 sec- if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- lid).
onds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered. serve related legal requirements.
– Press the button  on the remote control
twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen- The following cases may cause a false alarm: Deactivating the vehicle interior moni-
sors will be deactivated. The alarm system ● Open windows (partially or fully), toring and anti-tow system*
remains activated.
● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- such as loose papers, items hanging from
triggered if movements are detected in the
tow system are automatically switched on the rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.
interior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's in-
again next time the vehicle is locked. clination is changed (e.g. during transport).
Note
The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow You can prevent the alarm from being trig-
sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- ● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is gered accidentally by switching off the vehi-
ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched activated without the volumetric sensor func- cle interior monitoring and/or tow-away pro-
on. In order to activate it, all the doors and tion, relocking will activate the alarm with all tection.
its functions, except the volumetric sensor.
the rear lid must be closed. – To switch off the interior monitoring and
This function is reactivated when the alarm is
If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior switched on again, unless it is deliberately tow-away protection, switch off the ignition
monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must switched off. and, using the Infotainment system, select:
be done each time that the vehicle is locked; ● If the alarm has been triggered by the volu-  button > SETTINGS function button >
if not, they will be automatically switched on. metric sensor, this will be indicated by a Opening and closing > Central locking >
flashing of the warning lamp on the driver Switch off alarm.
The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- door when the vehicle is opened. The flash is
tow system should be switched off if animals – When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle
different to the flash indicating the alarm is
are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, activated. interior monitoring and the tow-away pro-
their movements will trigger the alarm) or tection are switched off until the next time
● The vibration of a mobile phone left inside
when, for example, the vehicle is transported the door is opened.
the vehicle may cause the vehicle interior
or has to be towed with only one axle on the monitoring alarm to trigger, as both sensors
ground. If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)*
react to movements and shakes inside the ve- ››› page 133 is switched off, the vehicle interi-
hicle.
or monitoring and the tow-away protection
● If on activating the alarm, any door or the are automatically switched off.
rear lid is open, only the alarm will be activa-
ted. The vehicle interior monitoring and the

140
 Opening and closing

WARNING ● Closing the rear lid without observing and Read the additional information carefully

Technical data
ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury ›››  page 18
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Descrip-
to you and to third parties. Make sure that no The front and rear electric windows can be
tion on page 132.
one is in the path of the rear lid.
operated by using the controls on the driver
● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- door. The other doors each have a switch for
closed, exhaust gases may enter into the in- their own window.
Rear lid terior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!
● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave Always close the windows fully if you park
Opening and closing the key inside. The vehicle cannot be opened the vehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

Advice
if the key is left inside.
You can use the electric windows for approx.
Read the additional information carefully 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if
›››  page 16 neither the driver door nor the front passen-
Controls for the windows ger door has been opened and the key has
WARNING not been removed from the ignition.

Operation
● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of
Opening and closing of the electric
accident or injury. Safety switch 
windows
● The rear lid must not be opened when the The safety switch ››› Fig. 145 5 on the driver
reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may door can be used to disable the electric win-
damage the tail lights. dow buttons on the rear doors.
● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down

Emergencies
with your hand on the rear window. The glass ● Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear
could smash. Risk of injury! doors are activated.
● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. ● Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear
If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv- doors are deactivated. The safety control
ing. symbol  lights up in yellow if the buttons
● Never allow children to play in or around on the rear doors are switched off.
the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjected

Safety
to extremely high and low temperatures, de- WARNING
pending on the time of year, thus causing se-
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Set of
rious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal
keys on page 130.
consequences. Close and lock both the rear Fig. 145 Detail of the driver door: controls for
lid and all the other doors when you are not ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can
the front and rear windows.
using the vehicle. result in injury. »
141
 Operation

● Never close the rear lid without observing ● If a window is obstructed when closing au- to you and third parties. Make sure that no
and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could tomatically, the window stops at this point one is in the path of a window.
cause serious injury to you and third parties. and lowers immediately ››› . ● Never allow people to remain in the vehicle
Make sure that no one is in the path of a win- ● Next, check why the window does not close when you close the vehicle from the outside.
dow. before attempting it again. The windows cannot be opened even in an
● If the ignition is switched on, the electric emergency.
● If you try within the following 10 seconds
equipment could be activated with risk of in- ● The roll-back function does not prevent fin-
and the window closes again with difficulty
jury, for example, in the electric windows. gers or other parts of the body getting
or there is an obstruction, the automatic clos-
● The doors can be locked using the remote pinched against the window frame. Risk of
ing will stop working for 10 seconds.
control key. This could become an obstacle accident.
for assistance in an emergency situation. ● If the window is still obstructed, the win-
● Therefore always take the key with you
dow will stop at this point.
when you leave the vehicle. ● If there is no obvious reason why the win-
Convenience opening and closing
● The electric windows will work until the ig- dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by
nition has been switched off and one of the pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- Use the convenience opening/closing func-
front doors has been opened. dow closes with maximum force. The roll- tion to easily open/close all the windows
● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa-
back function is now deactivated. from the outside.
ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that If more than 10 seconds pass, the window
they have been disabled. Convenience open function
will open fully when you operate one of the
buttons. One-touch closing is reactivated. – Press and hold the  button on the remote
Note control key until all the windows have
If the window is not able to close because it WARNING reached the desired position, or
is stiff or because of an obstruction, the win- ● Always take the ignition key with you when – First unlock the vehicle using the  button
dow will automatically open again leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to on the remote control key and then keep
››› page 142. If this happens, check why the be gone for a short time. Please ensure that the key in the driver door lock until all the
window could not be closed before attempt- children are never left alone inside the vehi- windows have reached the required posi-
ing to close it again. cle.
tion.
● The electric windows will work until the ig-
nition has been switched off and one of the Convenience close function
Roll-back function front doors has been opened.
– Press and hold the  button on the remote
● Closing the windows without observing and
The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury control key until all the windows are closed
jury when the electric windows close. ››› , or
142
 Lights and visibility

– Lock the driver's door with the key and hold for closing them. This makes it easier to open Lights and visibility

Technical data
the key in the <zitat>lock</zitat> position un- and close windows to the desired position.
til all the windows are closed
One-touch closing Lights
Programming convenience opening in the – Pull up the window button briefly up to the
Easy Connect* second position. The window closes fully.
Control lamps
– Select: button  > function button SET-
TINGS > Opening and closing > Con- One-touch opening  It lights up
trols for electric windows to

Advice
– Push down the window button briefly up to Rear fog light switched on ››› page 145.
choose between all the windows (All), on-
the second position. The window opens
ly the driver's (Driver) or none (Deacti-
fully.  It lights up
vated).
Resetting one-touch opening and closing Left or right turn signal.
WARNING The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn signal
– The automatic open and close function will

Operation
● Never close the windows without due care is faulty.
not work if the battery has been temporari-
or proper control. There is a risk of suffering
ly disconnected. The function can be re-
injury.
stored as follows:
 It lights up
● For safety reasons, you should only use the
Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 145.
remote control open and close functions with- – Close the window as far as it will go by lift-
in about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid in- ing and holding the electric window switch. Several warning and control lamps light up

Emergencies
juries, always keep an eye on the windows
– Release the switch and then lift it again for for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-
when pressing the button to close them. The
windows stop moving as soon as the button 1 second. This will re-enable the automatic ed on, signalling that the function is being
is released. function. verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
If you push (or pull) a button to the first
stage, the window will open (or close) until WARNING
One-touch opening and closing* you release the button. If you push or lift the
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
button briefly to the second stage, the win-

Safety
One-touch opening and closing means you symbols on page 122.
dow will open (one-touch opening) or close
do not have to hold down the button. (one-touch closing) automatically. If you op-
Buttons ››› Fig. 145 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 have erate the button while the window is opening
two positions for opening windows and two or closing, it stops at this position.

143
 Operation

Switching lights on and off Automatic lighting* ● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the sensor. This may cause disrup-
Read the additional information carefully Activation tions or faults in the automatic lighting sys-
›››  page 31 – Rotate the switch to the  position, this tem.
The driver is personally responsible for the indication will light up. ● The rain sensor switches on the dipped
correct use and adjustment of the lights in all beam headlights when the windscreen wipers
situations. Deactivation have been operating continuously for a few
seconds and it switches the lights off when
– Turn the light switch to . the continuous or interval wipe is switched
Note
off for some minutes.
● The legal requirements regarding the use of Automatic lighting
vehicle lights in each country must be ob- If automatic headlight control is switched on,
served. dipped beam headlights are automatically
Daytime running lights
● The dipped beam headlights will only work switched on by a photosensor if you drive in-
with the ignition on. The side lights come on to a tunnel, for example. The daytime running lights consist of individ-
automatically when the ignition is turned off.
ual lights, integrated in the front headlights.
● If the lights are left on after the key has WARNING By connecting the daytime running lights,
been taken out of the ignition lock, an audi- ● Even if the automatic headlight control is these lights are switched on1) ››› .
ble warning sounds while the driver door re- switched on, the dipped beam headlights will
mains open. This is a reminder to switch the not be switched on with fog. Therefore, the The daytime running lights switch on every
lights off. dipped beam must be switched on manually. time the ignition is switched on, if the switch
● The use of the lighting described here is is in positions  or , according to the level
subject to the relevant statutory require- of exterior lighting.
Note
ments. When the light switch is in position , a
● For vehicles with the automatic headlight
light sensor automatically switches dipped
system, when the key is removed from the ig-
beam on and off (including the control and
nition, the audible warning will only sound if
the light knob is in position . instrument lighting) or the daytime running
lights depending on the level of exterior
● The use of the lighting described here is
lighting.
subject to the relevant statutory require-
ments.

1) On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the rear

side light is switched on as well.

144
 Lights and visibility

WARNING Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with One-touch signalling is activated and deacti-

Technical data
front fog lights) vated in the Easy Connect system via the 
● Never drive with daytime lights if the road
● Completely pull the light switch 2 from button and the function button SETTINGS >
is not well lit due to weather or lighting con-
position ,  or . The lamp  on the in- Lights > One-touch signalling
ditions. Daytime lights do not provide
enough light to illuminate the road properly strument panel lights up. ›››  page 34.
or be seen by other road users. In vehicles that do not have the correspond-
● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles with ing menu, this function can be deactivated in
when activating the daytime running light no front fog lights) a specialised workshop.

Advice
the rear lights are not switched on. A vehicle ● Completely pull the light switch 2 from
which does not have the rear lights on may WARNING
position ,  or . This type of switch
not be visible to other drivers in the dark-
only has one position. The  lamp on the in- The main beam can dazzle other drivers. Risk
ness, in the case of heavy rain or in condi-
tions of poor visibility. strument panel lights up. of accident! Never use the main beam head-
lights or the headlight flasher if they could
dazzle other drivers.

Operation
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fog lights Note
Read the additional information carefully ● If the convenience turn signals are operat-
›››  page 32 ing (three flashes) and the other convenience
turn signals are switched on, the active part
Parking lights stops flashing and only flashes once in the

Emergencies
● Switch the ignition off and remove the key new part selected.
from the lock. ● The turn signals only work when the igni-
● Move the turn signal lever up or down to tion is switched on. The corresponding warn-
ing lamp   flashes in the instrument pan-
turn the right or left-hand parking lights on,
el. The control lamp  flashes when the turn
respectively. signals are operated, provided a trailer is cor-
rectly attached and connected to the vehicle.
Fig. 146 Dash panel: light control. Convenience turn signals If a turn signal bulb is defective, the control

Safety
For the one-touch signalling, when the igni- lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer
Switching on the front fog lights* tion is switched on, move the lever as far as turn signal bulbs are defective, the control
lamp  does not light up. Change the bulb.
● Pull the light switch to the first point possible upwards or downwards and release
● The main beam headlights can only be
››› Fig. 146
1 , from positions ,  or . the lever. The turn signal will flash three
The symbol  in the light switch lights up. times. switched on if the dipped beam headlights »
145
 Operation

are already on. The warning lamp  then If the Coming Home or Leaving Home func- ● If the ignition is switched on.
comes on in the instrument panel. tion is connected, the front side and dipped
● The headlight flasher comes on for as long
lights, the tail lights and the number plate Note
as you pull the lever – even if no other lights light will light up to provide assistance. ● To activate the Coming/Leaving home func-
are switched on. The warning lamp  then tion, the rotary light switch must be in posi-
comes on in the instrument panel. Coming home function tion  and the light sensor must detect
● When the parking lights are switched on, The Coming Home function is activated by darkness.
the headlight and the tail light on the corre- switching off the ignition. When the driver
sponding side of the vehicle light up. The door is opened, the Coming Home lighting
parking lights will only work with the ignition comes on. Fog lights with cornering function*
off. If said light is on, an audible warning will
be emitted while the driver door is open. The Coming Home lighting switches off in the
This is an additional light source to dipped
● If the turn signal lever is left on after the following cases:
beam headlights to light up the road as a
key has been taken out of the ignition lock, ● If, 30 seconds after being connected, any bend is taken.
an acoustic signal sounds when the driver
doors or the rear lid remain open. The cornering light operates with the lights
door is opened. This is intended as a remind-
er to switch off the turn signal, unless you ● If the light switch is turned to position . switched on and when driving at less than
wish to leave the parking light on. ● If the ignition is switched on. 40 Km/h (25 mph). Ignition occurs by turning
the steering or connecting the turn signal.
Automatic Leaving Home function
Coming Home/Leaving Home Func- Forward gear
The Leaving Home function is activated when
tion* ● If the steering wheel is turned to the right,
the vehicle is unlocked if:
or the right-hand turn signal operated, the
● the light control is in position  and right-hand fog light turns on.
● the photosensor detects “darkness”. ● If the steering wheel is turned to the left, or
the left-hand turn signal operated, the left-
The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the hand fog light turns on.
following cases:
In reverse, both fog lights turn on.
Fig. 147 Related video ● If the time period for the delay in switching
off the headlights has ended Note
The Leaving Home function is controlled with ● If the vehicle is locked again.
a photosensor. When the fog lamps are on, the cornering
● If the light switch is turned to position . function is activated and both headlights are
continuously on.
146
 Lights and visibility

Motorway light* hicle load status. This offers the driver opti- WARNING

Technical data
mum visibility and the headlights do not daz-
The motorway light is available on vehicles zle oncoming drivers ››› . Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that
the headlights dazzle and distract other driv-
equipped with full-LED lights.
The headlights can only be adjusted when ers. This could result in a serious accident.
The function is connected/disconnected via the dipped beam is switched on. ● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load
the corresponding Easy Connect system status so that it does not blind other drivers.
To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 148:
menu.
● Activation: when going above 110 km/h Value Vehicle load statusa)

Advice
(68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip- Hazard warning lights 
Two front occupants, luggage compart-
ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-  ment empty
er's visibility distance. Read the additional information carefully
All seats occupied, luggage compartment ›››  page 32
● Deactivation: when reducing the speed of  empty
the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dip- The hazard warning lights are used to draw

Operation
ped beam returns to its normal position. All seats occupied, luggage compartment the attention of other road users to your vehi-
 full. With trailer and minimum drawbar cle in emergencies.
load.
If your vehicle breaks down:
Headlight range control Driver only, luggage compartment full With
 trailer and maximum drawbar load. 1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from
moving traffic.
a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the

Emergencies
table, it is possible to select intermediary positions. 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard
warning lights ››› .
Dynamic headlight range control 3. Switch the ignition off.
The control is not mounted in vehicles with
4. Apply the handbrake.
dynamic headlight range control. The head-
light range is automatically adjusted accord- 5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;
ing to the vehicle load status when they are for an automatic gearbox, move the gear

Safety
switched on. lever to P.

Fig. 148 Dash panel: headlight range control. 6. Use the warning triangle to draw the atten-
tion of other road users to your vehicle.
The lights range control adapts according to 7. Always take the vehicle key with you when
the value of the headlight beam and the ve- you leave the vehicle. »
147
 Operation

All turn signals flash simultaneously when Interior lights headlights in good time when light condi-
the hazard warning lights are switched on. tions become poor.
The two turn signal turn signal lamps  
Related video
and the turn signal lamp in the switch  will
flash at the same time. The simultaneous Interior and reading lights
hazard warning lights also work when the ig-
nition is switched off. Read the additional information carefully
›››  page 33
WARNING
● The risk of an accident increases if your ve- Luggage compartment lighting
hicle breaks down. Always use the hazard Fig. 149 Convenience
The light is activated when the rear lid is
warning lights and a warning triangle to draw open, even when the ignition and lights are
the attention of other road users to your sta-
turned off. For this reason, ensure that the
tionary vehicle. Lighting of instruments and controls rear lid is always closed.
● Due to the high temperatures that the cata-
lytic converter can reach, never park in an The lighting level of instruments, controls Ambient light*
area where the catalytic converter could come and displays can be adjusted through the
into contact with highly inflammable materi- Easy Connect system using the  button The ambient light lights up the area of the
als, for example dry grass or spilt petrol. This and the SETTINGS function button centre console and the footwell area and, de-
could start a fire. pending on the version, the front door panels
›››  page 34.
as well.
The instrument lighting (some dials and nee-
Note It will be switched on at full brightness when
dles), the centre console lighting and the
● The battery will run down if the hazard lighting of the displays are regulated by a the doors are opened and the lights will be
warning lights are left on for a long time, photodiode incorporated in the instrument dimmed during driving, when the light selec-
even if the ignition is switched off. panel. tor is in the ,  or  position.
● The use of the hazard warning lights de- The brightness of the ambient light* can be
scribed here is subject to the relevant statu-
The instrument lighting (needles) is switched
on when the ignition is on and the light is adjusted through the Easy Connect menu, as
tory requirements. can colour, in versions with lighting on the
off. The instrument lighting is dimmed auto-
matically as the daylight starts to fade. It front door panel (the  button and the func-
goes out completely when ambient light is tion button SETTINGS > background
very low. This function is intended to remind lighting ›››  page 34).
the driver to switch on the dipped beam

148
 Lights and visibility

Note For the sake of the environment ● The sun visor can be pulled out of its

Technical data
mounting and turned towards the door
If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the in- The heated rear window should be switched ››› Fig. 151 1 .
terior lights will be switched off after approx. off as soon as the glass is demisted. By sav-
10 minutes, providing the ignition key has ing electrical power you can also save fuel. ● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon-
been removed and the courtesy light position gitudinally backwards.
selected. This prevents the battery from dis-
Note
charging. Vanity mirror
To avoid possible damage to the battery, an
There is a vanity mirror, with a cover 2 , on
automatic temporary disconnection of this

Advice
function is possible, coming back on when the rear of the sun blind.
Visibility normal operating conditions are re-establish-
ed. WARNING

Heated rear window  Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.

● Always store sun blinds and visors in their
Sun visors housing when not in use.

Operation
Windscreen wiper and rear win-
dow wiper systems

Emergencies
Windscreen wiper and window wiper
Read the additional information carefully
Fig. 150 With the air conditioning controls: ›››  page 33
heated rear window switch.
Fig. 151 Sun visor on the driver side. WARNING
The heated rear window only works when the
● Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visibili-

Safety
engine is running. When it is switched on, a Options for adjusting driver and front pas- ty and safety levels while driving.
lamp lights up on the switch. senger sun visors:
● In cold conditions you should not use the
After approximately 8 minutes, the heating ● Lower the sun visor towards the wind- wash/wipe system unless you have warmed
device of the rear window switches off auto- screen. the windscreen with the heating and ventila-
matically. tion system. The windscreen washer fluid »
149
 Operation

could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and ● When the interval wipe function is on, the Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle
obscure your view of the road. intervals are directly proportional to the function*
● Always note the corresponding warnings speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed The anti-dazzle function is activated every
›››  page 73. the shorter the intervals. time the ignition is switched on.
● If you stop the vehicle with the windscreen
wiper in position 1 or 2, it will automatically When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the
WARNING interior rear vision mirror will darken auto-
change to a lower position speed. The set
The rain sensor* may not detect enough rain speed will be resumed when the vehicle pulls matically according to the amount of light it
to switch on the wipers. away. receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-
● If necessary, switch on the wipers manually ● The windscreen will be wiped again after led if reverse gear is engaged.
when water on the windscreen obstructs visi- approximately five seconds once the “auto-
bility. matic wash/wipe system” has been activa- Note
ted, provided the vehicle is moving (drip func- ● The automatic anti-dazzle function will only
tion). If you activate the wipers less than 3 work properly if the sun blind* for the rear
CAUTION
seconds after the drip function, a new wash window is retracted and there are no other
In icy conditions, always check that the wind- sequence will begin without performing the objects preventing light from reaching the in-
screen wipers and the window wiper are not last wipe. For the “drip” function to work terior rear vision mirror.
frozen. If you switch on the windscreen wip- again, you have to turn the ignition off and
● If you have to stick any type of sticker on
ers when the wiper blades are frozen to the then on again.
the windscreen, do not do so in front of the
windscreen, you could damage both the wip- ● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-daz-
er blades and the wiper motor. front of the rain sensor*. This may cause sen- zle function from working well or even from
sor disruption or faults. working at all.
Note ● Depending on the version of the model,
● The wipers and washers will work only when you engage reverse gear and with the
headlight wiper activated, this can start a
when the ignition is switched on.
wipe.
Folding in the exterior mirrors man-
● The heat output of the heated jets* is con- ually
trolled automatically when the ignition is
switched on, depending upon the outside The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol-
temperature. Rear view mirrors ded in. For this, press the mirror housing to-
● In certain versions of vehicles with alarms, wards the vehicle.
the windscreen wiper will only work in inter- Interior mirror
val/rain sensor mode when the ignition is on
and the bonnet closed.
It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see
clearly through the rear window.
150
 Lights and visibility

Note 3. Turn the knob to position R (right exterior Fold in the exterior mirrors after parking

Technical data
mirror). (convenience function)*
Before washing the vehicle with an automatic
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid 4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the ex- The Easy Connect system, the  button and
damage. terior mirror so that you have a good view the function buttons SETTINGS and
to the rear of the vehicle ››› . Mirrors and windscreen wipers can be used to
have the exterior mirrors fold in when the ve-
Heated exterior mirrors* hicle is parked ››› page 122.
Electric exterior mirrors*
– Press the demisting button  ››› Fig. 150 When the vehicle is locked with the remote

Advice
control, by pressing for more than approxi-
– The mirrors demist for some minutes to
mately 1 second the exterior mirrors are fol-
prevent draining the battery unnecessarily.
ded in automatically. When the vehicle is
– If necessary, press the button again to re- opened with the remote control, the exterior
peat the function. mirrors are deployed automatically.
– The exterior mirror heating is not activated

Operation
in temperatures above approximately WARNING
+20°C (+68°F). ● Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the
field of vision however the objects appear
Folding in the exterior mirrors electrically* smaller and further away in the mirrors. If you
Fig. 152 Exterior mirror controls. use these mirrors to estimate the distance to
– Turn the control ››› Fig. 152 to position  to

Emergencies
vehicles behind you when changing lane, you
Read the additional information carefully fold in the exterior mirrors. You should al-
could make a mistake. Risk of accident.
›››  page 20 ways fold in the exterior mirrors if you are
driving through an automatic car wash. ● If possible, use the rear vision mirror to es-
The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using This will help prevent damage. timate distances to vehicles behind you.
the rotary knob in the driver door. ● Make sure that you do not get your finger
Folding exterior mirrors back out to the ex- trapped between the mirror and the mirror
Basic setting of exterior mirrors tended position* base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of
injury!
1. Turn knob ››› Fig. 152 to position L (left ex-

Safety
– Turn the knob to position L or R to return
terior mirror). the exterior mirrors to their original posi-
tion ››› . For the sake of the environment
2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exteri-
or mirror so that you have a good view to The exterior mirror heating should be switch-
the rear of the vehicle. ed off when it is no longer needed. Other-
wise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste. »
151
 Operation

Note Seats and head restraints backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater
● If the electrical adjustment ever fails to op-
the risk of injury due to improper positioning
of the belt web!
erate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by Adjusting the seat and head re- ● Exercise caution when securing the seat
lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.
● In vehicles with electric exterior mirrors,
straints height into forwards/backwards position. In-
juries can be caused if the seat height is ad-
the following points should be observed: if,
Adjusting the front seats justed without due care and attention.
due to an external force (e.g. being knocked
while manoeuvring), the adjustment of the ● To move the seat forwards and backwards,
mirror housing is altered, the mirror will have Read the additional information carefully pull upwards and not sideways on the lever,
to be fully folded electrically. Do not readjust ›››  page 18 as the force exerted on it in that direction
the rear vision mirror housing by hand, as could damage it.
this will interfere with the mirror adjuster WARNING
function.
The safe driving chapter contains important
● The fold-in function on the exterior mirrors information, tips, suggestions and warnings Adjusting the front head restraints
will not activate at speeds over 40 km/h that you should read and observe for your
(25 mph). own safety and the safety of your passengers Read the additional information carefully
››› page 75. ›››  page 19
Adjust the head restraint ›››  page 19 so
WARNING that as far as possible the top of the head re-
● Never adjust the driver or front passenger straint is level with the top of your head.
seat while the vehicle is in motion. While ad- When this is not possible, try to get as close
justing your seat, you will assume an incor- as possible to this position.
rect sitting position. Risk of accidents. Adjust
the driver or front passenger seat only when WARNING
the vehicle is stationary.
● Never drive if the head restraints have been
● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver and removed. Risk of injury.
front passenger in case of a sudden braking
● After refitting the head restraint, you must
or an accident, never drive with the backrest
always adjust it properly for height to achieve
tilted towards the rear. The maximum protec-
optimal protection.
tion of the seat belt can be achieved only
when the backrests are in an upright position ● Please observe the safety warnings ››› in
and the driver and front passenger have prop- Correct adjustment of front head restraints on
erly adjusted their seat belts. The further the page 79.

152
 Seats and head restraints

Note – To set the head restraint lower down, press WARNING

Technical data
the 1 ››› Fig. 153 button and move it
● When fitting the head restraints again, in- ● Please observe the general notes
downwards.
sert the tubes as far as possible into the ››› page 79.
guides without pressing the button. ● Remove the rear head restraints only when
Removing the head restraint
it is necessary for the placement of a child
To remove the head restraint, the correspond- seat ››› page 92. After removing a child seat,
Adjustment of the rear head restraints ing backrest must be partially folded forward. remount the head restraint immediately.
– Unlock the backrest ››› page 155. Travelling with the head restraints removed

Advice
or improperly adjusted increases the risk of
– Move the head restraint upwards until it ar- severe injuries.
rives to the top.
– Press button 1 , while simultaneously
pressing on the security hole 2 with a flat Seat functions
screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and

Operation
remove the head restraint.
Introduction
– Move the backrest until it engages properly
››› . WARNING

Fig. 153 Rear centre head restraint: release Inappropriate use of the seat functions can
Fitting the head restraint
point. cause severe injuries.

Emergencies
To mount the external head restraints, the ● Assume the proper sitting position before
When transporting people in the back seat, corresponding backrest must be partially fol- your trip and remain in it throughout. This al-
place the head restraints of the occupied ded forward. so applies to the other occupants.
seats at a minimum of the next socket up – Unlock the backrest ››› page 155. ● Always keep hands, fingers, feet and other
››› . parts of the body away from the operating ra-
– Insert the head restraint bars into the dius and the adjustment of seats.
Adjusting the head restraints guides until they perceptibly engage. It
should not be possible to remove the head

Safety
– To set the head restraint higher, grasp the restraint from the backrest.
sides with both hands and move it up-
wards, until you see it engage. – Move the backrest until it engages properly
››› .

153
 Operation

Heated seats*  Activate WARNING

Press the button  or . Seat heating is If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can ad-
switched on fully. versely affect the operation of the seat heat-
ing, increasing the risk of burns.
Adjusting the heating output ● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to
Press the button  or  repeatedly until the using the seat heater.
desired intensity level is reached. ● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is
wet or damp.
Deactivating ● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp
Press the button  or  until all warning on the seat.
lamps switch off. ● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

WARNING CAUTION
Children and people who cannot perceive ● To avoid damaging the heating elements of
Fig. 154 In the centre console: front seats pain or temperature because of medications, the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the
heating switch : version with Climatronic. paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point
: version with manual air conditioning. or have a limited perception of these, may on the seat cushion or backrest.
suffer burns to the back, buttocks or legs
● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma-
The seat cushions can be heated electrically when using seat heating, an occurrence that
may entail a very lengthy recovery period or terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage
when the ignition is switched on. The back- the seat heating.
from which it may not be possible to recover
rest is also heated in some versions.
fully. Seek medical advice if you have doubts ● In the event of smells, switch off the seat
The seat heating should not be engaged in regarding your health. heating immediately and have it inspected by
any of the following conditions: ● People with limited pain and temperature a specialised workshop.
thresholds must never use seat heating.
● The seat is unoccupied.
● If an abnormality in the device's tempera- For the sake of the environment
● The seat has a covering. ture control is detected, have it checked by a The seat heating should remain on only when
● There is a child seat installed in the seat. specialist workshop. needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel
● The seat cushion is wet or damp. waste.
● The indoor or outdoor temperature is great-
er than 25°C (77°F).

154
 Seats and head restraints

Folding down the back seat – Lift the cushion 2 forwards in the direc- WARNING

Technical data
tion of the arrow.
● Please be careful when folding back the
– Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 156 1 for- backrest! Injuries can be caused if the seat
wards and at the same time fold the back- height is adjusted without due care and at-
rest down. The rear seat backrest is not en- tention.
gaged when the red marking of the button ● Do no trap or damage seat belts when rais-
2 is visible. ing the backrest.
– Insert the head restraints in the spaces on ● After raising the backrest, check it has en-

Advice
the rear of the seat cushion which are visi- gaged properly in position. Do this by pulling
ble when the seat cushion is lowered. on the central seat belt or directly on the
backrest and check that the position lever is
in the neutral position.
Fig. 155 Folding up the rear seat cushion.
Folding seat forward
● The three point automatic seat belt only
– Remove the head restraints from the works correctly when the backrest of the cen-

Operation
spaces in the seat cushion. tral seat is correctly engaged.
– Lift the backrest, and before securing it, re-
place the head restraints in the seat cush-
ion, and then click the seat correctly onto
the locking rails. The red marking on the
tab 2 should no longer be visible when

Emergencies
the backrest is properly secured.
– Lower the cushion and push it backwards
below the seat belt buckles.
Fig. 156 On the rear seat backrest: unlock – Press the front part of the cushion down-
button 1 ; red mark 2 . wards.

Folding seat down On split rear seats*, the backrest and cush-

Safety
– Remove the head restraint ››› page 152. ion can be lowered and raised respectively in
two sections.
– Pull the front edge of the seat cushion
››› Fig. 155 1 upwards in the direction of
the arrow.

155
 Operation

Transport and practical WARNING Note

equipment Always keep the storage compartment cover

closed while the vehicle is in motion in order
The storage drawer will hold a maximum
weight of 1.5 kg.
to reduce the risk of injury caused by a sud-
Practical equipment den braking or by an accident.
Storage pocket in the seat*
Glove compartment
Storage compartment under the front
seats*

Fig. 159 Storage pocket.

Fig. 157 Passenger side: glove compartment.
There is a storage pocket on the rear of the
The compartment can be opened by pulling front seats.
Fig. 158 Storage compartment under the
the lever ››› Fig. 157. right front passenger seat.
This compartment can hold documents in A4
format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc. To open Storage compartment in front door
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD – The compartment is opened by pulling on panel*
player is located in the glove compartment. the lever and guiding it with your hand.
Separate operating instructions are enclosed In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bot-
for this equipment in the corresponding In- To close tle, etc. can be stored.
struction Manual. – Press the cover inwards until the closed
drawer “clicks” into position.

156
 Transport and practical equipment

Front drink holder* Front ashtray* Electrical power socket

Technical data
Advice
Fig. 160 Front drink holders in the centre con- Fig. 161 Ashtray in the centre console. Fig. 162 Front power socket.
sole.
Opening and closing the ashtray The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket can

Operation
In the central console, next to the hand ● To open the ashtray, lift the cover also be used for other electrical components
brake, there are two drinks holders with a power rating of up to 120 Watt. When
››› Fig. 161.
››› Fig. 160. the engine is switched off, however, the vehi-
● To close, push the cover down.
cle battery will discharge. For further informa-
WARNING tion see ››› page 259.
Emptying the ashtray

Emergencies
● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders.
During sudden or normal driving manoeuvres, ● Extract the ashtray and empty it. WARNING
when braking suddenly or in case of an acci- The power sockets and the connected acces-
dent, the hot drink could spill. Risk of scald- WARNING sories will only operate when the ignition is
ing. on or when the engine is running. Improper
Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash could
● Never use rigid materials (for example, ignite the paper in the ashtray and cause a use of the sockets or electrical accessories
glass or ceramic), since they could cause in- fire. can lead to serious injuries or cause a fire. To
jury in the case of an accident. avoid the risk of injury, never leave children

Safety
● When travelling, the drinks holder should alone inside the vehicle.
always be closed to prevent risk in the event
of sudden breaking or accident. CAUTION
Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid
damaging the sockets. »
157
 Operation

Note ● Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness or – Distribute the load evenly in the luggage
negligence when using the cigarette lighter compartment.
● The use of electrical appliances with the
can cause burns and serious injuries. – Place heavy objects as far forward as possi-
engine switched off will cause a battery dis-
charge. ● The lighter only works when the ignition is ble in the luggage compartment
● Before using any electrical accessories, see
turned on or the engine is running. To avoid ››› Fig. 164.
the risk of fire, never leave children alone in-
the instructions in ››› page 259. – Place the heavy objects first.
side the vehicle.
– Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening
rings* ››› page 160.
Cigarette lighter*
Luggage compartment – Secure loose loads with a luggage net* or
with non-elastic straps secured to the fas-
Loading the luggage compartment tening* rings.

WARNING
● Loose luggage and other objects in the lug-
gage compartment could cause serious inju-
ries.
● Always stow objects in the luggage com-
partment and secure them with the fastening
rings*.
Fig. 163 Lighter. ● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,
loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring
– Press on the cigarette lighter ››› Fig. 163 to vehicle occupants or even third parties. This
activate it ››› . Fig. 164 Position heavy items as far forward increased risk of injury will be further in-
as possible. creased if a loose object is struck by an inflat-
– Wait for the lighter to spring out. ing airbag. If this happens, objects may
– Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the All luggage and other loose objects must be shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in-
cigarette on the glowing coil. safely secured in the luggage compartment. jury.
Unsecured objects which shift back and forth ● Always keep all objects in the luggage com-
WARNING could affect safety or driving characteristics partment and use appropriate grips to secure
of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity. them, particularly in the case of heavy ob-
● Improper use of the cigarette lighter can
jects.
lead to serious injuries or start a fire.

158
 Transport and practical equipment

● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or the back of the front left door frame

Technical data
allowed maximum weight. If said weights are ››› page 284.
exceeded, the driving characteristics of the ● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce
vehicle may change, leading to accidents, in- fogging of the windows. Used air escapes
juries and damage to the vehicle. through ventilation slits in the side trim of
● Please note that the centre of gravity may the luggage compartment. Ensure that the
shift when transporting heavy objects; this ventilation slots are never covered.
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac- ● Straps for securing the load to the fasten-
cident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust ing rings* are commercially available from ac-

Advice
your speed and driving style accordingly, to cessory shops.
avoid accidents.
Fig. 166 In the luggage compartment: remov-
● Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe- ing and installing the rear shelf.
cially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment, Rear shelf
Removing
closing the door behind them; they will be

Operation
trapped and run the risk of death. ● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 165 B from
● Never allow children to play in or around their hooks A .
the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and ● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-
the rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Be- ports ››› Fig. 166 by pulling it upwards and
fore you lock the vehicle, make sure that then take it out.
there are no adults or children in the vehicle.

Emergencies
● Please observe the notes on the ››› page 75. Storing the rear shelf
Depending on the equipment, once the lug-
CAUTION gage compartment shelf has been removed,
Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe it can be stored under the boot's variable
Fig. 165 In the luggage compartment: remov-
against the wires of the heating element in floor ››› page 161.
ing and installing the rear shelf.
the heated rear window and cause damage.
● Remove the side cover sliding it upwards

Safety
and place the shelf in the bottom.
Note ● Replace the side cover.
● The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-
ing to the load. When necessary, check the To remove it proceed in reverse order. »
tyre pressures on the adhesive label stuck to

159
 Operation

Fitting Fastening rings* creased risk of injury will be further increased

● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re- if a loose object is struck by an inflating air-
cess” fits onto the axis of the supports bag.
››› Fig. 166 and press down until it engages.
WARNING
● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 165 B to the rear
● If pieces of baggage or other objects are se-
lid.
cured to the fastening rings with inappropri-
ate or damaged retaining cords, injuries
WARNING
could result in the event of braking manoeu-
Do not place heavy or hard objects on the vres or accidents.
rear shelf, because they will endanger the ve- ● Never secure a child seat on the fastening
hicle occupants in case of sudden braking. rings.
Fig. 167 Location of fastening rings in lug-
CAUTION gage compartment.
● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the
rear shelf is correctly fitted. There may be some fastening rings included
in the luggage compartment for fastening
● An overloaded luggage compartment could
luggage and other objects ››› Fig. 167 (ar-
mean that the rear shelf is not correctly seat-
ed and it may be bent or damaged. rows).
● If the luggage compartment is overloaded, – Always use suitable and undamaged straps
remove the tray. to secure luggage and other objects to the
fastening rings ››› in Loading the lug-
Note
gage compartment on page 158.

● Ensure that, when placing items of clothing Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying
on the luggage compartment cover, rear visi- unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col-
bility is not reduced. lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this
object generates a force corresponding to 20
times its weight. That means that the effec-
tive weight of the object increases to approxi-
mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of
the injuries which might be sustained if this
“object” strikes an occupant as it flies
through the interior of the vehicle. This in-
160
 Transport and practical equipment

Luggage compartment variable floor Variable floor in the tilted position

Technical data
When the variable floor is tilted you can ac-
cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.
● Lift the variable floor in the high position
using handle 1 , pull it up and push it to-
wards the backrest of the rear seats until the
floor folds along the hinge line and the mov-
able part of the floor is resting on itself.

Advice
● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 169
Fig. 169 Luggage compartment variable (arrows).
floor: sloped position.
WARNING
Variable floor in the high position
During a sudden driving or braking manoeu-

Operation
● Lift the floor using handle ››› Fig. 168 1 vre, or in the event of an accident, objects
and pull it back until the front of the floor has could be flung though the interior and cause
fully passed the supports 2 . serious or fatal injuries.
● Move the floor forward over the supports as ● Always secure objects, even when the lug-
far as the rear seat backrest and then lower gage compartment floor is properly lifted.
the floor with the handle 1 . ● Only objects that do not protrude more

Emergencies
than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-
Variable floor in the low position ried between the rear seat and the raised lug-
Fig. 168 Luggage compartment variable gage compartment floor.
floor:  raised position;  lowered position. ● Lift the floor using handle 1 and pull it
● Only objects that do not weigh than ap-
back until the supports 2 have fully passed
proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between
the front part of the floor. the rear seat and the raised luggage compart-
● Now match the front part with the lower ment floor.
grooves of the supports and slide the floor

Safety
forwards as far as the rear seat backrest and CAUTION
lower the floor at the same time with the han-
dle 1 . ● The maximum weight that can be loaded on
the luggage compartment variable floor in
the top position is 150 kg. »
161
 Operation

● Do not let the luggage compartment floor WARNING For the sake of the environment
fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it
When heavy or bulky loads are transported When cross bars and a roof carrier system are
downwards in a controlled manner. Other-
on the roof carrier system, car driving per- installed, the increased air resistance means
wise, the lining and the floor of the luggage
formance is affected, as the centre of gravity that the vehicle uses more fuel.
compartment could be damaged.
shifts and there is greater wind resistance.
● Always secure the load properly using belts
Note or retaining straps that are suitable and in a Attach the cross bars and the roof car-
SEAT recommends the use of straps to secure good condition.
rier system
objects to retaining rings. ● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg-
ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of
gravity and driving performance.
● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.
Roof carrier* ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-
Introduction fic conditions.

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-

mise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross CAUTION
bars or conventional roof carrier systems can- ● Remove the cross bars and the roof carrier
not be secured to the roof water drains. system before entering a car wash.
As the roof water drains are integrated in the ● Vehicle height is increased by the installa-
roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system and Fig. 170 Attachment points for the roof rail-
proved cross bars and roof carrier systems the load secured on them. For this purpose, ings for the roof carrier system.
check that your vehicle's height does not sur-
can be used.
pass the headspace limit, for example, for un- The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe-
derpasses or for entering garage doors.
Cases in which cross bars and the roof carri- cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons,
● Any cross bars, roof carrier systems or special fixtures must be used to safely trans-
er system should be disassembled.
loads secured to them must not interfere with port luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or
● When they are not used. the roof aerial or block the path of the rear boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can
● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. lid.
be acquired at SEAT dealerships.
● On opening the rear lid make sure that it
● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- Always secure the crossbars and the roof car-
does not knock into the roof load.
mum height, for example, in some garages. rier system properly. Always take the assem-
bly instructions that come with the crossbars
162
 Transport and practical equipment

and the roof carrier system in question into Note Distributing a load

Technical data
account. Distribute loads uniformly and secure them
Always read the assembly instructions that
The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail- come with the crossbars and the roof carrier correctly ››› .
ings. The distance between cross bars system carefully and keep them in the vehi-
››› Fig. 170 A should be 75 cm and the dis- cle. Check attachments
tance between the cross bars and the brack- Once the cross bars and roof carrier system
ets of the roof railings B should be 5 cm. have been installed, check the bolted con-
Loading the roof carrier system nections and attachments after a short jour-

Advice
WARNING ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-
Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- The load can only be secured if the crossbars cy.
bars and the roof carrier system may cause and the roof carrier system are properly in-
the whole system to detach from the roof and stalled ››› . WARNING
cause an accident and injuries.
Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load
● Always take the manufacturer assembly in- Maximum authorised roof load can result in accidents and considerable vehi-

Operation
structions into account. The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. cle damage.
● Use only crossbars and the roof carrier sys- This figure comes from the combined weight ● Never exceed the maximum authorised
tem when they are in perfect condition and of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load load on the roof and on the axles or the vehi-
are properly secured. itself on the roof ››› . cle's maximum authorised weight.
● Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier ● Never exceed the load capacity of the cross
system properly.
Always check the weight of the roof carrier
bars and the roof carrier system, even if the

Emergencies
system, the cross bars and the weight of the
● Check threaded joints and attachments maximum authorised roof load has not been
load to be transported and weigh them if
travelling and if necessary tighten them after reached.
necessary. Never exceed the maximum au-
you have travelled a short distance. When ● Secure heavy items as far forward as possi-
thorised roof load.
making long trips, check the threaded joints ble and distribute the vehicle load uniformly.
whenever you stop for a rest. If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier
● Always fit the special roof carrier systems with a lower weight rating, you will not be
WARNING
correctly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc. able to carry the maximum authorised roof

Safety
● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall
roof carrier system. mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is from the roof carrier system or cause acci-
listed in the fitting instructions. dents and injuries.
● Always use belts or retaining straps that
are suitable and in a good condition.
● Secure the load properly.
163
 Operation

Air conditioning so as to maintain good visibility of everything prevent further damage and have it checked
outside. by a specialised workshop.
● The maximum heat output required to de- ● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-
Heating, ventilation and cool- frost windows as quickly as possible is only cialist knowledge and special tools. There-
ing available when the engine has reached its fore, we recommend you to take the vehicle
normal running temperature. Only drive when to a specialised workshop.
General notes you have good visibility.
● Always ensure that you use the heating Note
Read the additional information carefully system, fresh air system, air conditioner and
● If the humidity and temperature outside the
›››  page 51 the heated rear window to maintain good visi-
bility to the outside. vehicle are high, condensation can drip off
the evaporator in the cooling system and
Pollution filter ● Never leave the air recirculation on for a
form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is
long period of time. If the cooling system is normal and does not indicate a leak.
The pollution filter (a combined particulate
switched off and air recirculation mode
filter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar- switched on, the windows can mist over very ● Keep the air intake slots in front of the
rier against impurities in the outside air, in- quickly, considerably limiting visibility. windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to en-
cluding dust and pollen. sure heating and cooling are not impaired,
● Switch air recirculation mode off when it is
and to prevent the windows from misting
For the climate control system to work with not required. over.
maximum efficiency, the pollution filter must
● The air from the vents flows through the ve-
be replaced at the specified intervals in the WARNING hicle interior and is extracted by slots in the
Maintenance Programme.
Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and re- luggage compartment designed for this pur-
If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due duce driver concentration possibly resulting pose. Therefore, you should avoid obstruct-
to use in areas reaching very high pollution in a serious accident. ing these slots with any kind of object.
levels, the pollen filter must be changed ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or ● The air conditioner operates most effective-
more frequently than stated in the Service use the air recirculation for long periods of ly with the windows closed. However, if the
Schedule. time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be temperature inside the vehicle is excessive
refreshed. because of the sun, the air inside can be
WARNING cooled faster by opening the windows for a
short time.
Reduced visibility through the windows in- CAUTION ● Do not smoke while air recirculation mode
creases the risk of serious accidents.
● If you suspect that the air conditioner is is on, as smoke drawn into the air condition-
● Always ensure that all windows are free of
damaged, switch it off with the A/C button to ing system leaves residue on the evaporator,
ice and snow, and that they are not fogged, producing a permanent unpleasant odour.

164
 Air conditioning

● At low outside temperatures, the compres- ● When the engine is under extreme strain, ● If the vehicle interior has overheated due to

Technical data
sor switches off automatically and cannot be switch off the compressor for a moment. an excessive solar radiation, it is best to
switched on even with the AUTO button. open the windows or doors to allow the hot
● It is advisable to turn on the air condition- air to escape.
ing at least once a month, to lubricate the Economic use of the air conditioning ● While in motion, the air conditioning
system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de- should not be switched on if the windows are
crease in the cooling capacity is detected, a When the air conditioning is switched on, the open.
Technical Service should be consulted to
compressor consumes engine power and has
check the system.

Advice
influence on fuel consumption. Consider the
● To ensure correct operation, the grilles on following points in order to have the system
both sides of the screen must not be obstruc- operating in the minimum possible time.
ted.

Air outlets

Operation
Emergencies
Safety
Fig. 171 Air vents.

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- ● The outlets can be closed or opened sepa- There are other additional, non-adjustable air
lation in the vehicle interior, air vents rately using the slats and the air flow direc- vents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwell
››› Fig. 171 1 should remain open. ted according to need. and in the rear area of the interior. »
165
 Operation

Note Connecting the recirculation quickly mist over. Therefore, never leave the
In any air distribution position except thaw: air recirculation mode switched on for a long
Food, medicine and other heat or cold sensi-
time (risk of accident).
tive objects should never be placed in front of
● Press button , the button’s lamp will
the air outlets as they may be damaged or
made unsuitable for use by the air coming light up, indicating that air recirculation in- Note
from the air vents. side the vehicle has been activated.
● Activating air recirculation automatically
Disconnecting the recirculation activates the  button (to prevent the win-
dows from misting up). If the temperature
Air recirculation  In any air distribution position except thaw: regulator is turned to the coldest setting
(blue point), the air recirculation function and
● Press button  again and the button's the  button are automatically activated.
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in lamp will go off, indicating that air entry from
● If the function is not deactivated by press-
queuing traffic, from entering the interior. the outside has been activated.
ing the button, it will deactivate after approx-
In the thaw position  the entry of air into imately 20 minutes.
If the air distribution is in the thaw position,
the recirculation flap will always be open (in- the vehicle interior is always from the out-
dicator light off). side.
If the air distribution is switched from any po- WARNING
sition to the thaw position, recirculation will
be automatically deactivated. In air recirculation mode, no cold air from the
outside enters the vehicle interior. If the air
conditioner is switched off, the windows can

166
 Air conditioning

Heating and fresh air

Technical data
Controls

Advice
Operation
Fig. 172 Heating controls on the dash panel.

1 Temperature regulator ››› page 167.  – Air distribution to upper body. Note
2 Blower control. There are four speed set-  – Air distribution to footwell ● Please consider the general notes

Emergencies
tings for the blower. The blower should ››› page 164.
always be set at the lowest speed when  – Air distribution to the windscreen and
driving slowly. the footwell.
3 Air distribution regulator. WARNING Functions
 Heated rear window. ● For your safety, the windows should never
be fogged up or covered with snow or ice.
Ventilating the vehicle interior
Air distribution This is essential to ensure good visibility. The desired temperature inside the vehicle

Safety
Control 3 for setting the flow of air in the re- Please familiarise yourself with the correct cannot be lower than the ambient tempera-
quired direction. operation of the heating and ventilation sys- ture.
tem, including the demist/defrost functions
 – Air distribution towards the windscreen for the windows. ● Turn the temperature selector
in order to demist. ››› Fig. 172 1 anti-clockwise. »
167
 Operation

● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels ● Open the relevant air outlets. ● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels
1-4. 2-3.
● Set the airflow to the desired direction us- Defrosting the windscreen ● Turn air distribution control to .
ing air distribution control 3 . ● Turn the temperature regulator ● Close the central outlets.
● Open the relevant air outlets. ››› Fig. 172clockwise to reach the maxi-
1
● Open and turn the side outlets towards the
mum temperature.
windows.
Interior heating ● Turn the blower switch 2 to level 4.
Once the windows are demisted and as a pre-
Maximum heat output, which is needed to ● Turn air distribution control to .
ventive measure, the control 3 can be set in
defrost the windows quickly, is only available ● Close the central outlets.
when the engine has reached its operating position  greater comfort while preventing
● Open and turn the side outlets towards the the windows from misting again.
temperature.
windows.
● Turn the temperature selector Note
››› Fig. 172 clockwise to select the re-
1 Keeping the windscreen and the side win- Remember that the temperature of the engine
quired temperature. dows demisted coolant should be optimum to ensure that the
● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels ● Turn the temperature regulator heating system functions correctly (except in
1-4. ››› Fig. 172 1 to the heating zone. vehicles fitted with additional heating*).
● Set the airflow to the desired direction us-
ing air distribution control 3 .

168
 Air conditioning

Manual air conditioning*

Technical data
Controls

Advice
Operation
Fig. 173 Air conditioning controls on the dash
panel.

1 Temperature selector ››› page 169 only works when the engine is running Functions
2 Blower control. There are four speed set- and the fan is switched on.

Emergencies
tings for the blower. At low speed, it is Interior heating
recommended to set the blower to a mini- WARNING Maximum heat output, which is needed to
mum of 1 to improve the intake of fresh For your safety, the windows should never be defrost the windows quickly, is only available
air. fogged up or covered with snow or ice. This is when the engine has reached its operating
essential to ensure good visibility. Please fa- temperature.
3 Air distribution regulator.
miliarise yourself with the correct operation
 Air recirculation button ››› page 166. of the heating and ventilation system, includ- ● Turn off the cooling system using the 
When the function is activated, a warning ing the demist/defrost functions for the win- button ››› Fig. 173 (the button light turns off).

Safety
light on the button is turned on. dows. ● Turn the temperature regulator 1 to set
 Heated rear window. the desired temperature inside the vehicle.
 Button to switch on air conditioning Note ● Turn the blower switch to any of the set-
››› page 169. The air conditioning system Please consider the general notes. tings 1-4. »
169
 Operation

● Set the air distribution regulator 3 to the ● Turn the blower switch to any of the set- ● Open and turn the side outlets towards the
air flow configuration desired:  (towards tings 1-4. windows.
the windscreen),  (towards the chest),  ● Set the air distribution control to the air
(towards the footwell) and  (towards the If the air conditioning does not work, this
flow configuration desired:  (towards the
windscreen and footwell areas). may be due to the following reasons:
windscreen),  (towards the chest),  (to-
wards the footwell) and  (towards the wind- ● The engine is stationary.
Interior cooling screen and footwell areas). ● The fan blower is switched off.
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C
temperature and the air humidity go down. Demisting the windscreen
This way, if the outside humidity is extreme, (+37°F).
● Turn air distribution to .
the air conditioning prevents the misting of ● The air conditioning system compressor
● Turn the fan control to one of the two levels has been temporarily switched off because of
the windows and therefore, comfort is im-
proved. depending on the speed required. an increased engine coolant temperature.
● Rotate the temperature control to the de- ● The air conditioner fuse is faulty.
● Turn on the cooling system using the  sired level of comfort.
button (the button light turns on). ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air
● Close the central outlets. conditioning checked by a specialised work-
● Turn the temperature control switch until
shop.
the desired interior temperature is reached.

170
 Air conditioning

Climatronic*

Technical data
General notes

Advice
Operation
Fig. 174 Climatronic: controls.

Read the additional information carefully Climatronic description Switching off the Climatronic
›››  page 51 Cooling only works if the following conditions ● Adjust fan power to zero ››› Fig. 174 2 or

Emergencies
Climatronic automatically maintains a com- are met: press the  button.
fortable temperature. To do so, it automati- ● The engine is running
cally regulates the supplied air temperature In order to ensure engines subject to heavy
● the outside temperature is above +2°C loads are cooled, the air conditioning com-
and the blower and air distribution levels.
(+36°F); pressor is switched off in the event of high
The system also allows for the effect of sun-
light, so there is no need for manual adjust- ●  turned on. coolant temperatures.
ment.
Recommended setting for all seasons of the

Safety
Starting the Climatronic
Automatic operation guarantees maximum year
comfort any time of year ››› page 172. When a button is pressed, the corresponding
function will be activated (except for the recir- ● Set the required temperature. We recom-
culation button), switching on the air condi- mend +22°C (+72°F).
tioning if it was switched off. ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 174. »
171
 Operation

● Adjust the vents so that the air flow is di- It is possible to select interior temperatures Switching off windscreen defrosting
rected slightly upwards. from +16°C (+64°F) to +29°C (+84°F). In this ● Press the  button several times or
range the temperature is regulated automati- press the  button.
Change between degrees Centigrade and de- cally. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) is
grees Fahrenheit selected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If a The temperature is regulated automatically.
The units of degrees can be changed via the
temperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selected, The air output from the vents ››› Fig. 171 2
“HI” is displayed on the screen. At both ex- is increased.
Easy Connect system using the  button
tremes, Climatronic works at maximum cool-
and the function button SETTINGS >
ing or heating power, respectively. The tem- WARNING
Units > Temperature.
perature is not regulated.
Read and observe the safety warnings ››› in
Automatic mode In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu- General notes on page 164.
Automatic mode is used to maintain a con- tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu-
stant temperature and demist the windows larly the footwells) and significant differen- Note
inside the vehicle. ces in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehi-
● A visit to the specialised service once a
cle, sensitive people may catch cold.
year is recommended to clean the Climatronic
● Set a interior temperature between +16°C
system.
(+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F). Fan regulation
● The interior temperature sensor is at the
● Adjust the vents so that the air flow is di- Climatronic automatically regulates blower bottom. Do not cover it with stickers or the
rected slightly upwards. speed according to the interior temperature. like, as this could have a negative effect on
● Press the  button, AUTO is displayed on It is possible, however, to set the blower Climatronic operations.
the screen. speed to suit requirements.

Automatic mode is switched off by pressing ● Press the 2 buttons to increase or reduce
the air distribution buttons or increasing or fan speed.
decreasing the blower speed. However, the
Climatronic will switch off when the blower
temperature remains regulated.
switches off.
Adjusting the temperature
Turn on windscreen defrost
● When you switch on the ignition, control 1
● Press the button  ››› Fig. 174.
››› Fig. 174 can be used to set the required in-
terior temperature.

172
 Driving

Driving Switching the ignition or the glow plug sys- ● Unsupervised use of the key could start the

Technical data
tem on engine or any electrical system, such as the
Turn the ignition key to this position and re- electric windows. This could result in serious
Starting and stopping the en- lease it 2 . If the key cannot be turned or it is injury.
gine difficult to turn from position 1 to position
2 , move the steering wheel from one side to CAUTION
Ignition key positions the other; this will release it.
The starter motor will only work when the en-
gine is stopped (ignition key position 3 ).
Starting

Advice
The engine is started when the key is in this
position 3 . Electrical devices with high pow- Starting petrol engines
er consumption are switched off temporarily
at the same time. The engine can only be started using a genu-
Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig- ine SEAT key with its correct code.

Operation
nition key must be turned to position 1 . The – Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi-
repetitive start prevention lock of the igni- tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-
tion prevents possible damage to the starter oughly and hold it in this position for the
motor if the engine is already running. starter to turn the engine on.
Fig. 175 Ignition key positions.

WARNING – Turn the ignition key to the starting posi-

Emergencies
Read the additional information carefully tion ››› Fig. 175 3 .
›››  page 31 ● The ignition key must NOT be removed from
the lock until the vehicle comes to a stand- – Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en-
Ignition switched off, steering lock still. Otherwise, the steering could be imme- gine starts; the starter motor must not run
diately blocked- Risk of accident! on with the engine.
In this position ››› Fig. 175 1 the ignition
● Always remove the key from the ignition
and the engine are off and the steering may After starting a very hot engine, you may
when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a
be locked. need to slightly press down the accelerator.
short period. This is especially important if

Safety
For the Steering lock to operate without the children or disabled people are left alone in When starting a cold engine, it may be a little
ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it the vehicle. They could accidentally start the noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres-
locks with an audible sound. You should al- engine or work electrical equipment such as sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com-
ways lock the steering wheel when you leave the electric windows, resulting in an acci-
pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause
dent.
your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle for concern. »
theft ››› .
173
 Operation

If the engine does not start immediately, For the sake of the environment If there are problems starting the engine, see
switch the starter off after 10 seconds and try the ›››  page 71.
again after half a minute. If the engine still Do not warm-up the engine by running the
engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off
does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be Glow plug system for diesel engines
immediately, driving gently. This helps the
checked ››› page 104, Fuses.
engine reach operating temperature faster To avoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-
and reduces emissions. tery, do not use any other major electrical
WARNING
equipment while the glow plugs are pre-heat-
● Never start or run the engine in unventila- ing.
ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases con-
Starting diesel engines Start the engine as soon as the glow plug
tain carbon monoxide, an odourless and col-
ourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal acci- warning lamp goes out.
The engine can only be started using a genu-
dents. Carbon monoxide can cause loss of
consciousness and result in death. ine SEAT key with its correct code. Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank
● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the – Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi- has run dry
engine is running. tion and depress the clutch pedal thor- If the fuel tank has been completely run dry,
● Never use “cold start sprays”, they could oughly and hold it in this position for the it may take longer than normal (up to one mi-
explode or cause the engine to run at high starter to turn the engine on. nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.
revs. Risk of injury. – Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 175 This is because the fuel system must elimi-
2 . The warning lamp  will light for en- nate air first.
CAUTION gine pre-heating.
WARNING
● When the engine is cold, you should avoid – When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition
high engine speeds, driving at full throttle key to position 3 to start the engine. Do Observe the safety warnings ››› in Starting
and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine petrol engines on page 174.
not press the accelerator.
damage.
– Release the ignition key as soon as the en-
● The vehicle should not be pushed or towed CAUTION
more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un- gine starts. The starter motor should not
turn at the same time. ● When the engine is cold, you should avoid
burnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter
high engine speeds, driving at full throttle
and damage it.
When starting a cold engine, it may be a little and over-loading the engine. Risk of engine
● Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve- noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- damage.
hicle in order to start it, you should first try to sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- ● The vehicle should not be pushed or towed
start it using the battery of another vehicle.
pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause more than 50 metres to start the engine. Un-
Please observe and follow the notes on the
for concern. burnt fuel could enter the particulate filter
›››  page 71, How to jump start. and damage it.
174
 Driving

● Before attempting to push-start or tow a ve- The engine can, however, be started if the ● The steering lock can be immediately

Technical data
hicle in order to start it, you should first try to appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used. blocked once the key is removed from the ig-
start it using the battery of another vehicle. nition. The vehicle cannot be steered. Risk of
Please observe and follow the notes on the Note accident.
›››  page 71, How to jump start. A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured ● Power-assisted steering does not work
if genuine SEAT keys are used. when the engine is off, and more strength is
For the sake of the environment needed to turn the wheel.
● If the key is removed from the ignition lock
Do not warm-up the engine by running the
the steering lock could be engaged and vehi-

Advice
engine with the vehicle stationary. You Switching off the engine
should drive off as soon as you start the en- cle steering would not work.
gine. This helps the engine reach operating – Stop the vehicle.
temperature faster and reduces emissions. CAUTION
– Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 175
1 . ● When the engine has been running under a
heavy load for a long period, heat can accu-

Operation
Immobiliser “SAFE”*1) After switching the engine off, the radiator mulate in the engine compartment and cause
fan may run on for up to 10 minutes. It is also engine damage. For this reason, idle the en-
The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- possible that the fan turns itself on once gine for approximately 2 minutes before
thorised persons from driving the vehicle. more if the coolant temperature increases switching it off.
due to the heat accumulated in the engine ● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop
Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates
compartment or due to its prolonged expo- system* switches off the engine, the ignition
the electronic immobiliser automatically

Emergencies
sure to solar radiation. remains switched on. Make sure that the igni-
when the key is inserted into the ignition.
tion is switched off before leaving the vehi-
The electronic immobiliser will be activated WARNING cle, otherwise the battery could discharge.
again automatically as soon as you pull the ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-
key out of the ignition lock. cle is completely stationary.
The engine can only be started using a genu- ● The brake servo works only when the en-
ine SEAT key with its correct code. gine is running. With the engine switched off,

Safety
more strength is needed to brake. As normal
If the following message* is shown on the in-
brake operation cannot be performed, risk of
strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle accidents and serious injury may exist.
cannot be started.

1) Available depending on the market

175
 Operation

Starter button* Opening the driver's door when exiting the trim of the steering column ››› Fig. 177, as
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the close as possible to the Kessy logo.
steering column if the ignition is disabled. ● The ignition connects and the engine starts
automatically.
Switching the ignition on/off manually
Briefly push the starter button without touch- Emergency disconnection
ing the brake or clutch pedal ››› . If the engine does not switch off after briefly
For vehicles with both manual and automatic pressing the starter button, an emergency
transmission, the starter button text disconnect will be required:
START ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat
● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-
when the system is preset for switching the
onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-
ignition on and off.
Fig. 176 In the lower part of the centre con- ond ››› .
sole: starter button. ● The engine turns off automatically.
Automatic ignition switch-off
If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve-
Engine restart feature
hicle key with them but leaving the ignition
on, the ignition is not switched off automati- If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle
cally. The ignition is switched off automati- after the engine stops, you will only have 5
cally by pressing the lock button on the re- seconds to restart it. A warning will display
mote control  or manually by pressing the on the dash panel screen.
sensor surface on the door lever ››› Fig. 143 After this interval, it will not be possible to
start the engine without a valid key inside
Emergency starting function the vehicle.
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,
Fig. 177 On the right of the steering column: an emergency start-up will be required. The Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve-
emergency start. relevant message will appear in the dash hicles with the Start-Stop system
panel display. This may happen when, for ex- The ignition is switched off automatically
The vehicle engine can be started with a ample, the battery of the vehicle key button when the vehicle is stopped and the auto-
starter button (Press & Drive). To do so, there is very low or flat: matic engine shutdown is active, if:
must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the
area of the front or rear seats. ● Immediately after pushing the starter but- ● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,
ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right
● the driver does not step on any pedal,
176
 Driving

● the driver door is opened. ● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time Starting the engine with the starter

Technical data
Step
After automatically turning off the ignition, if
with the ignition on, the vehicle battery button ››› page 176.
might be discharged and it might not be pos-
the dipped beam  is on, the side light re- sible to start the engine. Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 176
mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat- without pressing the accelerator. For the en-
● In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in
tery is sufficiently charged). If the driver locks gine to start there must be a valid key in the
the engine starting if it requires preheating. 3. vehicle.
the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the
● If during the STOP phase you press the After starting the engine, the light of the
side light goes out.
START ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is START ENGINE STOP button changes to a fixed
switched off and the button flashes. light indicating that the engine has started.

Advice
WARNING
● If the indication “Start-Stop system deacti- If the engine does not start, stop and wait for
Any accidental movement of the vehicle could vated: Start the engine manually” is dis- approx. 1 minute before trying again. If nec-
result in serious injury. 4.
played on the dash panel display, the essary, perform an emergency start
● When switching on the ignition, do not START ENGINE STOP button will blink. ››› page 176.
press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise
the engine could start immediately. Disconnect the hand brake when you are
5.

Operation
about to start driving ››› page 180.
Starting the engine
WARNING WARNING
3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button
If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- Never leave the vehicle with the engine run-
out due care, this may cause accidents and Starting the engine with the starter ning, especially if a gear or gear range is en-
serious injury. Step
button ››› page 176. gaged. The vehicle could then suddenly move

Emergencies
● Never leave any key inside the vehicle or something strange could happen that
when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthor- Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 is would cause damage, fire or serious injury.
1.
ised person could lock the vehicle, start the performed.
engine or connect the ignition and, in this In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press
way, operate electronic equipment (e.g. the WARNING
1a. and hold the clutch down until the engine
windows). starts. Cold start sprays could explode or cause a
sudden increase in the engine speed.
Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selec-
Note 2. ● Never use sprays to cold start the engine.

Safety
tor lever in position P or N.
● Before leaving the vehicle, always discon-
nect the ignition manually and, if appropri- CAUTION
ate, take into account the instructions on the ● The starter motor or the engine may be
screen of the dash panel. damaged if you try to start the engine while »
177
 Operation

driving or if you restart it immediately after Stopping the engine ● If the ignition is switched off, the steering
switching it off. 3 Valid for vehicles: with starter button column could be locked, making it impossible
● If the engine is cold, avoid high engine to control the vehicle.
speeds, pushing the engine too hard and rap- Switch off the engine with the starter
Step
id acceleration. button ››› page 176. CAUTION
● Do not start the engine by pushing the ve-
1. Stop the vehicle completely ››› . If the engine is made to work hard for a long
hicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could enter time, it may overheat after being switched
the catalytic converter and damage it. Press and hold the brake pedal until the step off. To prevent damage to the engine before
2.
4 is performed. switching it off, leave it idle for approx. 2 mi-
Note nutes in neutral.
If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place
3.
● Do not wait until the engine warms up with the selector lever in position P.
the vehicle stationary; if you have good visi- Note
4. Apply the handbrake ››› page 180.
bility through the windows, start driving im- After switching off the engine, the cooling fan
mediately. This helps the engine reach oper- Briefly press the start-up button ››› Fig. 176. may continue to operate in the engine com-
ating temperature faster and reduces emis- The START ENGINE STOP button blinks again. If
partment for a few more minutes, even with
5.
sions. the engine fails to switch off, perform an
the ignition off. The radiator fan is automati-
emergency disconnect ››› page 176.
● Electrical components with a high power cally switched off.
consumption are switched off temporarily If the vehicle is equipped with a manual
when the engine starts. 6.
gearbox, put it into 1st or reverse.
● When starting with a cold engine, noise
“My Beat” Function
levels may briefly increase. This is quite nor- WARNING
mal, and no cause for concern. For vehicles with a convenience key there is
Never switch off the engine while the vehicle
● When the outside temperature is below is moving. This could cause loss of control of the “My Beat” function. This feature provides
+5°C (+41°F), if the engine is diesel, some the vehicle, accidents and serious injury. an additional indication of the vehicle igni-
smoke may appear under the vehicle when tion system.
● The airbags and belt tensioners do not
the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.
work when the ignition is switched off. When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening
● The brake servo does not work with the en- the doors with the remote control, the
gine off. Therefore, you need to press the START ENGINE STOP button flashes, calling at-
break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. tention to the relevant starter system button.
● Power steering does not work when the en-
Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light
gine is not running. You need more strength
to steer when the engine is switched off.
of the START ENGINE STOP button flashes. With
the engine switched off, after a few seconds,
178
 Driving

the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashing a great extent on the conditions under which range (depending on the type of transmis-

Technical data
and goes out. the vehicle is operated and the way the vehi- sion). Thus, make use of engine braking and
cle is driven. If you often drive in town, drive relieve the brakes.
With the engine running, the
START ENGINE STOP button light stays on, indi-
short distances or have a sporty driving style, ● Never let the brakes “drag” by applying
we recommend that you have the thickness light pressure. Continuous braking will cause
cating that the engine is running. The time
of your brake pads checked by technical serv- the brakes to overheat and the braking dis-
that lapses between the moment the user
ices more frequently than recommended in tance will increase. Apply and then release
starts the engine with the START ENGINE STOP
the Maintenance Programme. the brakes alternately.
button and the lighting changes from flash-
If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af- ● Never let the vehicle run with the engine

Advice
ing to fixed will depend on specific engine
size characteristics. Upon switching the igni- ter crossing areas of water, on days of heavy switched off. The braking distance is in-
tion off with the START ENGINE STOP button, it rainfall or even after washing the car, the ef- creased considerably when the brake servo is
not active.
starts flashing again. fect of the brakes is reduced as the brake
discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in ● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is
In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles can
this case, the brakes should be “dried” by
“My Beat” function also offers additional in- form in the brake system. This reduces the ef-

Operation
pressing the brake pedal several times.
formation: ficiency of the brakes.
● When the engine stops during the Stop WARNING ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers
could restrict the airflow to the brakes and
phase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP but- Longer braking distances and faults in the cause them to overheat. Before purchasing
ton stays on, since, even though the engine brake system increase the risk of accidents. accessories please observe the relevant in-
is off, the Start-Stop system is active. ● New brake pads must be run in and do not structions ››› page 259, Technical modifica-

Emergencies
● When the engine cannot be stated again have the correct friction during the first tions.
with the Start-Stop system, ››› page 202, and 200 km (124 miles). This reduced braking ca- ● If a brake system circuit fails, the braking
needs to be started manually, the pacity may be compensated for by pressing distance will be increased considerably. Con-
START ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate on the brake pedal a little harder, which also tact a specialised workshop immediately and
this fact. applies when the brake pads have to be avoid unnecessary journeys.
changed further on.
● If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are
driving on roads which have been salted,

Safety
Braking and parking braking power may be lower than normal. Control lamp
● On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively
Situations in which the warning lamp lights
Braking capacity and braking distance used, they will overheat. Before driving down
up *
a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce
The efficiency of the brakes depends directly speed and change down into a lower gear or ● the brake fluid level is too low
on the brake pad wear. This wear depends to ››› page 280. »
179
 Operation

● there is a fault in the brake system. The handbrake should be applied firmly to so causes premature wear on the rear brake
prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling pads.
This warning lamp can light up together with away. Always apply the handbrake when you
the ABS system warning lamp. leave your vehicle and when you park.
CAUTION
WARNING Applying the handbrake Always apply the handbrake before you leave
● If the brake warning lamp does not go out the vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well. In vehi-
– Pull the handbrake lever up firmly
or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid cles with an automatic gearbox, place the
level in the reservoir is too low so there is a
››› Fig. 178. gear lever in position P.
risk of an accident ››› page 280, Brake fluid.
Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain Releasing the handbrake
technical assistance. – Pull the lever up slightly and press the re- Parking
● If the brake warning lamp lights up  to- lease knob in the direction of the arrow
gether with the ABS lamp  this could be ››› Fig. 178 and guide the handbrake lever The handbrake should always be firmly ap-
due to an ABS fault. This could cause the rear down fully ››› . plied when the vehicle is parked.
wheels to lock quickly when you brake. This
could cause the rear to break away. Risk of Always pull the handbrake all the way up, so Always note the following points when park-
skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek technical there is less risk of driving off with it still en- ing the vehicle:
assistance. gaged ››› . – Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
The handbrake warning lamp  lights up – Apply the handbrake.
when the handbrake is applied and the igni-
Handbrake tion switched on. The warning lamp turns off – Put it in 1st gear.
when the handbrake is released. – Switch the engine off and remove the key
from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel
WARNING slightly to engage the steering lock.
● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi-
– Always take you keys with you when you
cle when it is in motion. The braking distance
is considerably longer, because braking is
leave the vehicle ››› .
only applied to the rear wheels. Risk of acci- Additional notes on parking the vehicle on
dent!
gradients:
● If the handbrake is only partially released,
this will cause the rear brakes to overheat, Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle
which can impair the function of the brake rolls against the kerb if it started to roll.
Fig. 178 Handbrake between the front seats. system and could lead to an accident. This al-
180
 Driving

● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, Braking and stability systems Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*

Technical data
turn the front wheels so that they point to- The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak-
wards the kerb.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* ing the wheels individually.
● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn
The system uses the steering wheel angle
the front wheels so that they point away from This Electronic Stability System reduces the
and road speed to calculate the changes of
the kerb. risk of skidding and improves the vehicle's
direction desired by the driver, and constant-
● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the stability and ability to hold the road.
ly compares them with the actual behaviour
handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) contains of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for

Advice
the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the
WARNING traction control system (ASR). The ESC works ESC brakes the appropriate wheel automati-
● Take measures to reduce the risk of injury together with the ABS. Both control lamps cally.
when you leave your vehicle unattended. will light up if the ESC or ABS systems are
The forces acting on the braked wheel bring
● Never park where the hot exhaust system faulty.
the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the
could ignite inflammable materials, such as The ESC system is started automatically vehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end

Operation
dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc. when the engine is started. slides out), the system will act on the front
● Never allow vehicle occupants to remain in wheel on the outside of the turn.
the vehicle when it is locked. They would be The ESC system is always active and cannot
unable to open the vehicle from the inside, be switched off. With the Easy Connect sys-
Control lamp
and could become trapped in the vehicle in tem it is only possible to deactivate the ASR
an emergency. In the event of an emergency, or else select Sport mode. There are two control lamps for the electronic

Emergencies
locked doors will delay assistance to vehicle stability control. The lamp  provides infor-
The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin
occupants. mation concerning function and  disconnec-
is desirable ››› page 182.
● Never leave children alone in the vehicle. tion status.
They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex- For example:
Both control lamps light up together when
ample, by releasing the handbrake or the the ignition is switched on and should turn
● When driving with snow chains.
gearbox lever.
off after approximately 2 seconds. This is the
● Depending on weather conditions, it may ● When driving in deep snow or on loose sur-
time taken for the function check.
become extremely hot or cold inside the vehi- faces.

Safety
cle. This can be fatal. ● When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back- This programme includes the ABS, EDL and
wards and forwards. ASR. It also includes emergency braking as-
sistance (BAS). »
Press the button to switch the ASR back on
when you no longer need wheel spin.

181
 Operation

The control lamp  has the following func- CAUTION When the ASR is off, the warning lamp lights
tions: up . The ASR should normally be left on.
● To ensure that the ESC works correctly, all
● It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC Only in exceptional cases can it be discon-
four wheels must be fitted with the same
is activated. nected, i.e. when you want the wheels to
tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of
slide; this done through the Easy Connect
● It will light up if there is a fault in the ESC. the tyres can cause the system to reduce en-
gine power when this is not desired. system, by means of the  button and the
● As the ESC operates in conjunction with the function button SETTINGS> ESC system,
● Any modifications made to the vehicle (for
ABS, the ESC light will also come on if a fault for example:
example, to the engine, brake system, run-
should occur in the ABS.
ning gear or to the combination of wheels ● With compact temporary spare wheel.
If the ESC control lamp  lights up and stays and tyres) may affect the operation of the
ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR. ● When using the snow chains.
on after the engine is started, this may mean
● When driving in deep snow or on soft ter-
that the control system has temporarily
switched off the ESC. In this case the ESC can rain.
be reactivated by switching the ignition off Traction control system (ASR) ● When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it
and then on again. If the control lamp goes “by rocking it.”
out, this means the system is fully functional. The traction control system prevents the driv-
en wheels from spinning when the vehicle is The ASR should be switched on again as
The  lamp provides information about the accelerating. soon as possible.
disconnection status of the system:
Description and operation of the traction Control lamp
● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected or
control system during acceleration (ASR) There are three control lamps for the traction
if you select ESC Sport mode, only by means
of Easy Connect. The ASR system intervenes by reducing en- control system:  (for vehicles equipped
gine power and preventing the driven wheels with M-ABS),  (for vehicles equipped with
WARNING from slipping during acceleration. ESC) and . Both control lamps light up to-
gether when the ignition is switched on and
● Do not forget that the electronic stability TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerate should turn off after approximately 2 sec-
control ESC cannot defy the laws of physics. and climb a gradient in slippery conditions onds, which is the time taken for the function
Bear this in mind, particularly on slippery where this may otherwise be difficult or even check.
and wet roads and when towing a trailer. impossible.
● Always adapt your driving style to suit the
The ASR automatically switches on when the The  or  lamp has the following function:
condition of the roads and the traffic situa-
tion. The greater safety provided by the ESC engine is started. If necessary, it could be ● It flashes when the ASR is working if the ve-
should not encourage you to run any risks. switched on or off using the Easy Connect hicle is moving.
system*.
182
 Driving

If the system is deactivated or if it has any ● Any modifications made to the vehicle (for The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles

Technical data
fault, the warning lamp will remain lit. The example, to the engine, brake system, run- with a driver information system*, the driver
warning lamp will also light up if a fault ning gear or to the combination of wheels will be shown the electronic stability
should occur in the ABS because the ASR op- and tyres) may affect the operation of the control (ESC) option: sport.
erates in conjunction with the ABS. For fur- ABS and ASR. Warning! Limited stability.
ther information, see ››› page 183.
Disable ESC “Sport” mode
The  lamp provides information about the Connecting/disconnecting ESC and Through the Easy Connect system menu
disconnection status of the system:* ››› page 122. The warning lamp  will switch
ASR*

Advice
● It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected off. For vehicles with a driver information sys-
via Easy Connect. The ESC is switched on automatically when tem*, the driver will be shown the elec-
the engine is started, and only works when tronic stability control (ESC)
By means of Easy Connect, the ASR function the engine is running and includes the ABS, option: on.
is reactivated and the warning lamp switched EDS and ASR systems.
off.

Operation
The ASR and ESC function should only be Disable ASR
WARNING switched off in situations in which traction is The Easy Connect system menu is used to
insufficient, among others: switch off the ASR ››› page 122. The traction
● Remember that not even the ASR can defy
control system will be disabled.
the laws of physics. Bear this in mind, partic- ● When driving in deep snow or on surfaces
ularly on slippery and wet roads and when that are not very firm. The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles
towing a trailer.

Emergencies
with a driver information system* the driver
● To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck.
● Always adapt your driving style to suit the will be informed that ASR is disabled.
condition of the roads and the traffic situa- Then switch the ASR and ESC function back
tion. The greater safety provided by the ASR on. Activate ASR
should not encourage you to run any risks.
Depending on finishes and versions, it is The Easy Connect system menu ››› page 122
possible either to disconnect only the ASR or is used to switch on the ASR. The traction
CAUTION control system will be enabled.
else activate ESC Sport mode.

Safety
● To ensure that the ASR works correctly, The control lamp  switches off. For vehicles
identical tyres should be fitted on all four ESC in “Sport” mode with a driver information system* the driver
wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius will be informed that ASR is enabled.
of the tyres can cause the system to reduce Sport mode can be connected via the Easy
engine power when this is not desired. Connect ››› page 122 system menu. The ESC ● Activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC func-
and the traction control system (ASR) have »
tion in the Easy Connect system by means of
only a limited ability to stabilise the vehicle.
183
 Operation

the  button and the SETTINGS and in the speed of the driven wheels of approxi- CAUTION
ESC System function buttons. mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partially
slippery road surface. It does this by braking Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en-
gine, the brake system, running gear or any
WARNING the wheel which has lost traction and distrib-
components affecting the wheels and tyres)
You should switch on the ESC Sport mode on- uting more driving force to the other driven
could affect the efficiency of the EDL
ly if the traffic conditions and your driving wheel via the differential. ››› page 259.
ability allow you to do so safely: risk of skid- To prevent the disc brake of the braking
ding! wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au-
● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising tomatically if subjected to excessive loads. Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*
function will be limited to allow for a sportier The vehicle will continue to function normally
drive. The driving wheels could spin and the without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not The function (Hydraulic Brake Assist HBA) is
vehicle could skid. informed that the EDL has been switched off. only included in vehicles with ESC.
The EDL will switch on again automatically In an emergency, most drivers brake in time,
Note
when the brake has cooled down. but not with maximum force. This results in
If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s Sport unnecessarily long braking distances.
mode is selected, cruise control* will be Control lamp
switched off. This is when the brake assist system comes
A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the into action. When pressing the brake pedal
ESC control lamp . Take the vehicle to a rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer-
specialised workshop as soon as possible. gency. It very quickly builds up the full brake
Electronic differential lock (EDS)* pressure so that the ABS can be activated
WARNING more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing
The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi-
● When accelerating on a slippery surface, braking distance.
cles equipped with Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC)*. for example on ice and snow, press the accel-
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped-
erator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven
al, since the brake assist system switches off
EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel- wheels may start to spin. This could impair
automatically as soon as you release the
erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi- the vehicle's stability.
brake.
tions where this may otherwise be difficult or ● Always adapt your driving style to suit road
even impossible. conditions and the traffic situation. Do not let
Automatic hazard warning lights activation
the extra safety afforded by EDL tempt you in-
It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed
to taking any risks when driving, this can The brake lights flash automatically to indi-
of the driven wheels.
cause accidents. cate that the vehicle is braking suddenly or in
At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h an emergency situation. If the emergency
(50 mph), it is able to balance out differences braking continues until the vehicle comes to
184
 Driving

a standstill, the hazard warning lights will pressure to this wheel. The driver is made The vehicle can still be braked in the normal

Technical data
then come on and the brake lights will re- aware of this control process by a pulsating way, without the ABS function. Take the vehi-
main on permanently from that moment. The of the brake pedal and audible noise. This is cle to a specialised workshop as soon as
warning lights will automatically switch off a deliberate warning to the driver that one or possible.
when the vehicle begins to move again or more of the wheels is tending to lock and the
If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC* and the
when the "warning" light button is pressed. ABS control function has intervened. In this
tyre pressure control lamp will also light up.
situation it is important to keep the brake
WARNING pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regu-
Brake system fault
● The risk of accident is higher if you drive late the brake application. Do not “pump”.

Advice
too fast, if you do not keep your distance from If the ABS warning lamp  lights up together
If you brake hard on a slippery road surface,
the vehicle in front, and when the road sur- with the brake warning lamp , there is a
the best possible control is retained as the
face is slippery or wet. The increased acci- fault in the ABS function and in the brake
wheels do not lock.
dent risk cannot be reduced by the brake as- system ››› .
sist system. However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee
● The brake assist system cannot defy the shorter braking distances in all conditions. WARNING

Operation
laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are Braking distance could even be further if you ● The anti-lock brake system cannot defy the
dangerous even with the brake assist system! brake on gravel or on fresh snow on a slip- laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are
Therefore, it is essential that you adjust your pery surface. dangerous even with ABS! If you notice that
speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. the ABS is working (to counteract locked
Do not let the extra safety features tempt you Control lamp wheels under braking), you should reduce
into taking any risks when driving. speed immediately to suit the road and traffic

Emergencies
The control lamp  lights up for a few sec-
conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea-
onds when the ignition is switched on. It tures tempt you into taking any risks when
goes out again after the system has run driving.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) through an automatic test sequence.
● The effectiveness of ABS is also determined
The anti-lock brake (ABS) system prevents by the tyres fitted ››› page 283.
There is a fault in the ABS if:
the wheels from locking during braking and ● If the running gear or brake system is modi-
is an important part of the vehicle's active ● The control lamp  does not light up when fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-
the ignition is switched on. verely limited. »

Safety
safety system.
● The control lamp does not go out again af-
How the ABS works ter a few seconds.
If one of the wheels turns too slowly in rela- ● The control lamp lights up when the vehicle
tion to the vehicle's speed, and is close to is moving.
locking, the system will reduce the braking
185
 Operation

WARNING grip on the front axle, resulting in understeer ● When the driver presses the accelerator,
or “lengthening” of the trajectory. the automatic braking does not take place.
● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-
serve the warnings ››› page 273, Working in The XDS system can detect and correct this ● When the braking pressure through press-
the engine compartment. effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC. ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-
● If the brake system warning lamp  should
tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake
Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside automatically.
light up together with the ABS warning lamp wheel and counter the excess driving torque
, stop the vehicle immediately and check ● Multi-collision braking will not be available
of that wheel. This means that the driver's
the brake fluid level in the reservoir if ESC is malfunctioning.
desired trajectory is much more precise.
››› page 280, Brake fluid. If the brake fluid
level has dropped below the “MIN” mark you The XDS system works in combination with
must not drive on. Risk of accident. Obtain the ESC and is always active, even when ASR
technical assistance.
Brake servo
traction control is disconnected or the ESC is
● If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in in Sport mode. The brake servo increases the pressure you
the brake system may have been caused by a apply to the brake pedal. It works only when
failure of the ABS system. This could cause
the engine is running.
the rear wheels to lock quickly when you
Multi-collision Brake*
brake. This could cause the rear to break If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. due
away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and to a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being
In an accident, the multi-collision brake can
seek technical assistance. towed, you will have to press the brake pedal
help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of
skidding during the accident, which could considerably harder to make up for the lack
lead to further collisions. of servo assistance.
Electronic differential lock (XDS)*
The multi-collision brake works for front, side WARNING
When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- or rear accidents, when the airbag control
The braking distance can also be affected by
tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn unit records its activation level and the acci-
external factors.
at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h
● Never let the vehicle coast with the engine
this way, the wheel that is turning faster (out- (6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the
switched off. Failure to follow this instruction
er wheel) receives less drive torque than the vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-
could result in an accident. The braking dis-
inner wheel. This may mean that in certain aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-
tance is increased considerably when the
situations the torque delivered to the inner board network brake servo is not active.
wheel is too high, causing the wheels to The following actions control automatic brak- ● If the brake servo is not working, for exam-
spin. On the other hand, the outer wheel is ing during the accident: ple when the vehicle is being towed, you will
receiving a lower drive torque than it could have to press the brake pedal considerably
transmit. This causes an overall loss of lateral harder than normal.
186
 Driving

Hill driving assistant* ● besides having a gear engaged or being in Manual gearbox

Technical data
neutral for manual gear change and with the
selector lever at position S, D or R for an au-
Driving with a manual gearbox
tomatic gearbox.

This system is also active when reversing up- Read the additional information carefully
hill. ›››  page 49
Certain versions of the model may include a
Fig. 179 Related video WARNING 6-speed manual gearbox, and its diagram is

Advice
● If you do not start the vehicle immediately shown on the gearbox lever.
This function is only included in vehicles with
after taking your foot off the brake pedal, the
ESC. vehicle may start to roll back under certain The reverse gear can only be engaged when
conditions. Depress the brake pedal or use the car is stationary. When the engine is run-
The hill driving assistant helps the driver to
the hand brake immediately. ning and before engaging this gear, wait
move off and upward on a hill when the vehi-
about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed
cle is stationary. ● If the engine stalls, depress the brake ped-

Operation
al or use the hand brake immediately. down thoroughly in order to protect the gear-
The system maintains brake pressure for ap- box.
● When following a line of traffic uphill, if you
proximately two seconds after the driver
want to prevent the vehicle from rolling back The reverse lights switch on when the reverse
takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent
accidentally when starting off, hold the brake gear is selected and the ignition is on.
the vehicle from lurching backward when it is
pedal down for a few seconds before starting
started. During these 2 seconds, the driver off. WARNING

Emergencies
has enough time to release the clutch pedal
and accelerate without the vehicle moving ● When the engine is running, the vehicle
and without having to use the handbrake, Note will start to move as soon as a gear is engag-
making start-up easier, more comfortable The Official Service or a specialist workshop ed and the clutch released.
and safer. can tell you if your vehicle is equipped with ● Never select the reverse gear when the ve-
this system. hicle is in motion. Risk of accident.
These are the basic operation conditions:
● being on a ramp or hill/slope, Note

Safety
● driver door closed, ● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever
● vehicle completely stationary, while driving. The pressure of your hand
could cause premature wear on the selector
● engine running and foot on the brake,
forks in the gearbox. »

187
 Operation

● When changing gear, you should always Selector lever positions N – Neutral (idling)
depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary With the selector lever in this position, the
wear and damage. Read the additional information carefully gear is in neutral.
● Do not “slip” the clutch to hold the vehicle ›››  page 50
on a hill. This causes premature wear and The selector lever position engaged is high- D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position
damage to the clutch. lighted on the display in the instrument clus- The selector lever in the D/S position enables
● Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal; ter. With the selector lever in the manual the gears to be controlled in normal mode (D)
although the pressure may seem insignifi- gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S), move
cant, it can cause the premature wear of the gear is also indicated on the display. the selector lever backwards. Moving the lev-
clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do
not need to change gear. er again will select normal mode (D). The se-
P – Parking lock lected driving mode is shown on the instru-
When the selector lever is in this position, ment panel display.
the driven wheels are locked mechanically. In normal mode (D), the gearbox automatical-
Automatic gearbox/DSG auto- The parking lock must be engaged only when ly selects the best gear ratio. This depends
the vehicle is stationary ››› .
matic gearbox* on the engine load, the road speed and the
The interlock button (the button on the selec- dynamic gear control programme (DCP).
Introduction tor lever handle) must be pressed in and si- Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty
multaneously the brake pedal must be de- driving style. This setting makes use of the
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- pressed before moving the selector lever ei- engine's maximum power output. When ac-
ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- ther in or out of position P. celerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.
tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-
mitted via two independent clutches. They re- R – Reverse gear Press the brake pedal to move the selector
place the torque converter found on conven- lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta-
Reverse gear must be engaged only when the
tional automatic gearboxes and allow for tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)
vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling
smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- ››› .
››› .
hicle. Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv-
To move the selector lever to position R, the
The tiptronic system allows the driver to ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to
interlock button must be pressed in and at
change gears manually if desired switch temporarily to tiptronic mode
the same time the brake pedal must be de-
››› page 190, Engaging gears with the trip- ››› page 190, in order to manually select gear
pressed. The reverse lights come on when
tonic mode*. ratios to suit the driving conditions.
the selector lever is in the R position with the
ignition on.

188
 Driving

WARNING cle with the engine running. Please always The selector lever lock is released as follows:

Technical data
● Take care not to accidentally press the ac-
observe the important safety warnings – Switch the ignition on.
celerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped.
››› page 273, Working in the engine compart-
ment. – Press the brake pedal and, at the same
The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-
time, hold the lock button in the direction
mediately (in some cases even if the parking
brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an
of the arrow ››› Fig. 180.
Note
accident. Automatic selector lever lock
● If the selector lever is moved accidentally
● Never move the selector lever to R or P to N when driving, release the accelerator and With the ignition switched on, the selector

Advice
when driving. Failure to follow this instruc- let the engine speed drop to idling before se-
tion could result in an accident. lever is locked in the positions P and N. The
lecting gear range D or S again.
brake pedal must be pressed to release the
● With selector lever in any position (except ● Should the power supply to the selector lever while pressing the release button if the
P) the vehicle must always be held with the lever be interrupted in position P, the selector selector lever is in the position P. As a re-
foot brake when the engine is running. This is lever will be locked. If this should happen the
because an automatic gearbox still transmits minder for the driver, with the lever in posi-
manual release can be used ›››  page 50.
power even at idling speed, and the vehicle tions P or N the following message will be

Operation
tends to “creep”. The accelerator pedal must shown on the display:
on no account be pressed inadvertently when When stationary, apply footbrake
a gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary. Selector lever lock
while selecting a gear.
The vehicle could otherwise start moving im-
mediately (in some cases even if the parking Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta-
brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h

Emergencies
accident. (3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph)
● While you are selecting a gear and the vehi- the lever lock is automatically deactivated in
cle is stopped with the engine running, do position N.
not accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc-
tion could result in an accident. The selector lever lock is not engaged if the
selector lever is moved quickly through posi-
● As a driver you should never leave your ve-
tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This
hicle if the engine is running and a gear is en-
makes it possible, for instance, to rock the
gaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while

Safety
the engine is running, you must apply the vehicle “backwards and forwards” if it is
Fig. 180 Selector lever lock. stuck. The selector lever lock engages auto-
handbrake and engage the parking lock (P).
matically if the brake pedal is not depressed
● To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake The selector lever lock prevents gears from and the lever is in position N for more than
and put the selector lever in position P before
opening the bonnet and working on the vehi-
being engaged inadvertently, so that the ve- about two seconds. »
hicle is not set in motion unintentionally.
189
 Operation

Interlock button – If the vehicle still does not move in the

The interlock button on the selector lever required direction, there is a system mal-
handle prevents the driver from inadvertently function. Seek specialist assistance and
engaging certain gears. Press the button in have the system checked.
to disengage the selector lever lock.

Safety interlock for ignition key Engaging gears with the triptonic
Once the ignition has been turned off, the mode*
key may be removed only if the gear selector
is in position P. While the key is not in the ig-
Fig. 182 Steering wheel: automatic gearbox
nition, the selector lever is locked in position
levers
P.
The tiptronic gives the driver the option to
Note
change gears manually.
● If the selector lever lock does not engage,
there is a fault. The transmission is interrup- Changing gear manually with the selector
ted to prevent the vehicle from accidentally lever
moving. Follow the procedure below in order
for the selector lever lock to engage again: It is possible to change to tiptronic mode,
– With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brake Fig. 181 Centre console: changing gear with both when the vehicle is stopped and while
pedal and release it again. tiptronic driving.
– With a 7-speed gearbox: press the brake – To switch to tiptronic mode, move the se-
pedal. Move the selector lever to posi- lector lever from position D/S to the right.
tion P or N and subsequently engage a As soon as the change is made the selector
gear. level will be shown in the position M on the
● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicle instrument panel display (for example M4
does not move forwards or back. Proceed to means that the fourth gear is engaged).
the next mode:
– Move the selector lever forwards + to se-
– When the vehicle does not move in the
lect a higher gear ››› Fig. 181.
required direction, the system may not
have the gear range correctly engaged. – Move the selector lever backwards – to
Press the brake pedal and engage the select a lower gear.
gear range again.
190
 Driving

Changing gear manually with the gearshift The engine can only start with the selector – Move the selector lever to position P.

Technical data
paddles* lever in position P or N. At low temperatures,
The gearshift paddles can be used when the below -10°C (50°F), the engine can only start Holding the car on a hill
selector lever is in the position D/S or M. with the selector lever in position P. – Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-
– Press the gearshift paddle + to select a vent the vehicle “from moving backwards”;
Starting the vehicle if necessary, apply the handbrake ››› . Do
higher gear ››› Fig. 182.
– Press and hold the brake pedal. not try to stop the vehicle “rolling back” by
– Press the gearshift paddle – to select a increasing the engine speed when a gear is
– Press and hold the interlock button (the
lower gear. engaged (pressing the accelerator) ››› .

Advice
button on the selector lever handle), move
– With the selector lever in position D/S, if no the selector lever to the desired position,
Starting off uphill
paddle is operated during a short period of for instance D ››› page 188, and release the
time, the gearbox control system switches interlock button. – Apply the handbrake.
back to automatic mode. To switch to per-
– Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a – Once you have engaged a gear press the
manent manual gear change using the
accelerator carefully and disengage the

Operation
gearshift paddles, move the selector lever slight movement can be felt).
handbrake.
from position D/S to the right. – Release the brake and press the accelerator
››› . Driving down hills: in some situations (on
When accelerating, the gearbox automatical-
mountain roads or when towing a trailer or
ly shifts up into the next gear shortly before Stopping briefly caravan) it can be advantageous to switch
the maximum engine speed is reached.
– Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle temporarily to the manual gearbox pro-

Emergencies
If you select a lower gear, the automatic gear- briefly when stationary (for instance at traf- gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec-
box will not shift down until there is no risk of fic lights). Do not press the accelerator. ted manually to suit the driving conditions
over-revving the engine. ››› .
When the kick-down feature is used, the Stopping/Parking On level ground it is sufficient to move the
gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depend- If the driver door is opened and the selector selector lever to position P. On slopes, first
ing on road speed and engine speed. lever is not in position P, the vehicle could engage the parking brake and then put the
move. The driver message will be:  Gear selection lever into the P position. This

Safety
change: selector lever in the avoids overloading the locking mechanism
Driving tips drive position!. Additionally, a buzzer and it will be easier to move the selector lev-
will sound. er from position P. »
The gearbox changes gear ratios automatical-
– Press and hold the brake pedal ››› .
ly as the vehicle moves.
– Apply the handbrake.
191
 Operation

WARNING overheat causing damage! If the warning Launch control program

lamp  lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as 3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6-Speed
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Selector
possible and wait for the gearbox to cool DSG with diesel engines superior to 125 kW and pet-
lever positions on page 189.
››› page 194. rol engines superior to 140 kW.
● Never allow the brake to rub and do not use
the brake pedal too often or for long periods. The Launch control programme enables maxi-
Constant braking causes overheating in the mum acceleration.
brakes. This could significantly reduce brak- Kick-down feature
ing power, increase braking distance or even Important: the engine must have reached op-
result in the total failure of the brake system. The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- erating temperature and the steering wheel
● To avoid rolling back on gradients always celeration to be reached. must not be turned.
hold the vehicle with the footbrake or hand- When the accelerator pedal is pressed right The engine speed for launch-control is differ-
brake if you have to stop. down past the point of resistance at full throt- ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use the
tle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower launch-control you must disconnect the anti-
CAUTION gear, depending on road speed and engine slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con-
speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is nect system menu ››› page 122. The warning
● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not
delayed until the engine reaches maximum lamp  will stay switched on or will flash
attempt to stop it from rolling by depressing
the accelerator when a gear has been selec- rpm. slowly depending on whether or not the vehi-
ted. This could cause overheating and dam- cle has a driver information system*.
age the automatic gearbox. Apply the hand- WARNING
On vehicles with the driver information sys-
brake firmly or press the brake pedal in order Please note that if the road surface is slip- tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and
to prevent the vehicle from rolling back. pery or wet, the kick-down feature could the corresponding text message Stability
● If you allow the car to roll with the selector cause the driving wheels to spin, which could control deactivated (temporary) ap-
lever in position N with the engine switched result in skidding. pears on the instrument panel to indicate the
off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged deactivation status.
as it will not be lubricated.
● In certain driving situations or traffic condi- – When the engine is running, switch off the
tions, such as frequently starting, prolonged traction control (ASR)1).
“creeping” of the vehicle or traffic jams with
continuous stoppages, the gearbox could

1) Vehicles without driver information system: the

warning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver in-

formation system: the warning lamp stays on.
192
 Driving

– Turn the selector lever to the position “S” Note 2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and

Technical data
or tiptronic, or else select the sport driv- reduce the charge on the brakes.
● After using the Launch control programme,
ing mode from the SEAT Drive Profile*
the temperature in the gearbox may have in- Downhill speed control is deactivated as
››› page 229. creased considerably. In this case, the pro- soon as the road levels out again or you
– Press the brake pedal firmly with your left gramme could be disabled for several mi- press the accelerator pedal.
foot and hold it down for at least one sec- nutes. The programme can be used again af-
ter the cooling phase. On vehicles with cruise control system*
ond.
● Accelerating with the Launch control pro-
››› page 205, downhill speed control is acti-
– With your right foot, press the accelerator vated when you set a cruising speed.

Advice
gramme places a heavy load on all parts of
down to the full throttle or kick-down posi- the vehicle. This can result in increased wear
tion. The engine speed will stabilise at and tear. WARNING
about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about The downhill speed control cannot defy the
2,000 rpm (diesel engine). laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be
– Take your left foot off the brake pedal. maintained constant in all situations. Always
Downhill speed control* be prepared to use the brakes!

Operation
WARNING The downhill speed control function helps
● Always adapt your driving style to the traf- the driver when driving down steep gradi-
fic conditions. ents. Inertia mode
● Only use the launch control programme Downhill speed control is activated when the The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy
when road and traffic conditions permit, and selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies

Emergencies
of the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer-
make sure your manner of driving and accel- the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto-
erating the vehicle does not inconvenience or tain stretches to be driven without using the
matically engages a lower gear that is suita- accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved.
endanger other road users.
ble for the slope. The downhill speed control Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll”
● Make sure that the ESC remains switched function attempts to maintain the speed at before, for example, arriving in a town.
on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC which the vehicle was travelling when the
are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin, foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of
causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk of acci- Switching on inertia mode
physics and technical drive limitations). It
dent! Important: selector lever must be in position

Safety
may be necessary to adjust the speed again
● After moving off, the ESC “sport” mode using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv- D, gradients below 12 %.
should be deactivated by briefly pressing the en that the downhill speed control can only – Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode
  button. change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de- ››› page 229.
scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In
this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to – Take your foot off the accelerator. »
193
 Operation

The driver message Inertia will be dis- Note Clutch

played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12
● Inertia mode is only available in eco (SEAT
mph), the gearbox will automatically disen-  Clutch overheating! Please
Drive Profile*) driving mode.
gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without stop!
the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi- ● The driver message Inertia is only dis-
played with the current consumption. In iner- The clutch has overheated and could be dam-
cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.
tia mode the gear will no longer be displayed aged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the gear-
(for example “E” will appear instead of “E7”). box to cool with the engine at idling speed
Stopping inertia mode and the selector lever in position P. When the
● On downhill sections with gradients above
– Press the brake or the accelerator pedal. 15 %, the inertia mode will automatically be warning lamp and the driver message switch
switched off temporarily. off, have the fault corrected by a specialised
To make use of the braking force and switch
workshop without delay. If the warning lamp
off the engine again, simply press the brake
and the driver message do not switch off, do
pedal briefly.
not continue driving. Seek specialist assis-
Emergency program tance.
Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged
section with less energy) and the switching A backup programme is in place if a fault
off using inertia (= shorter section without should occur in the control system.
the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel Gearbox malfunctions
consumption and emission balance. If all the positions of the selector lever are
shown over a light background on the instru-  Gearbox: Fault! Stop the ve-
WARNING ment panel display, there is a system fault hicle and place the lever in the
and the automatic gearbox will operate in position P.
● If the inertia mode has been switched on,
with the backup programme. When the back-
take into account, when approaching an ob- There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-
up programme is activated, it is possible to
stacle and releasing the accelerator pedal, cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-
that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usu- drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and
within a selected range of gears. In some ca- ing. Seek specialist assistance.
al manner: risk of accident!
ses driving in reverse gear may not be possi-  Gearbox: System fault! You
● When using inertia mode while travelling
ble. may continue driving.
down hills, the vehicle can increase speed:
risk of accident! Have the fault corrected by a specialised
CAUTION
● If other users drive your vehicle, warn them workshop without delay.
about inertia mode. If the gearbox operates with the backup pro-
gramme, take the vehicle to a specialised  Gearbox: System fault! You
workshop and have the fault repaired without can continue driving with re-
delay. strictions. Reverse gear disa‐
bled
194
 Driving

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the For the sake of the environment

Technical data
and have the fault repaired without delay. selector lever must be in the tiptronic posi-
tion ››› page 190. Selecting the correct gear can help to save
 Gearbox: System fault! You fuel.
can continue driving in D until No recommendation will appear if the opti-
switching off the engine mal gear is already engaged. The current
Note
gear will be displayed.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away The recommended gear indication turns off
from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- when the clutch pedal is pressed in vehicles
Display Meaning
tance. with manual gearbox or when the selector

Advice
 Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your  The optimal gear is selected. lever is removed from the tiptronic position in
vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
driving accordingly Changing to a higher gear is recom-
 mended.
Continue driving at moderate speeds. When
the warning lamp switches off, you can con- Changing to a lower gear is recom-
tinue driving in a normal manner.  mended. Steering

Operation
 Gearbox: press the brake and
engage a gear again. Information regarding the “cleanliness” of Introduction
the diesel particulate filter
If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a The power steering is not hydraulic but elec-
high temperature, this driver message will be The exhaust system manager detects that the tromechanical. The advantage of this steer-
displayed when the gearbox has cooled diesel particulate filter is nearly saturated ing is that it foes not need flexible hydraulic

Emergencies
again. and contributes to self-cleaning by recom- pipes, hydraulic oil, pump, filter or other
mending the optimal gear. For this reason, it parts. The electromechanical system saves
might be necessary to drive for a short time fuel. Whereas a hydraulic system needs con-
at a high rpm. tinuous oil pressure, electromechanical
Gear-change indicator steering only needs power when it is used.
WARNING
Selecting the optimal gear In vehicles with electromechanical steering,
The gear change indicator is only an auxiliary the assisted steering function automatically

Safety
function and in no case should be a substi-
While driving, and depending on vehicle adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering
tute for careful driving.
equipment, the instrument panel display may wheel torque and wheel orientation. The
● The responsibility of choosing the correct power steering only works when the engine
show a recommendation with the gear num-
ber that would be advisable to save fuel.
gear depending on the situation (e.g. over- is running. »
taking, driving up or down a slope or towing a
trailer) lies with the driver.

195
 Operation

WARNING  It lights up yellow ● Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-

es.
If the power steering does not work, you will Electromechanical See a specialised workshop im-
need much more strength to turn the wheel. ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
steering operation mediately and have the steering
This has a considerable effect on vehicle is limited. checked. and in a safe place.
safety. If the yellow warning lamp does
● The power steering only works when the not light up again after the en-
Note
gine is restarted and the vehicle
engine is running.
has travelled a short distance, Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-
● Never allow the vehicle to move when the you do not need to take it to a sponding text messages when they light up
engine is switched off. specialised workshop. may result in damage to the vehicle.
● Never remove the key from the ignition
The 12-volt battery Take the vehicle for a short run
while the vehicle is moving. The steering lock was disconnected at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).
could be engaged and vehicle steering would and has been recon-
not work.
Information relating to different vehi-
nected.
cle processes.
Note  It flashes yellow In order to make the vehicle more difficult to
The ignition of the vehicle being towed must The steering column Turn the wheel a little to both
steal, you should always lock the steering be-
be switched on to prevent the steering wheel is tight. sides. fore leaving the vehicle.
from locking and also to allow the use of the
turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and The steering column Remove the key from the ignition Mechanical steering lock
washers. does not unlock or and switch the ignition back on.
lock. If necessary, check the messag- The steering column is locked when the key
es displayed on the instrument is removed from the ignition lock and the ve-
panel display. hicle is stationary.
Control lamp Do not drive on if the steering
column remains locked after the
ignition has been switched on. Activating the steering lock
The control lamp should light up for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched on. It
Seek specialist assistance. ● Park the vehicle ››› page 179.
should go out once the engine is started. ● Remove the ignition key.
WARNING
● Turn the steering wheel slightly until the
 It lights up red If the warning lamps and the corresponding steering lock has engaged.
messages are ignored when they light up, the
The electromechani- Have the steering checked im- vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci-
cal steering is dam- mediately by a specialised work-
dents and severe injuries.
aged. shop.

196
 Driving

Deactivating the steering lock Run-in and economical driving Running in tyres and brake pads

Technical data
● Turn the steering wheel slightly to release
New tyres should be run in carefully for the
the lock. Running in a new engine
first 500 km (300 miles) and new brake pads
● Insert the key in the ignition lock.
The engine needs to be run-in over the first should be run in carefully for the first 200 km
● Hold the steering wheel in this position (125 miles).
1500 km (900 miles).
and switch on the ignition.
During the first 200 km (125 miles) you have
For the first 1,000 kilometres (600 miles) to compensate for the reduced braking effect
Electromechanical steering
by applying more pressure to the brake ped-

Advice
– Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3
In vehicles with electromechanical steering, the maximum speed. al. In case of a sharp braking, the braking
the assisted steering function automatically distance will be longer with new brake pads
adjusts according to vehicle speed, steering – Do not accelerate hard. than with brake pads which have been run-
wheel torque and wheel orientation. The – Avoid high engine revolutions. in.
power steering only works when the engine
– Do not tow a trailer.

Operation
is running. WARNING
You should take into account that you will ● At first, new tyres do not give maximum
From 1,000 kilometres (600 miles) to 1,500
need considerably more power than normal grip, and require running-in. This may cause
kilometres (900 miles) an accident. Drive particularly carefully in the
to steer the vehicle if the power steering is
not working correctly or at all. – Speeds can be gradually increased to the first 500 km (300 miles).
maximum road speed or maximum permis- ● New brake pads must be “run in” and do

Emergencies
Power-assisted steering sible engine speed (rpm). not have the correct friction properties during
the first 200 km (125 miles). However, the re-
Power-assisted steering helps the driver in During its first few hours of running, the in- duced braking capacity may be compensated
critical situations. In counter-steering, it as- ternal friction in the engine is greater than by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder.
sists by applying additional torque ››› . later on, when all the moving parts have bed-
ded in.
WARNING
For the sake of the environment
Environmental compatibility
Power-assisted steering, together with the

Safety
ESC, helps the driver to control vehicle steer- If the engine is run in gently, its life will be in- Environmental protection is a top priority in
ing in critical situations. However, the driver creased and its oil consumption reduced. the design, choice of materials and manufac-
is ultimately responsible for steering the ve- ture of your new SEAT. »
hicle at all times. Power-assisted steering
does not remove this responsibility.

197
 Operation

Constructive measures to encourage recy- ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. ber of active cylinders can be seen on the in-
cling ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- strument panel display. ›››  page 38.
● Joints and connections designed for easy tems.
dismantling. Drive anticipating the traffic situation
● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
● Modular construction to facilitate disman- dues (RDF). A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.
tling. ● Improvement in the quality of waste water.
When you anticipate situations, you have to
brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If
● Increased use of single-grade materials. ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear
● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, engaged, for example, if you see a red light
accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and etc.). ahead. The braking effect achieved in this
ISO 1629. ● The use of water-soluble paints. way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and
tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are
Choice of materials reduced to zero (disconnection due to iner-
● Use of recycled materials. Economical and environmentally- tia).
● Use of compatible plastics in the same part friendly driving
Change gear early to save energy
if its components are not easily separated.
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution An effective way of saving fuel is to change
● Use of recycled materials and/or materials
and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- up quickly through the gears. Running the
originating from renewable sources.
pends in large part on your driving style. By engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses
● Reduction of volatile components, includ- adopting an economical driving style and an- an unnecessary amount of fuel.
ing odour, in plastic materials. ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
Manual gearbox: shift up from first to second
● Use of CFC-free coolants. easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.
gear as soon as possible. We recommend
Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu-
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions that, whenever possible, you change to a
tion while saving money are listed below.
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa- the “recommended gear” indication that ap-
Active cylinder management (ACT®)*
valent chromium. pears on the instrument panel ››› page 195.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the active
cylinder management (ACT®) may automati- Avoid driving at high speed
Manufacturing methods
cally deactivate some of the engine cylinders
● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the We advise you not to drive at the top speed
if the driving situation does not require too
protective wax for cavities. permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,
much power. When it is switched off, no fuel
● Use of plastic film as protection during ve- is injected into these cylinders, hence total
hicle transport. fuel consumption may be reduced. The num-
198
 Driving

exhaust emissions and noise levels all in- Avoid short journeys A roof rack is often left in place for the sake

Technical data
crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving To reduce the consumption and emission of of convenience, even when it is no longer
at moderate speeds will help to save fuel. polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the needed. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph)
exhaust gas filtration systems should reach and 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use
Avoid idling the optimum operating temperature. about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra
wind resistance caused by the roof rack even
It is worthwhile switching off the engine With the engine cold, fuel consumption is when it is not in use.
when waiting in a traffic jam, at level cross- proportionally higher. The engine does not
ings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. warm up and fuel consumption does not nor-
The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is Save electricity

Advice
malise until having driven approximately four
greater than the amount of fuel needed to re- kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recom- The engine activates the alternator, which
start the engine. mend avoiding short trips whenever possi- produces electricity. With the need for elec-
ble. tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be-
The engine takes a long time to warm up
cause of this, always turn off electrical devi-
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-
ces when you do not need them. Examples of
tant emissions are also especially high dur- Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Operation
devices that use a lot of electricity are: the
ing this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ad- blower at high speeds, the rear window heat-
best to drive off immediately after starting equate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pres- ing or the seat heaters*.
the engine. Avoid running the engine at high sure is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too
speed. low, fuel consumption can increase by as Note
much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resist-
Periodic maintenance ● If your vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not rec-
ance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear

Emergencies
ommended that you switch this function off.
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, wear and impairs handling.
● It is recommended that you close the win-
before beginning a journey, you will not con- The tyre pressures should always be checked dows when driving at more than 60 km/h
sume more than the required amount of fuel. when the tyres are cold. (37 mph).
A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit
Do not use winter tyres all year round as they ● Do not drive with your foot resting on the
of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-
increase fuel consumption by up to 10%. clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the
mum reliability and an enhanced resale val-
plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can
ue.
burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious

Safety
Avoid unnecessary weight
A badly serviced engine can consume up to fault.
10% more fuel than necessary. Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- ● Do not hold the car on a hill with the clutch,
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable use the foot brake or hand brake, using the
to always check the luggage compartment to latter to start. The fuel consumption will be »
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
ing transported.
199
 Operation

lower and you will prevent the clutch plate Catalytic converter For the sake of the environment
from being damaged.
To maintain the useful life of the catalytic Even when the emission control system is
● On descents, use the engine brake, chang- working perfectly, there may be a smell of
ing to the gear that is more suitable for the converter
sulphur from the exhaust gas under some
slope. Fuel consumption will be “zero” and – Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en- conditions. This depends on the sulphur con-
the brakes will not suffer. gines, as lead damages the catalytic con- tent of the fuel used. Quite often the problem
verter. can be solved by changing to another brand
of fuel.
– Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
Engine management and emis- – For engine oil changes, do not replenish
sion control system with too much engine oil ››› page 277, Top- Diesel particulate filter
ping up engine oil.
3 Applies to vehicles with diesel engine
Introduction – Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump
leads if necessary ›››  page 71. The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates
WARNING most of the soot from the exhaust gas sys-
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or tem. Under normal driving conditions, the fil-
● Because of the high temperatures which
loss of power when the vehicle is moving, re- ter cleans itself. The diesel particulate filter is
can occur in the exhaust purification system
duce speed immediately and have the vehi- cleaned automatically without need for indi-
(catalytic converter or diesel particulate fil-
cle inspected at the nearest specialised cation by the warning lamp . This may be
ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex-
haust can come into contact with flammable
workshop. In general, the exhaust warning noticed because the engine idle speed in-
materials under the car (e.g. on grass or at lamp will light up when any of the described creases and an odour may be detected.
the forest edge). Fire hazard! symptoms occur ››› page 121. If this hap-
If automatic filter purification cannot be car-
● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
pens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust sys-
ried out (because only short trips are taken,
around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
tem and escape into the environment. The
for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-
hazard! catalytic converter can also be damaged by
ter and the Diesel particulate filter warning
overheating.
lamp will  switch on.
Note CAUTION Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-
While the control lamps , ,  or  re- Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- ess by driving in the following manner: drive
main lit, there may be engine problems, fuel cause the irregularity of the fuel supply may for approximately 15 minutes at a minimum
consumption may increase and the engine cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or 5th gear
may lose power. fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could (automatic gearbox: gear S). Maintain the en-
cause overheating and damage the catalytic gine speed at approximately 2,000 rpm. The
converter. rise in temperature causes the soot on the
200
 Driving

filter to burn. On completion of the cleaning The control lamp  lights up: Driving tips

Technical data
the warning lamp will switch off. If the warn- If a fault has developed during driving which
ing lamp does not switch off, go immediately has reduced the quality of the exhaust gas Driving abroad
to a specialised workshop to rectify the prob- (e.g. lambda probe fault). Reduce speed and
lem. drive carefully to the nearest specialised To drive abroad, the following must be taken
workshop to have the engine checked. into consideration:

Engine management*  ● For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter

ensure that unleaded petrol is available for

Advice
Engine pre-heating/fault system* 
This warning lamp monitors the engine man- the journey. See chapter ››› page 269, Fuel.
agement system for petrol engines. The warning lamp lights up to show that the Automobile organisations will have informa-
glow plugs are preheating the diesel engine. tion about service station networks selling
The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Con-
unleaded fuel.
trol) lights up when the ignition is switched
on while system operation is being verified. It The control lamp  lights up ● In some countries, it is possible that your

Operation
should go out once the engine is started. car model is not sold, and therefore some
If the control lamp  lights up when the en-
spare parts are not available or the technical
If there is a fault in the electronic engine gine is started it means that the glow plugs
services may only be able to carry out limited
management system while you are driving, are preheating. The engine can be started
repairs.
this warning lamp will light up. Take the vehi- straight away when the lamp switches off.
cle to a specialised workshop as soon as SEAT importers and distributors will gladly
possible and have the engine checked. Control lamp  flashes provide information about the technical prep-

Emergencies
If a fault develops in the engine management aration that your vehicle requires and also
system while you are driving, the glow plug about necessary maintenance and repair
Emission control system*  system lamp will flash . Take the vehicle to possibilities.
a specialised workshop as soon as possible
Control lamp  flashes: and have the engine checked. Adhesive strips for headlights
When there is misfiring that can damage the In countries where vehicles drive on the other
catalytic converter. Reduce speed and drive side of the road to your home country, the

Safety
carefully to the nearest specialised workshop asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle drivers
to have the engine checked. of oncoming vehicles. »

201
 Operation

To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers

to certain parts of the headlight lenses. Fur-
Note Driver assistance systems
● Check the depth of the water before enter-
ther information is available at any Technical
Service.
ing the flooded zone. Start-Stop System*
● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, or
stop the engine in any situation. Related video
● Note that vehicles travelling in the opposite
Driving on flooded roads
direction may splash water that could exceed
To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv- the maximum permitted water height for your
vehicle.
ing through water, for example, along a floo-
ded road, please observe the following: ● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-
sion).
● The water should never come above the
lower edge of the bodywork. Fig. 183 Convenience

● Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNING Description and operation

After driving through water, mud, sludge, The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and re-
etc., the braking effect can be delayed slight-
duce CO2 emissions.
ly due to moisture build-up on the discs and
brake pads. Applying the brakes carefully In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-
several times will remove the moisture and cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is
restore the full braking effect. stopping; for example when stopping at traf-
fic lights. The ignition remains switched on
CAUTION during the stopping phase. The engine auto-
matically switches back on when required. In
● Driving through flooded areas may severely
damage vehicle components such as the en-
gine, transmission, running gear or electrical
system.
● Whenever driving through water, the Start-
Stop system* must be switched off
››› page 202.

202
 Driver assistance systems

this situation, the light of the manner, there is a greater risk of accidents Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Technical data
START ENGINE STOP button stays on1). and serious injury. – Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a
As soon as the ignition is switched on, the ● Never remove the key from the ignition if stop and keep the brake pedal pressed
Start-Stop function is automatically activa- the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the steer- down with your foot. The engine will switch
ted. ing could lock making it impossible to steer off. The warning lamp  will appear in the
the vehicle. display. The engine may stop before the ve-
Further information about the Start-Stop sys- ● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- hicle comes to a halt in the deceleration
tem can be found in the Easy Connect Stop system is switched off when working in phase (at 7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on
system: by pressing the  button in the the engine compartment ››› page 205. the vehicle’s gearbox).

Advice
Vehicle status menu.
– When you take your foot off the brake pedal
Basic requirements for the Start-Stop mode CAUTION the engine will start up again. The warning
The Start-Stop system must always be lamp will switch off.
● The driver door must be closed.
switched off when driving through flooded
● The driver must have their seat belt fas- areas ››› page 205. Additional information related to the auto-

Operation
tened. matic gearbox
● The bonnet must be closed. The engine stops when the selector lever is in
● The engine must have reached a minimum Stopping/Starting the engine the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to
service temperature. when in manual mode. With the selector lev-
Vehicles with a manual gearbox er in position P, the engine will also remain
● The reverse gear must not be engaged.
switched off when you take your foot off the

Emergencies
● The vehicle must not be on a very steep – Before stopping the vehicle or when it is
brake pedal. In order to start the engine up
slope. stopped, put it into neutral and release the again the accelerator must be pressed, or an-
clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The other gear engaged or the brake released.
WARNING warning lamp  will appear on the instru-
ment panel display. The engine may stop If the selector lever is placed in position R
● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- during the stopping phase, the engine will
before the vehicle comes to a halt in the
cle is stationary. The brake servo and power deceleration phase (at 7 km/h). start up again.
steering functions will not be completely cov-
Change from position D to P to prevent the

Safety
ered under warranty. More force may also be – When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-
needed to turn the steering wheel or to brake. gine will start up again. The warning lamp engine from accidentally starting when
As you cannot steer and brake in the normal will switch off. changing and passing by position R. »

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.

203
 Operation

Additional information about vehicles with The engine does not switch off ● The interior temperature differs from the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Before the stopping phase, the system veri- value selected on the air conditioner.
In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will fies whether certain conditions are met. The ● Defrost function button activated
start up again in certain operating conditions engine does not switch off, in the following ›››  page 51.
if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle situations for example: ● The brake has been pressed several times
ahead drives off again. consecutively.
● The engine has not yet reached the mini-
mum required temperature for the Start-Stop ● The battery is too low.
Note
mode. ● High power consumption.
● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you
can control whether the engine should switch ● The interior temperature selected for the air
conditioner has not yet been reached. Note
off or not by reducing or increasing the brake
force applied. While the vehicle remains stop- ● The interior temperature is very high/low. In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if the
ped, the engine will not stop if the brake ped- selector lever is placed in position D, N or S
● Defrost function button activated
al is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with fre- after engaging reverse gear, the vehicle must
quent stopping and starting for example. As ›››  page 51. be driven at a speed faster than 10 km/h (6
soon as strong pressure is applied to the ● The parking aid* is switched on. mph) for the system to return to conditions in
brake pedal, the engine will stop. ● The battery is very low. which the engine can be stopped.
● In vehicles with manual gearbox, during
● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-
the stopping phases the brake pedal must re-
main depressed to prevent the vehicle from ing turned.
moving. ● If there is a danger of misting.
● If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with man- ● After engaging reverse gear.
ual gearbox, it can be directly started up ● In case of a very steep gradient.
again by immediately pressing the clutch
pedal. The indication  is shown on the instrument
panel display, and in addition, the driver in-
formation system* shows, .
General notes
The engine starts by itself
The system can interrupt the Start-Stop mode
During a stopping phase the normal Start-
frequently for different reasons.
Stop mode can be interrupted in the follow-
ing situations: The engine restarts by itself
without involvement from the driver.
204
 Driver assistance systems

Manually switching on/off the Start- Driver messages on the instrument Cruise control system (CCS)*

Technical data
Stop system panel display
How it works
Start-Stop system deactivated.
Start the engine manually
This driver message is displayed when cer-
tain conditions are not met during the stop-
ping phase and the Start-Stop system cannot

Advice
restart the engine. The engine must be star-
ted manually.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Func-

tion not available
Fig. 184 Centre console: Start-Stop system There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take

Operation
button.
the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault
repaired.
If you do not wish to use the system, you can
switch it off manually.
Fig. 185 Instrument panel display: CCS status
● To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop indications.
system, press the  button ››› Fig. 184.

Emergencies
Read the additional information carefully
The symbol on the  button remains lit up ›››  page 45
yellow when the system is switched off, and
the following message is displayed on the The cruise control system (CCS) is able to
dash panel: maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15
mph).
Start-Stop system deactivated
The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas-
ing to accelerate, not by actively braking the

Safety
Note
vehicle ››› . »
The system is automatically switched on each
time the engine is deliberately stopped dur-
ing a stopping phase. The engine will start
automatically.

205
 Operation

Control lamp to drive at a constant speed maintaining the Operating the cruise control system*
safety distance.
 Lights up
● Do not use the cruise control in heavy traf-
Read the additional information carefully
The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and ac- fic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is ›››  page 45
tive. insufficient, on steep roads, with several The value indicated in the table in brackets
bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, (in mph, miles per hour) only refers to instru-
OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) is switch-
ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads. ment panels with indications in miles.
ed on and active.
● Never use the CCS when driving off-road or
OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active. on unpaved roads. Changing gear in CCS mode
● Always adapt your speed and the distance
Several warning and control lamps light up The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch
to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,
for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- pedal is pressed, intervening again automati-
weather conditions, the condition of the road
ed on, signalling that the function is being and the traffic situation.
cally after a gear is engaged.
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
● To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise
onds. Travelling down hills with the CCS
control system, turn it off every time you fin-
ish using it. When travelling down hills the CCS cannot
Displayed on the CCS screen maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle
● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is
Status Fig. 185: too high for the prevailing road, traffic or down using the brake pedal and reduce
weather conditions. gears if required.
A CCS temporarily switched off. The set
● When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot
speed is displayed in small or darkened Automatic off
maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends
figures. to accelerate under its own weight. Select a The cruise control system (CCS) is switched
B System error. Contact a specialised work- lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the off automatically or temporarily:
shop. vehicle.
C CCS switched on. The speed memory is ● If the system detects a fault that could af-
empty. WARNING fect the working order of the CCS.
● If you press and maintain the accelerator
D The CCS is switched on. The set speed is Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
displayed in large figures. symbols on page 122. pedal for a certain time, driving faster than
the stored speed.
WARNING ● If the dynamic driving control systems in-
Use of the cruise control could cause acci- tervene (e.g. ASR or ESC).
dents and severe injuries if it is not possible ● If the brake pedal is pressed.
● If the airbag is triggered.
206
 Driver assistance systems

● If the gear lever of the DSG® dual clutch Speed limiter Warning and control lamp

Technical data
gearbox is removed from the D/S position.
 Lights up green
Display messages and warning and
WARNING The speed limiter is switched on and active.
control lamp
After use, always switch off the speed limiter
to prevent the speed being regulated against  Flashes green
your wishes.
● The speed limiter does not relieve the driv- The speed set by the speed limiter has been exceeded.
er of their responsibility to drive at the appro-

Advice
priate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not  Lights up
necessary.
The adaptive cruise control (ACC) and the speed limiter
● Using the speed limiter with adverse
are active.
weather conditions is dangerous and can
cause serious accidents, e.g. because of
Some warning and control lamps will light up
aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. You

Operation
briefly when the ignition is switched on to
should use the speed limiter function only
when traffic, road and weather conditions al- Fig. 186 On the instrument panel display: check certain functions. They will switch off
low it to be used safely. messages on the status of the speed limiter. after a few seconds.
● When driving downhill, the speed limiter
The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a WARNING
cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed will
increase due to its own weight. In this case, speed individually programmed upwards of After use, always switch off the speed limiter

Emergencies
select a lower gear or use the foot brake to approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving in to prevent the speed being regulated against
slow the vehicle. forwards gears ››› your wishes.
● The speed limiter does not relieve the driv-
Display messages on the speed limiter er of their responsibility to drive at the appro-
Status ››› Fig. 186: priate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not
necessary.
A The speed limiter is active. The last
● Using the speed limiter with adverse
speed set is displayed in large figures.

Safety
weather conditions is dangerous and can
B The speed limiter is not active. The last cause serious accidents, e.g. because of
speed set is displayed in small or dark- aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. You
ened figures. should use the speed limiter function only
C The speed limiter is switched off. The to- when traffic, road and weather conditions al-
tal mileage is displayed. low it to be used safely. »
207
 Operation

● When driving downhill, the speed limiter Note or the adaptive cruise control will automati-
cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed will ● Different versions of the instrument panel
cally switch themselves on when the ignition
increase due to its own weight. In this case, is back on. However, no speed will be stored.
are available and therefore the versions and
select a lower gear or use the foot brake to The last set speed of the speed limiter will be
instructions on the display may vary.
slow the vehicle. stored.
● If when switching the ignition off, the
cruise control system (CCS), the adaptive
WARNING cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter were
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning switched on, then the cruise control system
symbols on page 122.

Operate the speed limiter

Fig. 187 On the left of the steering column: Fig. 188 On the left of the steering column:
control and buttons to operate the speed lim- third lever for operating the speed limiter.
iter.

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 187

Function Effect
or the third lever ››› Fig. 188
Move controller 1 to position  and press button 2 of the turn signal The system switches on. The last set speed of the speed lim-
Switching on the speed limiter
lever or move the third lever forward and press button 2 . iter is stored. It does not take effect yet.

208
 Driver assistance systems

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 187

Technical data
Function Effect
or the third lever ››› Fig. 188
Switching between the speed limiter and
cruise control (CCS) or the adaptive cruise It switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or the
Press button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 2 on the third lever
control (ACC) (with the speed limiter adaptive cruise control (ACC).
switched on)

The current speed is stored as the maximum speed and the

Activating the speed limiter Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or button  1 on the third lever.
limiter is switched on.

Advice
Temporarily switching off the speed limit- Place control 1 of the turn signal lever in position  or move the third The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be
er limitation lever into position . stored.

Temporarily switch off the speed limiter The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be
Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. to over-
limitation pressing down the accelerator stored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after return-
take). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off temporarily.
(kick-down) ing to less than the set speed.

Operation
Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into posi- The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as the speed
Switching the speed limiter on again
tion . you are driving at is lower than the speed set as maximum.

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the  area or move
the third lever into position  to increase the speed in small incre-
ments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

Emergencies
Press  on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of
Increasing the set speed of the limiter The speed is limited to the set value
10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the area  or hold
down  to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph)
and set it.

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the  area or press
 1 on the third lever to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h

Safety
(1 mph) and set it.

Press  on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of

Reducing the set speed of the limiter The speed is limited to the set value
10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down button 3 on the turn signal lever in the  area or hold
down  to reduce the speed continuously in increments of 10 km/h
(5 mph) and set it. »
209
 Operation

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 187

Function Effect
or the third lever ››› Fig. 188
Move control 1 of the turn signal lever into position  or the third lever
Switching off the speed limiter The system switches off.
into position .

The values shown in the table in brackets, in Switch the speed limiter off temporarily by stops pressing the accelerator at some point
mph, are displayed only in instrument panels pressing down the accelerator (kick-down) or consciously switches off the system.
with indications in miles. If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick-
down) and the set speed is exceeded be-
Going down slopes with the speed limiter cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is
If the set speed of the speed limiter is excee- temporarily disabled. Emergency brake assist system
ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards To confirm it being switched off an acoustic (Front Assist)*
the warning and control lamps  signal sound once. While the limiter is off,
››› page 207 flash and an acoustic warning the warning and control lamp  flashes. Topic introduction
may sound. In this case, use the foot brake to
slow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low- When the accelerator is no longer pressed
er gear. down and the speed is reduced below the set
value, the limiter switches on again. The con-
Switching off temporarily trol lamp  will light up and remain lit.
If you wish to temporarily switch off the
Automatic off
speed limiter, e.g. to overtake, move control
››› Fig. 187 1 of the turn signal lever into po- The speed limiter is automatically switched
sition  or the third lever into pressure off:
point  or press button 2 on any lever.
● If the system detects a fault that could neg-
After overtaking, the speed limiter can be atively affect the working order of the limiter.
Fig. 189 On the instrument panel display:
switched on with the previously set speed by ● If the airbag is triggered. pre-warning messages.
pressing button 3 on the turn signal lever in
the area  or by moving the third lever in- CAUTION The objective of the emergency brake assist
to pressure point.
For automatic switching off due to system system is to prevent head-on collisions
failures, for security reasons, the limiter is against objects that may be in the vehicle’s
only completely switched off when the driver path or minimise the consequences of such
impacts.
210
 Driver assistance systems

Within the limitations imposed by the envi- The timing of the warning varies depending enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it

Technical data
ronmental conditions and by the system it- on driver behaviour and the traffic situation. will automatically increase the braking effect.
self, the function acts in staggered fashion,
Due to certain driving circumstances and the
depending on how critical the situation is. In- Advance warning
limitations of its operation, there are some
itially it warns the driver, and if the driver’s
If the system detects a possible collision with cases in which the system cannot prevent a
reaction does not occur or is insufficient, it
the vehicle in front, it may alert the driver by collision, although it can significantly mini-
activates an independent emergency brak-
means of an audible warning and an indica- mise the consequences by reducing the
ing.
tion on the instrument panel display speed and the force of the impact.
››› Fig. 189.

Advice
The function is intended to prevent collisions
with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same WARNING
The warning moment varies depending on
lane travelling in the same direction, or with Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At
pedestrians crossing the vehicle’s path. It symbols on page 122.
the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a
may fail to activate in other danger situa-
possible emergency braking ››› .
tions.
WARNING

Operation
The Front Assist function is active within a Critical warning
The Front Assist system cannot change the
range of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) If the driver fails to react to the pre-warning laws of physics or replace the driver in terms
and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending on (advance warning), the system may actively of keeping control of the vehicle and reacting
speed, traffic conditions and driver behav- intervene in the brakes and generate a brief to a possible emergency situation.
iour, some of the sub-functions described be- jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger
low are omitted in order to optimise the sys-

Emergencies
of a collision. WARNING
tem’s general behaviour.
Following a Front Assist emergency warning,
The Front Assist is a driving assistance func- Automatic braking
pay immediate attention to the situation and
tion that can never replace the driver’s atten- If the driver also fails to react to the critical try to avoid the collision by braking or by
tion. warning, the system may initiate independ- dodging the obstacle, as applicable.
ent emergency braking by progressively in- ● If the Front Assist does not work as descri-
Safety distance warning creasing the braking effect in accordance bed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly inter-
If the system detects a situation of danger with how critical the situation is. venes unnecessarily), switch it off.

Safety
because the vehicle is too close to the vehi- ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
cle ahead, it will warn the driver by means of Driver emergency brake assist system vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi-
an indication on the instrument panel display Faced with an imminent collision, the system bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
. may detect that the driver is not braking hard ● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-
dents and serious injuries. »
211
 Operation

● In complex driving situations, occasionally ● If the Front Assist does not work as descri- cally be available again. The message will
the Front Assist may issue warnings and in- bed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes several disappear from the instrument panel display.
tervene in braking unnecessarily, for example times unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the Front Assist operation may be affected by a
at traffic islands. system checked by a specialised workshop.
strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-
● If the operation of the Front Assist is im- SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.
cur, for example, in a closed car park or due
paired, for example, by dirt or because the ra- to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails
dar sensor has lost its settings, the system on the road or sheets used in road works).
may issue unnecessary warnings and inter- Radar sensor
vene inopportunely in the braking. The area in front of and around the radar sen-
● The Front Assist does not react to animals sor should not be covered with adhesives,
or vehicles crossing your path or approaching additional or similar headlights, as this may
head-on down the same lane. negatively affect Front Assist operation.
● The Front Assist does not react to pedes- If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-
trians walking in the same direction or ap- paired or structural modifications are made
proaching head-on down the same lane. to it, for example if the suspension is low-
● The driver must always be ready to take ered, Front Assist operation may be affected.
over the control of the vehicle. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
for this purpose.
Note
Fig. 190 On the front bumper: radar sensor. CAUTION
● When the Front Assist is connected, the in-
dications on the instrument panel screen may If you have the sensation that the radar sen-
be concealed by warnings from other func- A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis-
tions, such as an incoming call. er to determine the traffic situation connect the Front Assist. This will avoid pos-
● When the Front Assist causes a braking,
››› Fig. 190 1 . sible dangerous situations caused by a sys-
tem malfunction. If this occurs have it adjus-
the brake pedal is “harder”. The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired ted.
● Automatic interventions by the Front Assist by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-
● The sensor may become damaged or lose
on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, the
its settings when knocked, for example, dur-
the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel. Front Assist does not work. The instrument ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-
● The Front Assist may brake the vehicle until panel displays the following message: mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.
it stops completely. However, the brake sys- Front Assist: No sensor vision! If
tem does not halt the vehicle permanently. necessary clean the radar sensor ››› .
Use the foot brake!
When the radar sensor begins to operate
properly again, the Front Assist will automati-
212
 Driver assistance systems

● Repairs to the radar sensor require special- When the Front Assist is switched off, so too The system will store the setting for the next

Technical data
ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom- are the advance warning function (pre warn- time the ignition is switched on.
mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur- ing) and the distance warning.
SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warning
pose.
SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al- function switched on at all times.
● A registration plate or plate holder on the ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 214,
front that is larger than the space for the reg- Depending on the infotainment system in-
Switching the Front Assist off temporarily in
istration plate, or a registration plate that is stalled in the vehicle, the advance warning
the following situations.
curved or warped can cause the radar to mal- function may be adjusted as follows:
function.

Advice
Switching the Front Assist on and off ● Advance
● Clean away the snow with a brush and the
ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer With the ignition switched on, the Front As- ● Medium
spray. sist can be switched on and off as follows: ● Delayed
● Select the corresponding menu option us- ● Deactivated
ing the button for the driver assistance sys-
Operating the Emergency braking as- tems ›››  page 37. SEAT recommends driving with the function

Operation
sistance system (Front Assist) ● OR: switch the system on and off in Easy in “Medium” mode.
Connect using the  button and the
SETTINGS and Driver assistance function but- Switching distance warning on and off
tons ›››  page 34. If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle
in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will
When Front Assist is switched off, the instru-

Emergencies
appear on the instrument panel display
ment panel will inform that it has been
. In this case, increase the safe dis-
switched off with the following indicator 
tance.
››› Fig. 191.
The distance warning can be switched on and
Activating or deactivating the pre-warning off in the Easy Connect system using the
(advance warning)  button and the SETTINGS and
Driver assistance function buttons
The pre-warning function (advance warning)

Safety
Fig. 191 On the instrument panel display: ›››  page 34.
Front Assist switched off message. can be switched on or off in the Easy Connect
system with the  button and the SETTINGS The system will store the setting for the next
The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- and Driver assistance function buttons time the ignition is switched on.
tion is switched on. ›››  page 34. SEAT recommends keeping the distance
warning switched on at all times.
213
 Operation

Switching the Front Assist off tempo- The following conditions may cause the Front ● Special loads and accessories of other ve-
rarily in the following situations Assist not to react or to do so too late: hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards
● In the first few instants of driving after or over the top.
In the following situations the Front Assist switching on the ignition, due to the system’s
should be deactivated due to the system's initial auto-calibration.
limitations:
● On taking tight bends or complex paths. Adaptive Cruise Control ACC*
● When the vehicle is to be towed. ● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.
● If the vehicle is on a test bed. ● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- Related video
● When the radar sensor is damaged. aged.
● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for ● If the ASR has been disconnected or the
example in a rear collision. ESC activated in Sport mode manually
● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
››› page 183.
● If the ESC is controlling.
● If the radar sensor is covered temporarily
with some kind of accessory, such as an ad- ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- Fig. 192 Safety
ditional headlight or the like. trically connected trailer are damaged.
● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, ● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
ferry or train. ● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the Introduction
road or sheets used in road works.
● If the vehicle is reversing.
System limitations ● If the vehicle over-accelerates.
The Front Assist has certain physical limita- ● In case of snow or heavy rain.
tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certain ● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-
circumstances, some of the system's reac- bikes.
tions may be inopportune from the driver's ● Misaligned vehicles.
standpoint. So pay attention in order to inter-
vene if necessary. ● Vehicles crossing the other's path.
● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-
tion. Fig. 193 Detection area.

214
 Driver assistance systems

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an exten- In this case, the instrument panel screen will ● If you are driving using the spare wheel,

Technical data
sion of the normal cruise control system warn you to intervene by applying the brake the ACC function could automatically switch
(CCS) ››› . and a warning tone will be heard off during your journey. Switch off the system
The ACC function allows the driver to program
››› page 216. when starting off.
a cruise speed of between 30 and 210 km/h ● If the vehicle continues to move involuntar-
WARNING ily after a driver intervention prompt, brake
(18 and 150 mph) and to select the distance
required with regard to the vehicle in front. The intelligent technology in the ACC cannot the vehicle by applying the pedal.
overcome the system's inherent limitations ● If the dash panel displays a driver interven-
The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruise speed or change the laws of physics. If used negli- tion prompt, adjust the distance yourself.

Advice
at all times, maintaining a safe distance with gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious ● The driver should be ready to accelerate or
the vehicle in front based on its speed. accidents and injuries. The system is not a re- brake by him/herself at all times.
placement for driver awareness.
When driving behind another vehicle, the
ACC function reduces speed until it is the ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- CAUTION
same as that of the vehicle ahead and main-
bility, weather, road and traffic conditions. If you have the sensation that the radar sen-

Operation
tains the set distance between the vehicles.
If the vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptive ● Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad, sor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. This will
on steep roads, with several bends or in slip- avoid possible damage. If this occurs have it
cruise control also accelerates, going no
pery circumstances such as snow, ice, rain or adjusted.
higher than the target speed programmed.
loose gravel, or on flooded roads. ● Repairs to the radar sensor require special-
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic ● Never use the ACC when driving off-road or ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-
gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until on unpaved roads. The ACC has been de- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-

Emergencies
it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it signed for use on paved roads only. pose.
stops.
● The ACC does not react on approaching a
The distance programmed should be in- fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic Note
creased when the road surface is wet. jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stopped ● If the ACC system does not work as descri-
at the traffic lights.
bed in this chapter, do not use it until it has
Driver intervention prompt ● The ACC only reacts to people if a pedes- been checked by a specialised workshop.
trian monitoring system is available. In addi- SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
During driving, the ACC is subject to certain

Safety
tion, the system does not react to animals or for this purpose.
limitations inherent in the system. In other vehicles crossing your path or approaching
words, in certain circumstances the driver will ● Maximum speed with the ACC activated is
have to adjust speed him or herself, as well
head-on down the same lane.
limited to 210 km/h (150 mph). »
● If the ACC does not reduce speed sufficient-
as the distance from other vehicles.
ly, brake the vehicle immediately by applying
the pedal.
215
 Operation

1 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not active

● When the ACC is switched on, strange
and is not regulating your speed.
 The ACC is active.
noises may be heard during automatic
braking cause by the braking system. No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed speed
2 Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is
remains constant.
not active and is not regulating your dis-
tance.
If the symbol is white: the ACC is ac-
Indications on the display, warning 3 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active and  tive.
and control lamps is regulating your speed.
4 Distance level 2 set by the driver. A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjusts
speed and distance from the vehicle in front.
5 ACC is active and is regulating your dis-
tance based on speed.
If the symbol is grey: ACC is inactive
 (Standby)
Symbols on the instrument panel display
and control lamps. The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.
››› in Warning symbols on page 122.
 It lights up green:
The speed reduction by the ACC to
The ACC is active.
 maintain the distance from the vehi-
cle in front is not sufficient. Some warning and control lamps will light up
Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt. briefly when the ignition is switched on to
check certain functions. They will switch off
after a few seconds.
 The ACC is not currently available. a)
With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine and WARNING
start it up again. Check the radar sensor visually Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warning
››› Fig. 195 (for dirt, ice or knocks). If it is still unavaila- symbols on page 122.
ble, refer to a specialised workshop to have the system
inspected.
Note
Fig. 194 On the instrument panel display: (A) a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour display is in
ACC inactive (Standby). (B) ACC active. colour. When the ACC is connected, the indications
on the instrument panel screen may be con-
Status display cealed by warnings from other functions,
such as an incoming call.
Indications on the display ››› Fig. 194:
216
 Driver assistance systems

Radar sensor presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the Operating the Adaptive Cruise Control

Technical data
road or sheets used in road works). ACC
The area in front of and around the radar sen-
sor should not be covered with adhesives,
additional or similar headlights, as this may
negatively affect ACC operation.
If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-
paired or structural modifications are made

Advice
to it, for example, if the suspension is low-
ered, ACC operation may be affected. In this
scenario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT
dealership.
Fig. 195 On the front bumper: radar sensor.
Fig. 196 On the left of the steering column:
CAUTION

Operation
A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise
er to determine the traffic situation If you have the sensation that the radar sen- Control.
››› Fig. 195 1 . sor is damaged or has lost its settings, dis-
connect the ACC. This will avoid possible
The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.
by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- ● The sensor may become damaged or lose
fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the its settings when knocked, for example, dur-

Emergencies
adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work. ing a parking manoeuvre. This may compro-
The instrument panel displays the following mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.
message: ACC: No sensor vision! If
● Repairs to the radar sensor require special-
necessary clean the radar sensor ››› .
ist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recom-
When the radar sensor begins to operate mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this pur-
properly again, the ACC will automatically be pose.
available again. The message on the instru- ● Clean away the snow with a brush and the
Fig. 197 On the left of the steering column:

Safety
ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer
third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise
will be reactivated again. spray.
Control.
ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-
dar reverse reflection. This may occur, for ex- When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is
ample, in a closed car park or due to the connected, the green control lamp  will
light up on the instrument panel, and the »
217
 Operation

programmed speed and ACC status will be Any modification to the programmed speed When the ACC function is active, the vehicle
displayed ››› Fig. 194. will be shown on the bottom left part of the travels at a set speed and distance from the
instrument panel display ››› Fig. 194. vehicle ahead. Both speed and distance can
What ACC settings are possible? be changed at any time.
● Setting your speed ››› page 218. Setting your distance level
To increase/reduce the distance level, press Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC
● Setting your distance ››› page 218.
the rocker switch towards the left/right To disconnect the ACC move the lever to the
● Connecting and activating the ACC
››› Fig. 197 A . 0 position ››› Fig. 196 (engaged). An ACC
››› page 218. deactivated message appears and the
● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC The instrument panel display shows the mod-
function is totally deactivated.
››› page 218. ification of the distance level. There are 5 dis-
tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom- If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just
● Adjusting the default distance level at the mends level 3. The set distance can be to switch it temporarily to inactive mode
start of your journey ››› page 218. changed when the vehicle is stopped or dur- (Standby), move the third lever to position 3
● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 219. ing driving, as you like ››› . ››› Fig. 196 or press the brake pedal.
● Conditions in which the ACC does not react It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby)
››› page 219. Connecting and activating the ACC
if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door
To connect and activate the ACC, the position is opened.
Setting speed of the gearbox selector lever, the vehicle
To set your speed, move the third lever loca- speed and the position of the third level of Adjusting the default distance level at the
ted in position 1 upwards or downwards un- the ACC must all be taken into account. start of your journey.
til the desired speed is shown on the instru- ● With a manual gearbox, the gearbox selec- In wet road conditions, you should always set
ment panel display. The speed adjustment is tor lever must be in any gear except first, and a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in
made at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals. speed must be greater than approximately 30 front than when driving in dry conditions.
Once you are driving, if you wish to set the km/h. With an automatic gearbox, the gear- The following distances can be preselected:
current speed as the vehicle’s cruise speed box selector lever must be in position D or S.
and activate the ACC, press the  button ● To activate the ACC, with the third lever in ● Very short
››› Fig. 197. If you wish to increase or reduce position 1 press the  button or move the ● Short
speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6 mph), third lever of the ACC to position 2 ● Media
move the lever to position 2 ››› Fig. 196 or ››› Fig. 196. At this point, the image of the
press the  button, respectively. ● Long
ACC on the instrument panel display will
The set speed can be changed when the ve- switch to Active mode ››› Fig. 194. ● Very long
hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like.
218
 Driver assistance systems

In the Easy Connect system you can adjust ● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat  ACC: parking brake applied

Technical data
the distance level that will be applied when belt.
The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is
the ACC is connected using the  button ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- applied. The ACC is available once again after
and the SETTINGS and Driver assistance function trically connected trailer are damaged. the parking brake is released.
buttons ›››  page 34.
● If the vehicle is reversing.
 ACC: currently not available.
Changing the driving profile ● Driving faster than 210 km/h (150 mph). Intervention of stability con-
trol
In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving
Driver messages
profile selected can have an influence on the The message for the driver is displayed when

Advice
ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour  ACC not available the electronic stability control (ESC) inter-
››› page 229. The system can no longer continue to guar- venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically
antee safe vehicle detection and will be de- switched off.
In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-
haviour of the ACC can also be affected by se- activated. The sensor has lost its setting or is  ACC: Take action!
lecting any of the following drive profiles in damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised

Operation
The message for the driver is displayed if,
the Easy Connect system: workshop and have the fault repaired.
when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a
● Normal  ACC and Front Assist: cur- mild slope, the vehicle rolls back even al-
rently not available. No sensor though the ACC is activated. Apply the brake
● Sport
vision to stop the vehicle from moving/colliding
● Eco with another vehicle.
This message will be displayed to the driver if

Emergencies
● Convenience the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for  ACC: speed limit
example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.
In this case, you should access the ACC set- The message for the driver is displayed if, in
Clean the sensor ››› Fig. 195.
tings using the  button and the SETTINGS > vehicles with manual gearbox, the current
Driver assistance > ACC function buttons  ACC: currently not available. speed is too low for the ACC mode.
›››  page 34. Gradient too steep
The speed to be stored must be at least
The maximum road slope has been excee- 30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter
The following conditions may lead the ACC
ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be switches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h

Safety
not to react:
guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched on. (12 mph).
● If the accelerator is pressed.
 ACC: only available in D, S  ACC: available as of the 2nd
● If there is no gear engaged. or M gear »
● If the ESC is controlling.
Select the D/S or M position on the selector
lever.
219
 Operation

The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear braking will have priority over intervention by Function for preventing overtaking in
(manual gearbox). the speed control or adaptive cruise control. an inside lane
 ACC: engine speed ● Always be ready to use the brakes!
● Observe country-specific provisions gov-
The message for the driver is displayed if,
when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the driv- erning obligatory minimum distances be-
tween vehicles.
er does not shift up or down a gear in time,
which means exceeding or not reaching the ● It is dangerous to activate control and re-
permissible engine speed. The ACC switches sume the programmed speed if the road, traf-
itself off. A buzzer warning is heard. fic or weather conditions do not permit this.
Risk of accident!
 ACC: clutch pressed
Vehicles with a manual gearbox: pressing the Note
clutch pedal for longer abandons control ● The programmed speed is erased once the
Fig. 198 On the instrument panel display:
mode. ignition or the ACC are switched off. ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane.
Door open ● When the traction control system (ASR) is
deactivated during acceleration or else the The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a func-
Vehicles with automatic gearbox: the ACC ESC is activated in Sport* Mode tion that helps avoid overtaking while driving
cannot be activated with the vehicle station- (››› page 122), the ACC switches off automati- in inside lanes at certain speeds.
ary and the door open. cally.
● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the
If another vehicle is detected travelling at a
WARNING
engine switches off automatically during the
slower speed in an outer lane, it is displayed
There is a danger of rear collision when the ACC stopping phase and restarts automatical- on the multifunction display ››› Fig. 198.
minimum distance to the vehicle in front is ly to begin driving. To avoid overtaking while driving in an inside
exceeded and the speed difference between lane the system will gently brake, and in ac-
both vehicles is so great that a speed reduc- cordance with the speed will prevent the car
tion by the ACC will not suffice. In this case
from overtaking. The driver can override this
the brake pedal should be applied immedi-
function at any time by pressing the accelera-
ately.
tor pedal. At low speeds the function is inac-
● The ACC may not be able to detect all situa-
tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or in
tions properly.
city traffic.
● “Stepping” on the accelerator may cause
the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver

220
 Driver assistance systems

Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Con- Note

Technical data
trol ACC temporarily in certain situa- If you do not switch off the ACC in the afore-
tions mentioned situations, you may commit a le-
gal offence.
In the following situations the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) should be deactivated
due to the system's limitations ››› :
Special driving situations
● When changing lanes, on tight bends and

Advice
roundabouts, in acceleration and decelera-
tion lanes on motorways or in sections with
road works to prevent involuntary accelera-
tion to reach the programmed speed.
● When going through a tunnel, as operation
could be affected.

Operation
● On roads with several lanes, when other ve- Fig. 200 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One
hicles are driving more slowly in the overtak- vehicle turning and another stationary.
ing lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be
overtaken on the right. The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has certain
physical limitations inherent in the system.
● In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the
For example, certain reactions of the ACC, in

Emergencies
vehicle in front might not be detected proper- certain circumstances, may be unexpected or
ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be come late from the driver's point of view. So
detected at all. pay attention in order to intervene if necessa-
Fig. 199 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy- ry.
WARNING clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor.
For example, the following traffic situations
If the ACC does not switch off in the situa-
tions described, serious accidents and inju-
call for the utmost attention:

Safety
ries may occur.
Starting driving after a stopping phase (only
● Always switch off the ACC in critical situa-
vehicles with automatic gearbox)
tions.
After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin
driving automatically when the vehicle in
front drives off ››› . »
221
 Operation

When the ACC halts the vehicle (e.g. traffic Driving through a bend Other vehicles changing lanes
jam), the instrument panel display shows the On entering or exiting bends, the radar sen- Vehicles changing lanes a short distance
ACC ready to start message. If the ve- sor may no longer determine the vehicle in away from your own can only be detected
hicle ahead drives off again, the ACC will also front or react to a vehicle in the adjacent lane when they are within range of the sensors.
do so automatically. ››› Fig. 199 A. In these situations the vehicle Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re-
If the vehicle ahead does not drive off again, may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to re- act ››› Fig. 200 C. In these cases, you should
the vehicle can be kept indefinitely in the act to the vehicle in front. In this case, the brake as necessary.
ACC ready to start status by operating driver has to intervene by accelerating or in-
the third lever repeatedly towards position terrupting the braking process by applying Stationary vehicles
2 ››› Fig. 196 or by pressing the brake pedal. the brake or pushing the third lever back-
The ACC does not detect stationary objects
If the Press the brake message is shown wards ››› page 217.
while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged
on the instrument panel, press the brake. If vehicles.
you do not, an acoustic warning will be heard Driving in tunnels
and the ACC will switch to inactive mode If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or
When driving through tunnels the radar sen-
(Standby). At this point, the vehicle may be- moves over and there is a stationary vehicle
sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-
gin to move towards the stopped vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to it
nels.
ahead ››› . ››› Fig. 200 D. In these cases, you should
brake as necessary.
Narrow or misaligned vehicles
Overtaking
The radar sensor can only detect narrow or Vehicles driving in the opposite direction
When the turn signal lights up before the ve- misaligned vehicles when they are within and vehicles crossing your path
hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the range ››› Fig. 199 B. This applies particularly
ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically The ACC does not react to vehicles approach-
to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In
and thus reduces the distance from the vehi- ing from the opposite direction or vehicles
these cases, you should brake as necessary.
cle in front. crossing your path.

When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane, Vehicles with special loads and accessories
Metal objects
if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in Special loads and accessories of other vehi-
front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro- Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets
cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or
grammed speed and maintains it. used in road works, can confuse the radar
over the top may be out of the ACC's range.
sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly.
System acceleration can be interrupted at Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi-
any time by pressing the brake or moving the cles with special loads and accessories or
third lever backwards ››› page 217. when overtaking them. In these cases, you
should brake as necessary.
222
 Driver assistance systems

Factors that may affect how the radar sensor not available remains on for quite a long

Technical data
operates time it means that there is a fault. Contact a
If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis-
heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is iting a SEAT dealership.
deactivated temporarily. The relevant text
message will appear in the dash panel dis- WARNING
play. If necessary, clean the radar sensor If you do not heed the Press the brake
››› Fig. 195. message, the vehicle may initiate an involun-
tary movement and could crash into the vehi-

Advice
When the radar sensor begins to operate cle ahead. In any event, before driving off,
properly again, the ACC will automatically be check that the road is clear. The radar sensor
available again. The message on the instru- may not detect obstacles on the road. This
ment panel screen will switch off and the ACC could cause an accident and serious injuries.
will be reactivated again. If necessary, apply the brake.
ACC operation may be affected by a strong ra-

Operation
dar reverse reflection, for example in a closed
car park.

Trailer mode
When driving with trailer the ACC controls

Emergencies
less dynamically.

Overheated brakes
If the brakes overheat, for example after
abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes,
the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. The
relevant text message will appear in the dash

Safety
panel display. In this case, adaptive cruise
control cannot be activated.
Adaptive cruise control can be reactivated
once brake temperature has cooled suffi-
ciently. The message will disappear from the
instrument panel display. If the message ACC
223
 Operation

Blind spot detector (BSD) with on the instrument panel, and follow any in- detector's functions may be limited or work
structions they may give. incorrectly if other paints are used.
parking assistance (RCTA)*
● The blind spot assistant could react to any
special constructions that might be present Note
Introduction on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high or irreg-
ular dividers. This may cause erroneous warn- If the blind spot detector with parking assis-
The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detect ings. tant does not work as described in this chap-
the traffic situation behind the vehicle. ter, do not use it and contact a specialised
● Never use the blind spot detector with rear
workshop.
The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps cross traffic alert on unpaved roads. The blind
the driver when backing out of a parallel spot detector with rear cross traffic alert has
parking spot and in manoeuvring. been designed for use on paved roads.
● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- Control lamps
The blind spot detector has been developed
roundings.
for driving on paved roads. Control lamp in external rear view mirrors:
● Never use the blind spot detector or the
WARNING parking assistant if the radar sensors are  Lights up
dirty.
The smart technology incorporated into the Lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is activa-
● The external rear view mirror control lamps
blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis- ted and ready to operate.
may have limited functionality due to solar
tance (RCTA) included cannot overcome the
radiation. Lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in
limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only
works within the limits of the system. Acci- the blind spot.
dents and severe injury may occur if the blind CAUTION
spot detection system or the rear cross traffic  Flashes
● The radar sensors on the rear bumper may
alert are used negligently or involuntarily.
be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli- The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the
The system is not a replacement for driver
sion, for example, when entering or exiting a blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in the
awareness.
parking space. This may result in the system direction of the detected vehicle ››› .
● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the disconnecting itself, or at least possibly hav-
vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- ing its functionality diminished. Some warning and control lamps will light up
bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.
● In order to ensure that the radar sensors briefly when the ignition is switched on to
● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times work properly, keep the rear bumper free of check certain functions. They will switch off
to be ready to intervene in the steering at any snow and ice and do not cover it. after a few seconds.
time.
● The rear bumper should only be painted
● Pay attention to the control lamps that may If there are no indications from the control
with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind spot
come on in the external rear view mirrors and lamp in the external rear view mirror, this

224
 Driver assistance systems

means that the blind spot detector has not Blind spot detector (BSD)

Technical data
detected any other vehicles in the area ››› .
If the dipped beam is on, then the control
lamps in the external rear view mirrors will be
dimmed (night mode).

WARNING
If the warning lamps and the corresponding

Advice
messages are ignored when they light up, the
vehicle may stall in traffic and cause acci-
dents and severe injuries. Fig. 202 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sen-
sor zones.
● Never ignore the warning lamps or messag-
es.
The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to
● Carry out the necessary operations.
monitor the areas behind the vehicle

Operation
››› Fig. 202. The system does this by measur-
CAUTION ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles
and its speed differential. The blind spot de-
Failure to heed the control lamps and corre-
sponding text messages when they light up tector will not work at speeds of less than ap-
may result in damage to the vehicle. prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses opti-
cal signals in the external rear view mirrors to

Emergencies
notify the driver.
Fig. 201 In the exterior mirrors: indication of
the blind spot detector. Indication in the external rear view mirrors
The control lamp (expanded view) provides
an indication in the corresponding external
mirror ››› Fig. 201 regarding the traffic situa-
tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be

Safety
critical. The control lamp of the left-hand ex-
ternal mirror indicates the traffic situation to
the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of
the right-hand external mirror indicates the
traffic situation to the right of the vehicle. »
225
 Operation

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or the outside ››› Fig. 202. The sensors monitor there are any), and can also detect stationary
windows with tinted film, the indications of both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- objects such as dividers, and thus give an in-
the external mirrors may not be seen clearly hicle ››› Fig. 203, ››› Fig. 204. The range to the correct indication.
or correctly. sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than the
width of a lane.
Keep the external mirrors clean and free of
snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad- The lane width is not detected individually,
hesives or other similar materials. but is rather pre-configured in the system.
Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-
Radar sensors tween two lanes, the indications may be in-
correct. Furthermore, the system can detect
The radar sensors are located on the left and
vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if
right of the bumper and are not visible from

226
 Driver assistance systems

Driving situations

Technical data
Fig. 203 Schematic diagram:  Passing sit-

Advice
uation with traffic behind the vehicle.  Indi-
cation from the blind spot detector in the left-
hand external mirror.

Operation
Fig. 204 Schematic diagram:  Situation of
passing and then moving into the right-hand

Emergencies
lane.  Indication from the blind spot detec-
tor in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will ing at a considerably higher speed, no indi- Physical limitations inherent to the system
be displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 203 cation will be displayed. In some situations the blind spot detector
 (arrow) or ››› Fig. 204  (arrow): may not interpret the traffic situation correct-
The faster the vehicle approaches, the sooner
● When being overtaken by another vehicle an indication will be displayed in the external ly. E.g. in the following situations:

Safety
››› Fig. 203 . mirror, because the blind spot detector takes ● on tight bends;
● When overtaking another vehicle into account the speed differential with other
● in the case of lanes with different widths;
››› Fig. 204  with a speed differential of ap- vehicles. Thus even though the distance from
the other vehicle is identical, the indication ● at the top of slopes;
prox. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is pass-
will appear sooner in some cases and later in ● in adverse weather conditions; »
others.
227
 Operation

● in the case of special constructions to the If the system detects that someone else on cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-
side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di- the road is approaching the rear of the vehi- onds.
viders. cle ››› Fig. 205, an acoustic alarm is heard.
You can interrupt the automatic braking by
In addition to the acoustic alarm, if the vehi- stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or the
cle is equipped with the park assist system, brake pedal in order to regain control of the
Parking assistant (RCTA) the driver is also informed by means of a vis- vehicle.
ual signal on the radio screen. This signal is
displayed in the form of a red strip at the WARNING
back of the image of the vehicle on the radio The smart technology incorporated into the
screen. This strip displays the side of the ve- rear cross traffic alert cannot overcome the
hicle towards which traffic is approaching. 1) limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only
works within the limits of the system. The
Automatic braking to reduce damages parking assistant function should not tempt
you into taking any risks. The system is not a
If the rear cross traffic alert detects that
replacement for driver awareness.
someone else on the road is approaching the
● The system should never be used in limited
rear of the vehicle and the driver does not
step on the brake, the system will engage the visibility conditions or complicated traffic,
e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossing
brakes automatically.
multiple lanes.
Fig. 205 Schematic representation of the rear The parking system helps the driver by auto- ● Be sure to always be aware of the vehicle's
cross traffic alert: zone monitored around the matically engaging the brakes to reduce any surroundings, since the system often fails to
vehicle exiting the parking space. damage. The system will brake automatically detect things such as bicycles or pedestrians.
if the vehicle is reversing at a speed of ap- ● The rear cross traffic alert itself will not
The parking assistant uses the radar sensors proximately 1-12 km (1-7 mph). Once it has
on the rear bumper ››› Fig. 202 to monitor the brake the vehicle to a complete stop.
detected that the vehicle has stopped, the
traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs system will keep the vehicle stopped for ap-
out of a parallel parking space or as it is be- prox. 2 seconds.
ing manoeuvred, for example in very low visi-
bility conditions. After automatically braking to reduce dam-
age, the system will not be able to automati-

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with

a parking system.
228
 Driver assistance systems

Using the blind spot detector (BSD) Automatic deactivation of the blind spot de- SEAT Drive Profile*

Technical data
with parking assistant (RCTA) tector (BSD)
The radar sensors of the blind spot detector Introduction
Activating and deactivating the blind spot with rear cross traffic alert will be automati-
detector (BSD) with parking assistant (RCTA) cally deactivated when, among other rea- SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to
The blind spot detector with parking assis- sons, one of the sensors is detected to be choose between four profiles or modes, Nor-
tant can be switched on and off by accessing permanently covered. This may be the case if, mal, Sport, Eco and Individual, that
the Assistance systems menu on the for example, there is a layer of snow or ice in modify the behaviour of various vehicle func-
front of one of the sensors. tions, providing different driving experiences.

Advice
dash panel display using the steering wheel
controls. If the vehicle is equipped with a The relevant text message will appear in the The Individual profile can be configured
multifunction camera, it can also be ac- dash panel display. according to personal preferences. The other
cessed by means of the driver assistance sys- profiles are fixed.
tems key located on the main beam head- Trailer mode
light lever.
The Blind spot detector and the rear cross

Operation
Open the Assistants menu. traffic alert will be automatically deactivated Description
●  Blind spot and it will be impossible to activate them if
the tow hitch is electrically connected to a Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-
●  Exit Assist trailer or other similar object. hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the
following functions:
If the verification box on the control panel is As soon as the driver starts to drive with a

Emergencies
checked , the functionality will be automat- trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a Engine
ically activated at ignition. message will appear on the instrument panel
display indicating that the blind spot detec- Depending on the profile selected, the en-
When the blind spot detector is ready to op- gine responds more spontaneously or more
tor and the rear cross traffic alert are deacti-
erate, the indications in the external mirrors in harmony with the movements of the accel-
vated. Once the trailer has been unhitched
will turn on briefly as confirmation. erator. Additionally, when Eco mode is selec-
from the vehicle, if you want to use the blind
When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- spot detector and the rear cross traffic alert, ted, the Start-stop function is automatically
ment in the system will remain active. you will have to reactivate them in the corre- activated.

Safety
If the blind spot detector was automatically sponding menu. In vehicles with automatic transmission, the
deactivated, it will only be possible to restart If the towing hitch is not factory equipped, gear change points are modified to position
the system after turning the vehicle off and then the blind spot detector and the rear them in lower or higher engine speed ranges. »
restarting it. cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated
manually when driving with a trailer.
229
 Operation

Additionally, the Eco mode activates the In- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Driving pro-
ertia function, enabling consumption to be Characteristics
According to the active driving profile, the ac- file
further reduced. celeration gradient of the adaptive cruise
Offers a balanced driving experience,
In manual gearbox vehicles, Eco mode cau- control varies. Normal
suitable for everyday use.
ses the gear change recommendation indica-
tions that appear on the instrument panel to Provides a complete dynamic per-
Sport formance in the vehicle, enabling the
vary, facilitating more efficient driving. Setting driving mode user a more sporty driving style.

“Dual Ride” suspension Places the vehicle in a particularly low

state of consumption, facilitating a
The “Dual Ride” suspension features a com- Eco
fuel-saving driving style that is re-
fortable suspension in the Eco and Normal spectful to the environment.
profiles, suitable for daily use. Contrasting
with this it features a sporty suspension in Enables some configurations to be
the Sport profile, suitable for a sporty driv- modified by pressing the Profile
Individual settings button. The functions that
ing style. In the Individual profile the sus- can be adjusted depend on the
pension can be switched between Normal or equipment fitted in the vehicle.
Sport, depending on personal preference.
In the event of a fault in the “Dual Ride” sus- WARNING
Fig. 206 Next to the gearbox lever: MODE but-
pension, the following message is displayed When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay atten-
ton.
on the instrument panel screen Fault: tion to all traffic: doing otherwise could cause
damping setting. an accident.
You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco
and Individual.
Address
You can select the required mode either by Note
Power steering becomes more robust in
repeatedly pressing the button MODE ● When the vehicle is switched off it will al-
Sport mode to enable a sportier driving
››› Fig. 206, or on the touch screen, in the ways store the driving profile that was selec-
style. ted when the ignition key was removed. Nev-
menu that opens when the above button is
pressed. ertheless, when the engine is restarted, the
Air conditioning engine and the gear will not restart in the set-
An icon on the Easy Connect system display ting selected. For engine and gear to revert to
In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate
informs about the active mode. the desired position, select the correspond-
in eco mode, especially restricting fuel con-
ing drive profile again or press the Easy Con-
sumption. The MODE button light remains lit up yellow
nect system button repeatedly.
when the active mode is different to Normal.
230
 Driver assistance systems

● Your speed and driving style must always Fatigue detection (break rec- ● In some situations, the system may incor-

Technical data
be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu-
conditions.
ommendation)* vre as driver tiredness.
● The eco mode is not available when towing ● No warning is given in the event of the ef-
a trailer. Related video fect called microsleep!
● Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
Kick-down

Advice
Note
The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-
● Fatigue detection has been developed for
celeration to be reached.
Fig. 207 Safety driving on motorways and well paved roads
If the eco* ››› page 230 mode has been se- only.
lected in SEAT Drive Profile*, and the acceler- ● If there is a fault in the system, have it
ator is pressed beyond a hard point, the en- checked by a specialised workshop.

Operation
gine power is automatically controlled to give Introduction
your vehicle maximum acceleration.
The Fatigue detection informs the driver
WARNING when their driving behaviour shows signs of Function and operation
fatigue.
Please note that if the road surface is slip-

Emergencies
pery or wet, the kick-down feature could
WARNING
cause the driving wheels to spin, which could
result in skidding. Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue
detection system tempt you into taking any
risks when driving. Take regular breaks, suffi-
cient in length when making long journeys.
● The driver always assumes the responsibil-
ity of driving to their full capacity.

Safety
● Never drive if you are tired.
● The system does not detect the tiredness of
Fig. 208 On the instrument panel display: fa-
the driver in all circumstances. Consult the in- tigue detection symbol.
formation in the section ››› page 232, System
limitations.
Fatigue detection determines the driving be-
haviour of the driver when starting a journey, »
231
 Operation

making a calculation of tiredness. This is System limitations Park Assist*

constantly compared with the current driving The Fatigue detection has certain limitations
behaviour. If the system detects that the driv- inherent to the system. The following condi- Introduction
er is tired, an audible warning is given with a tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-
sound and an optic warning is shown with a vent it from functioning. The Park Assist system is an additional func-
symbol and complementary message on the tion of ParkPilot ››› page 240 and helps the
instrument panel display ››› Fig. 208. The ● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) driver to:
message on the instrument panel display is ● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- ● find a suitable parking space,
● When cornering
pending on the case, is repeated. The system ● select a parking mode,
stores the last message displayed. ● On roads in poor condition
● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-
The message on the instrument panel display ● In unfavourable weather conditions
dicular and parallel spaces,
can be switched off by pressing the  ● When a sporty driving style is employed
● park driving forwards in suitable perpen-
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the ● In the event of a serious distraction to the dicular spaces,
button  on the multi function steering driver
wheel ›››  page 37. ● exit a parking space driving forwards from
Fatigue detection will be restored when the a parallel space.
The message can be recalled to the instru-
ment panel display using the multifunction vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-
display ›››  page 37. when the ignition is switched off or when the tory radio the front, rear and side areas are
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and represented, and the position of obstacles is
opened the door. shown relative to the vehicle.
Conditions of operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on In the event of slow driving during a long pe- The Park Assist system is subject to certain
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the limitations inherent to the system and its use
around 200 km/h (125 mph). system automatically re-establishes the tired- requires special attention by the driver ››› .
ness calculation. When driving at a faster
Switching on and off speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- WARNING
ted.
Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- The technology used in the park assist sys-
vated in the Easy Connect system with the tem involves a series of limitations inherent
 button and the SETTINGS function button in the actual system and in the use of ultra-
›››  page 34. A mark indicates that the ad- sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should
justment has been activated. never tempt you to take any risk that may

232
 Driver assistance systems

compromise safety. The system is not a re- CAUTION ● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is damaged,

Technical data
placement for driver awareness. ● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic
the area corresponding to that group of sen-
● Any accidental movement of the vehicle sors (front or rear) is deactivated and cannot
sensors do not detect objects such as trailer
could result in serious injury. be activated until the fault is corrected. How-
tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or
ever, you can still use the sensors of the oth-
● Adapt your speed and driving style at all an open (or opening) rear lid, which could
er bumper as per usual. If there is a fault in
times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf- damage the vehicle.
the system, consult a specialist workshop.
fic conditions. ● Retrofitting of certain accessories to the ve- SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership
● Certain surfaces of objects and garments hicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere for this.

Advice
do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- with the operation of the Park Assist system
nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor- and cause damage.
Note
rectly, these objects or people wearing such ● The Park Assist system uses as a reference
clothes. parked vehicles, curbs and other objects. ● In order to guarantee good system opera-
● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected Make sure that the tyres and wheels are not tion, keep the ultrasound sensors of the
by external sound sources. In certain circum- damaged while parking. If necessary, oppor- bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do not
tunely interrupt the parking manoeuvre to cover them with adhesives or other objects.

Operation
stances this may prevent them from detect-
ing people or objects. avoid damaging the vehicle. ● Certain sources of noise, such as rough as-
● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in ● The ultrasound sensors on the bumper may phalt or paving stones and the noise of other
which obstacles and people are not regis- be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli- vehicles can induce the Park Assist system or
tered. sion, for example, when entering or exiting a ParkPilot to give erroneous warnings.
● Monitor the area around the vehicle at all
parking space. ● In order to become familiar with the system

Emergencies
times, since the ultrasound sensors do not ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- and its functions, SEAT recommends that you
detect small children, animals or certain ob- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do not practice operating the Park Assist system in
jects in all situations. apply it directly unless very briefly and al- an area where there is not too much traffic or
ways from a distance of more than 10 cm. in a car park.
● A registration plate or plate holder on the
WARNING
front with larger than the space for the regis-
Quick turns of the steering wheel when park- tration plate, or a registration plate that is
ing or exiting a parking space with Park As- curved or warped can cause:

Safety
sist can cause serious injury.
– false detections,
● Do not hold the steering wheel during ma-
– loss of sensor visibility.
noeuvres to park or exit a parking space until
the system requests it. Doing so disables the – cancellation of the parking manoeuvre or
system during the manoeuvre, resulting in defective parking.
the parking being cancelled.
233
 Operation

Description of the Park Assist system ● The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h uous audible signal is given (object present
(4 mph). at a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.
● The driver takes hold of the steering wheel. When the Park Assist system turns the steer-
● The parking manoeuvre does not end with- ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-
in approximately 6 minutes following activa- strument panel also displays the symbol .
tion of the automatic steering. Keep the brake pedal depressed while the
● There is a fault in the system (the system is symbol remains on the dash panel display to
temporarily unavailable). turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped.
This way, the system will require fewer ma-
● ASR is switched off. noeuvres to complete the parking action.
● ASR or ESC intervene with regulation.
● The driver door is opened. Trailer mode
Fig. 209 In the centre console: button to
The Park Assist system cannot be switched
switch on the Park Assist system. To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that on if the factory-fitted towing bracket
none of these things occur and that the  ››› page 249 is electrically connected to a
The components of the Park Assist system button is pressed again.
are the ultrasonic sensors located in the front trailer.
and rear bumpers, the  button ››› Fig. 209 Special Characteristics
to switch the system on and off and the mes- After changing a wheel
sages on the instrument panel display. The Park Assist system is subject to certain If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops
limitations inherent to the system. For exam- entering and exiting parking spaces correctly,
Prematurely stopping or automatically inter- ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit the circumference of the new wheel may be
rupting the manoeuvres for parking or exit- a parking space on sharp bends. different and the system may need to adapt
ing a parking space While entering or exiting a parking space, a to it. The adaptation is automatic and takes
Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to place during driving. Making turns slowly and
parking or exiting a parking space in any of change between forward and reverse gears in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph]) for a
the following cases: (depending on the case). In successive ma- few minutes may contribute to this adapta-
noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to tion process ››› in Introduction on
● Press the  button. change gears, at the latest, when the contin- page 232.

234
 Driver assistance systems

Selecting a parking mode

Technical data
Fig. 210 Overview of reduced displays for park-

Advice
ing modes:  Parallel parking in reverse.  Per-
pendicular parking in reverse.  Perpendicular
parking forwards.

mode is shown on the instrument panel dis- Action

play ››› Fig. 211. The reduced display of other

Operation
possible parking modes is also shown Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards
››› Fig. 210. If the mode selected by the sys- the side of the road where you are parking. The
instrument panel displays the side correspond-
tem does not correspond to the desired 3.
ing to the road. By default, if the turn signal is
mode, you can select another mode by press- not on, it parks on the right in the direction of
ing the  button ››› Fig. 209. traffic.

Emergencies
Action If necessary, press the  button again to change
to the next parking mode.
The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist 4.
1. Once you have switched to all possible parking
Fig. 211 On the instrument panel display: have to be met ››› page 237.
displaying the Park Assist system with re- modes, if the  button is pressed again, the
Press the  button. system switches off.
duced display.
A control lamp on the  button lights up when Press the  button again to switch the system
Selecting a parking mode with Park Assist 5.
2. the system is switched on. Additionally, the se- back on.

Safety
with prior step in front of the space lected parking mode is shown on the instrument
panel display and the reduced display shows an- Follow the instructions displayed on the instru-
After activating the Park Assist system and 6. ment panel while paying attention to traffic and
other parking mode it can be changed to.
after detecting a parking space, the display drive the vehicle past the parking space. »
on the instrument panel proposes a parking
mode. The Park Assist system selects the
parking mode automatically. The selected
235
 Operation

Special case of perpendicular parking space Action

to park forwards without driving past first
Press the  button once.
Action
A control lamp on the  button lights up when
The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist 3. the system is switched on. Additionally, the se-
1.
have to be met ››› page 237. lected parking mode is shown on the instrument
panel display without reduced display.
Drive forward towards the parking space while
2.
paying attention to traffic and stop the vehicle. Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduction
4.
on page 233.

236
 Driver assistance systems

Park with Park Assist

Technical data
Advice
Fig. 212 On the instrument panel display: paral-
lel parking.  Finding a parking space.  Park-
ing position.  Manoeuvring.

Operation
Fig. 213 On the instrument panel display: per-

Emergencies
pendicular parking.  Finding a parking space.
 Parking position.  Manoeuvring.

Key to Fig. 212 and Fig. 213: Progress bars Necessary conditions to park with Park As-
1 Message to move forwards The progress bar sist
2 Your vehicle ››› Fig. 212 7 and ››› Fig. 213 7 on the For parallel parking For perpendicular
screen of the instrument panel displays the spaces parking spaces
3 Parked vehicle

Safety
relative distance to be covered. The greater
4 Parking space detected the distance, the fuller the progress bar. The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on
5 Message to park When driving forward, the content of the pro- ››› page 183. »
gress bar decreases upwards, and when re-
6 Message to press the brake pedal
versing, it decreases downwards.
7 Progress bar
237
 Operation

For parallel parking For perpendicular Do the following: Do the following:

spaces parking spaces
Please note the following message: Active au- Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous signal
Do not exceed approxi- Do not exceed approxi- tomatic steering. Watch out around is heard.
mately 40 km/h (25 mph) mately 20 km/h (12 mph) you.
OR: go forward until the instrument panel display
when driving past the when driving past the
While you keep watch around you, carefully start 9. shows the message to reverse.
parking space. parking space.
5. accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph).
The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward
Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres when driv-
During the parking manoeuvre, the system only and back until it centres it in the space ››› Fig. 212
ing past the parking space.
takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver,  or ››› Fig. 213 .
Length of the space: Width of the space: width have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessa-
ry, change gears and brake. For best results, wait at the end of each manoeu-
length of the vehicle + of the vehicle + 0.8 me-
vre until the Park Assist system has finished turn-
0.8 metres tres
Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is ing the steering wheel.
Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when heard. 10.
The parking manoeuvre ends when a correspond-
parking.
OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays ing message is displayed on the instrument panel
the message to go forwards ››› Fig. 212  and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.
Parking 6. or ››› Fig. 213 .

OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays Note

Do the following:
the message Park Assist finished.
If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely
The necessary conditions have to be met to park during parking, the result may not be the
The progress bar 7 indicates the distance to
1. with Park Assist ››› page 237 and the parking best.
cover ››› page 237.
mode must be selected ››› page 235.
Press down the brake pedal until the Park Assist
Look at the display on the instrument panel to
system has finished turning the steering wheel.
see if the space has been detected as “appropri- 7.
ate” and if the correct position for parking has OR: until the  symbol on the instrument panel
2. been reached ››› Fig. 212  or ››› Fig. 213 . display switches off.
The space is considered “appropriate” if the dis- 8. Select first gear.
play on the instrument panel shows the message
to park 5 .

Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, engage

3.
the reverse gear.

Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduction

4.
on page 233.
238
 Driver assistance systems

Exiting a parking space with Park As- ● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h
For parallel parking spaces

Technical data
sist (only for parallel spaces) (4 mph) when exiting the parking space.
Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is
Exiting a parking space heard.

Do the following: OR: reverse until the instrument panel display

7.
shows the message to go forward.
For parallel parking spaces The progress bar ››› Fig. 214 3 indicates the dis-
tance to cover ››› page 237.
The necessary conditions to exit a parking space

Advice
1.
with Park Assist have to be met ››› page 239. Press down the brake pedal until the Park Assist
system has finished turning the steering wheel.
2. Switch on the engine ››› page 173. 8.
OR: press down the brake pedal until the  sym-
Press the  button ››› Fig. 209. bol on the instrument panel display switches off.
Fig. 214 On the instrument panel display: ex- 3. A control lamp on the  button lights up when Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous signal

Operation
iting a parallel parking space. the system is switched on. is heard.
Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards OR: go forward until the instrument panel display
Key to the Fig. 214: 9.
4. the road you will enter when exiting the parking shows the message to reverse.
1 Parked vehicle space.
The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward
2 Your vehicle in reverse gear Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever to and back until it can exit the space.
5.
Progress bar to indicate the distance left position R.

Emergencies
3
The vehicle can exit the space when a corre-
to cover Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduction sponding message is displayed on the instru-
4 Message giving the proposed manoeuvre on page 233. ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic sig-
to exit the parking space 10. nal sounds.
Please note the following message: Active
automatic steering. Watch out around Take charge of the steering with the turning an-
Necessary conditions to exit a parking space you. gle set by the Park Assist system.
with Park Assist 6. While you keep watch around you, carefully start Paying attention to the traffic, exit the parking
11.

Safety
● Only for parallel parking spaces accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). space.
● The traction control system (ASR) must be
When exiting the parking space, the system only
turned on ››› page 183. takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver,
● Length of the space: length of the vehicle have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessa-
+ 0.5 metres ry, change gears and brake.

239
 Operation

Automatic braking intervention by WARNING WARNING

Park Assist The automatic braking intervention by Park ● Always pay attention, also when looking
Assist should never tempt you to take any straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle sur-
Park Assist helps the driver by automatically risk that may compromise safety. The system roundings. The assistance systems are not a
braking in certain situations. is not a replacement for driver awareness. replacement for driver awareness. When in-
The driver is always responsible for braking ● The Park Assist system is subject to certain serting or removing the vehicle from a park-
in time ››› . limitations inherent to the system. In certain ing space, or when performing similar ma-
situations, the automatic braking interven- noeuvres the driver always assumes the re-
tion may only work in a limited way or not sponsibility.
Automatic braking intervention to avoid ex-
ceeding the speed limit work at all. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all
● Always be ready to use the brakes yourself! times to suit visibility, weather, road and traf-
To avoid exceeding the speed limit of approx- fic conditions.
imately 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or ● The automatic braking intervention will end
● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots in
leaving a parking space, the brakes may acti- after approximately 1.5 seconds. Following
this, brake the vehicle yourself. which obstacles and people are not regis-
vate automatically. After automatically acti- tered. Pay special attention to children and
vating the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or animals.
exit a parking space may continue. ● Always keep visual control of the vehicle
The brakes are only automatically activated Parking aid (Park Pilot) surroundings: use the mirrors for additional
once for each attempt to enter or exit a park- help.
ing space. If the speed of approximately General information
7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre- CAUTION
sponding operation is halted. Assorted assistance systems – which vary
Parking Aid functions may be negatively af-
depending on the equipment fitted in the car fected by different factors that may lead to
Automatic braking to reduce damages – will help you when parking or manoeu- damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-
Depending on certain conditions, the Park vring. rounds:
Assist system can automatically brake the ve- The rear parking aid is an audible assistant ● Under certain circumstances, the system
hicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly ac- that warns about obstacles located behind does not detect or display certain objects:
tioning and holding down the brake ped- the vehicle ››› page 241. – Objects such as chains, trailer draw bars,
al ››› . Following this the driver must press fences, posts and thin trees.
During parking, Parking System Plus assists
the brake pedal. – Objects that are located above the sen-
the driver by visually and audibly warning
Automatic braking intervention to reduce them about obstacles detected in front and sors, such as protrusions in a wall.
damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- behind the vehicle ››› page 242.
ishing.
240
 Driver assistance systems

– Objects with certain surfaces or struc- – with rough or cobbled floors or ground ● In vehicles without a driver information

Technical data
tures, such as wire mesh fences or with long grass; system, these parameters can be modified in
powder snow. – with external ultrasound sources, such as a SEAT Official Service or in a specialised
● Certain surfaces of objects and garments cleaning vehicles or other vehicles; workshop.
do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- – In downpours, intense snow or dense ex- ● Please observe information on towing a
nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor- haust gases; trailer ››› page 245.
rectly, these objects or people wearing such ● The display on the Easy Connect screen
– or in locations such as the brow of a hill.
clothes. shows a slight time delay.
● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected ● A registration plate or plate holder on the

Advice
by external sound sources. In certain circum- front with larger than the space for the regis-
stances this may prevent them from detect- tration plate, or a registration plate that is
ing people or objects. curved or warped can cause: Rear parking aid*
● Please note that low obstacles detected by – false detections,
The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in
the system may no longer be registered by – loss of sensor visibility,
parking by means of audible warning
the sensors as the car moves closer, so the

Operation
● In order to guarantee good system opera- sounds.
system will not give any further warning. In tion, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, free
certain circumstances, objects such as high of snow or ice, and do not cover them with
kerbs that could damage the bottom of the Description
adhesives or other objects.
vehicle are not detected either. There are sensors integrated in the rear
● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
● If the first warning from the ParkPilot is ig- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, apply bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta-
nored, the vehicle could suffer considerable cle, you are alerted by audible warnings.

Emergencies
it directly only very briefly and always from a
damage. distance of more than 10 cm. Make particularly sure that the sensors are
● The knocks or damage on the radiator ● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle, not covered by adhesives, residues and the
grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle under- such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the like, as this could affect the system's opera-
body can adjust the orientation of the sen- operation of the Parking Aid. tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 263.
sors. This can affect the parking aid function.
● In order to familiarise yourself with the sys-
Have the function checked by a specialised The approximate measurement range of the
workshop. tem, it is advised that you practice parking in
an area or car park that is free from traffic. rear sensors is:

Safety
There must be good weather and light condi-
Note tions. side area 0.60 m

● In certain situations, the system can give a ● The volume and tone of the warnings can central area 1.60 m »
warning even though there is no obstacle in be modified, in addition to the indications
the detected area, e.g: ››› page 244.

241
 Operation

As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- Parking Aid Plus* The approximate measurement range of the
val between the audible warnings will be re- sensors is:
duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
warning will be constant: Do not continue to A 1.20 m
move forward (or backward) ››› in General B 1.60 m
information on page 240, ››› in General in- C 0.90 m
formation on page 240 !
As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-
If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
val between the audible warnings will be re-
the volume of the warning begins to reduce
duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
after four seconds (does not affect the tone
warning will be constant: do not continue to
of the constant warning).
move forward (or backward)!
Activating/Deactivating Fig. 215 Represented area. If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid the volume of the warning begins to reduce
During parking, Parking System Plus assists after four seconds (does not affect the tone
is automatically switched on. This is con-
the driver by visually and audibly warning of the constant warning).
firmed with a short warning.
them about obstacles detected in front of
On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid and behind the vehicle. In order to view the entire periphery of the ve-
system is disconnected immediately. hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few me-
There are ultrasound sensors integrated in tres forwards and backwards. Thus, the miss-
the front and rear bumpers. When they detect ing areas are screened and obstacles at the
an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warn- sides of the vehicle are displayed
ings and visually on the Easy Connect sys- ››› Fig. 215 C .
tem.
In the event of danger of a frontal collision,
the audible warnings come from the front of
the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of
a rear-end collision they come from the rear.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
not covered by adhesives, residues and the
like, as this could affect the system's opera-
tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 263.

242
 Driver assistance systems

Parking Aid operation ● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle A short confirmation signal will be heard and

Technical data
that is in its forwards path at a speed below the button symbol will light up yellow when
10 km/h (6 mph) ››› page 243, Automatic ac- the system is switched on.
tivation. The obstacle is detected as of a dis-
tance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic con-
nection is activated in the infotainment sys- Automatic activation
tem. A reduced display is shown.
● OR: the vehicle moves backwards.

Advice
Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid
● Move the selector lever to position P.
● OR: accelerate to more than approx.
Fig. 216 Centre console: parking aid button.
10 km/h (6 mph) forward.
Manual connection of Parking Aid

Operation
Temporary suppression of sound in Parking
● Press the  button once. The symbol on
Aid
the button will light up yellow.
● Press the  function button on the info- Fig. 217 Miniature indication of automatic ac-
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid tainment system display. tivation.

● Press the  button again.

Emergencies
Change from reduced view to full view When the Parking System Plus is switched on
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
automatically, a miniature of the vehicle will
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid display be displayed and the segments will be
(the audible sounds remain active) lever to position R.
shown on the left side of the screen
● OR: press the car icon in reduced view. ››› Fig. 217.
● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-
tory-assembled infotainment system. Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-
If necessary, switch to the rear-assist image
● OR: Press the  function button in the top proaching an obstacle located in front of the
(Rear View Camera “RVC”)
right corner. vehicle. It only operates every time the speed

Safety
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6
Automatic connection of Parking Aid lever to position R. mph) for the first time.
● OR: Press the RVC function button
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector If the parking aid is switched off using the 
lever to position R. ››› page 248. button, the following actions must be carried
out in order for it to automatically switch on: »
243
 Operation

● Switch off the ignition and switch it on Segments of the visual indication Red segments: obstacles that are less than
again. 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-
● OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be- played in red.
fore reducing speed below this number Moreover, with the SEAT Media System
again. Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi-
● OR: place the selector lever in position P cates the vehicle's expected journey based
and then move it from this position. on the steering wheel angle.
● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa- Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-
tion in the Easy Connect system menu. cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding
audible warning will sound.
The automatic activation with parking aid
miniature indication can be switched on and As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the
off from the Easy Connect system menu Fig. 218 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.
›››  page 34: nect system screen. When the penultimate segment is displayed,
this means that the vehicle has reached the
● Switch the ignition on. The distance of separation from the obstacle collision zone. In the collision zone, the ob-
● Select:  button > Settings > Parking can be estimated using the segments around stacles are represented in red, including
and manoeuvring. the vehicle. those out of the path. Do not continue to
● Select the Automatic activation op- The optical indication of the segments works move forward (or backward) ››› in General
tion. When the function button check box is as follows: information on page 240, ››› in General in-
activated , the function is on. formation on page 240 !
White segments: a white segment is dis-
If the system has been activated automatical- played when the obstacle is not within
ly, an audible sound warning will only be giv- the vehicle's trajectory or the direction
Adjusting the display and audible
en when obstacles in front are at a distance of travel is in the opposite direction to
its location, and it is more than 30 cm
warnings
of less than 50 cm.
from the vehicle.
The settings for the display and audible
CAUTION Yellow segments: obstacles located in the warnings are controlled via the Easy Con-
The automatic connection of the Parking Aid vehicle's trajectory and which are more nect*.
only works when you are driving slowly. If than 30 cm away from the vehicle are
driving style is not adapted to the circum- displayed in yellow. Automatic activation
stances, an accident and serious injury or
damage may be caused.  on – activates the Automatic activa-
tion option ››› page 243.
244
 Driver assistance systems

 off – deactivates the Automatic ac- signal of the existence of a fault will be is- screen and nor will it be indicated by means

Technical data
tivation option ››› page 243. sued. of audible sound signals.
The Easy Connect system screen will only dis-
Front volume* Parking System Plus*
play objects detected at the front, and the ve-
Volume in the front and rear area. If there is a fault in the parking aid system a hicle's trajectory will be hidden.
message will appear on the instrument panel
Front sound settings/sharpness* indicating the error. In addition the  key
LED will blink. Braking while manoeuvring function*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front

Advice
area. If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is 3 Only valid with Parking System Plus
displayed on the Easy Connect display in
Rear volume* front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is The emergency braking function is used to
faulty, only the obstacles in area A are dis- minimise damage in the event of a collision.
Volume in the rear area.
played ››› Fig. 215. If a front sensor is faulty, Depending on the equipment, if the Parking
only the obstacles in area B are displayed. Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring
Rear sound settings/sharpness*

Operation
Have the fault corrected by a specialised function activates emergency braking when it
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear
workshop without delay. detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path that
area.
could cause a collision, driving forwards or in
reverse.
Adjust volume
Towing bracket The function will not brake if the Parking Aid
With the parking aid switched on, the active

Emergencies
is activated automatically. For the system to
audio/video source volume will be reduced In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket operate, manoeuvring speed must be be-
to the intensity of the selected setting. device from the factory, when the trailer is tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6
connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and
sensors will not be activated when reverse 10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.
Error messages gear is engaged, when the selector lever is
turned to position R or when the button  is Following an intervention, the braking while
When the Parking Aid is activated or when it pressed. manoeuvring function will be inactive in the

Safety
is switched on, if a message reporting a Park- same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once
ing aid error is displayed on the instrument the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s
Parking System Plus
panel, there is a fault in the system. position is changed, the function will be ac-
The distance to possible obstacles at the rear tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations ap-
If the fault does not disappear before discon- of the vehicle will not be displayed on the ply. »
necting the ignition, the next time that the
parking aid is engaged in reverse, no audible
245
 Operation

The braking while manoeuvring function is Operating and safety warnings at all times to suit visibility, weather, road
controlled in the Easy Connect system with and traffic conditions.
the  menu and the SETTINGS and WARNING ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by
Park and manoeuvre function buttons.
● The Rear Assist does not make it possible looking at the screen.
●  on – permits the use of the braking to precisely calculate the distance from ob- ● The images on the rear assist screen are
while manoeuvring function. stacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor can it only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spatial
overcome the system's own limits, hence us- depth, protruding parts or holes in the road,
●  off – does not permit the use of the
ing it may cause serious accidents and inju- for example, are more difficult to detect or
braking while manoeuvring function. ries if used negligently or without due care. may not be seen at all.
The driver should be aware of his/her sur- ● Vehicle load modifies the representation of
Temporary suppression of emergency brak- roundings at all times to ensure safe driving. the orientation lines displayed. The width
ing ● The camera lens expands and distorts the represented by the lines diminishes with ve-
● When the function is deactivated with the field of vision and displays the objects on the hicle load. Pay special attention to the vehi-
button that appears
Braking while manoeuvring screen in a different, vague manner. The per- cle's surroundings when the inside of the ve-
on the Parking System screen of the Easy ception of distances is also distorted by this hicle of the luggage compartment is carrying
Connect system. effect. a heavy load.
● Due to the screen resolution or insufficient ● In the following situations, the objects or
● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or
light conditions, some items may be dis- other vehicles shown in the navigation sys-
bonnet are opened. played in an unsatisfactory manner or not at tem display appear to be further away or
all. Take special care with thin posts, fences, closer than they really are: Pay special atten-
railings or trees that might not be displayed tion:
on screen and could damage the vehicle.
Rear Assist “Rear View Cam- – On moving from a horizontal plane to a
● The rear assist has blind spots where it is slope.
era”* not possible to represent people or objects – On moving from a slope to a horizontal
(small children, animals and certain objects plane.
Related video cannot be detected in its field of vision). Mon-
itor the vehicle's surrounding area at all – If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the
times. rear.
● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice and – When the vehicle approaches objects
snow, and do not cover it. that are not on the ground surface or are
jutting out from it. These objects may al-
● The system is not a replacement for driver
so be outside the camera's angle of vi-
awareness. Supervise the parking operation sion when reversing.
at all times, as well as the vehicle's surround-
Fig. 219 Safety
ing area. Adapt your speed and driving style
246
 Driver assistance systems

Note Rear assist settings ● If the position and installation angle of the

Technical data
Rear assist offers the user the possibility to camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-
● It is important to take great care and pay
change the image's brightness, contrast and end collision. Have the system checked by a
special attention if you are not yet familiar
colour settings. specialised workshop.
with the system.
● Rear assist will not be available if the vehi- To change these settings: Familiarising yourself with the system
cle's rear lid is open.
● Park the vehicle in a safe place. To familiarise yourself with the system, the
● Apply the parking brake. orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-
ommends practising parking and manoeu-

Advice
Instructions for use ● Switch the ignition on. vring with the rear assist in a place without
● If necessary, switch on the Infotainment too much traffic or in a car park when there
system. are good weather and visibility conditions.
● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R. Cleaning the camera lens

Operation
● Press the  function button displayed on Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow
the right of the image. and ice:
● Make the desired adjustments on the menu ● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-
by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by based glass cleaning product and clean the
moving the corresponding scroll button. lens with a dry cloth.

Emergencies
● Remove snow using a small brush.
Fig. 220 On the rear lid handle: location of Necessary conditions for parking and ma-
the rear assist camera. noeuvring with the rear assist ● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver The system should not be used in the follow- CAUTION
during reverse parking or manoeuvring ing cases:
● Never use abrasive cleaning products to
››› Fig. 220. The camera image is viewed to- ● If the image displayed is not very reliable or clean the camera lens.
gether with orientation lines projected by the is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice

Safety
system on the Infotainment system screen. lens. or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could
The bottom of the screen displays part of the damage the camera.
● If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-
bumper, which can be used by the driver as a
reference point. played very clearly or is incomplete.
● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.

247
 Operation

Parking and manoeuvring with the ● The camera will stop transmitting images Meaning of the orientation lines
rear assist above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- ››› Fig. 221
verse engaged.
1 Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the
In combination with the Parking System Plus approximate width of the vehicle plus the
››› page 240, the camera image will cease to rear view mirrors) on the road surface.
be transmitted immediately when reverse 2 End of the side lines: the area marked in
gear is disengaged or when the selector lever green ends approximately 2 m behind
is moved from the R position, and the optical the vehicle on the road surface.
information provided by the Parking Aid sys-
3 Intermediate line: indicates a distance of
tem will be displayed.
approximately 1 m behind the vehicle on
Also in combination with the system, the rear the road surface.
assist image can also be concealed: 4 Red horizontal line: indicates a safe dis-
Fig. 221 Display on the Infotainment system ● By pressing one of the Infotainment system tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear
screen: orientation lines. of the vehicle on the road surface.
buttons on the display.
Switching the system on and off ● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that
Parking manoeuvre
appears on the left of the screen (which
● The rear assist will switch on when the igni- ● Place the vehicle in front of the parking
switches to the full-screen mode of the Park-
tion is on or the engine running, on engaging space and engage reverse gear (manual
ing System Plus's optical system).
reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang- gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-
ing the selector lever to the R position (auto- If you wish to display the rear assist image tion (automatic gearbox).
matic gearbox). again: ● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel
● The system switches off 8 seconds after so that the side orientation lines lead to-
● Disengage reverse, or change the selector
disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) wards the parking space.
or removing the selector lever from the R po- lever's position, engage reverse again or
move the selector lever to position R. ● Guide the vehicle into the parking space so
sition (automatic gearbox). The system will
● OR: Press the RVC function button1) that the side orientation lines run parallel to
also disconnect immediately after the igni-
it.
tion is switched off.

1)WARNING: the RVC (Rear View Camera) function

button will only be activated and available when the
reverse gear is engaged or the selector lever is set to
position R.
248
 Towing bracket device

Towing bracket device CAUTION Depending on the country or version, the

Technical data
towing bracket device's detachable ball joint
Handle the detachable ball joint with care in is located:
Towing bracket device* order to avoid damaging the bumper paint-
work. ● underneath the floor panel of the luggage
Introduction compartment.
Note
The ball joint is fitted and removed by hand.
The towing bracket device fitted to your vehi- Towing the vehicle with the detachable ball
cle, be it factory-fitted or a genuine SEAT ac- joint ››› page 102. The towing device bracket is supplied with a

Advice
cessory, meets all the national technical and key.
legal requirements for towing.
Key to ››› Fig. 222
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector Description 1 13-pin connector
for the electrical connection between the
trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip- 2 Safety lug

Operation
ped with a 7-pin connector you can use the 3 Hook housing
corresponding adaptor, which is available as 4 Hook housing cap
a genuine SEAT accessory.
5 Ball protective cover
The maximum authorised towing load is 55
6 Detachable ball
kg.
7 Locking lever

Emergencies
WARNING 8 Lock cover
● Before each journey, make sure that the de- 9 Release bolt
tachable ball joint is properly fitted and se-
10 Lock
cured in its housing.
● If the detachable ball joint is not properly
11 Locking balls
fitted and secured, do not use it. 12 Key
● Do not use the towing bracket device for

Safety
towing if it is damaged or has missing parts. Note
● Do not modify or adapt the towing device Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you
connection. lose your key.
● Never unhook the detachable ball joint
when the trailer is hitched. Fig. 222 Towing bracket device support / de-
tachable ball joint / key.
249
 Operation

Placing in standby position Step 1. Standby position

● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 1 un-
til the part of the key with the holes reaches
the top position ››› Fig. 223 (arrow).

Step 2.
● Grip the detachable ball below the protec-
tive cover.
● Press the release bolt B in the direction of
arrow 2 , and at the same time press lever
C in the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will

Fig. 223 Step 1. go ››› Fig. 224.

The lever will remain blocked in this position.

Fig. 225 Standby position: Position of the lev-

er and the release bolt.

Standby position adjusted properly

Fig. 224 Step 2.
● Key A ››› Fig. 225 is in the released posi-
Before assembling it, place the detachable tion (the part of the key with the holes is fac-
ball in the standby position with the follow- ing upwards).
ing two steps. ● Lever B ››› Fig. 225 is in the bottom posi-
tion.
● The release bolt C ››› Fig. 225 can be
moved.

250
 Towing bracket device

Thus adjusted, the detachable ball is ready ing following the direction of arrow 1 until it Assembling the detachable ball - Step

Technical data
for installation. engages audibly ››› . 2
CAUTION Lever A turns automatically in the direction
of arrow 2 upwards, and the release bolt B
The key cannot be removed or turned in the moves outwards (the red and green part will
standby position.
be visible) ››› .
If lever A does not turn automatically or the
release bolt B does not come out, the de-

Advice
Assembling the detachable ball - Step
tachable ball should be removed by turning
1 the lever as far as possible downwards from
the housing cavity, and the detachable ball's
support surfaces and the cavity should then
be cleaned. Fig. 227 Locking the lock.

Operation
WARNING
● When attaching the detachable ball, keep
your hands well away from the reach of the
lever's rotation to avoid getting your fingers
caught.

Emergencies
● Never try to pull the lever upwards by force
to turn the key. The detachable ball would not
Fig. 226 Fitting the detachable ball / Release be secured properly!
bolt in the deployed position.

Fitting the detachable ball

● Remove the hook housing cap 4 Fig. 228 Placing the cover over the lock.
››› Fig. 222 downwards.
Do not omit this first step ››› page 251, As-

Safety
● Set the detachable ball to its standby posi- sembling the detachable ball - Step 1!
tion ››› page 250.
● Grip the detachable ball from below ● Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 un-
››› Fig. 226 and insert it into the hook hous- til the part of the key with the holes reaches
the bottom position ››› Fig. 227. »
251
 Operation

● Remove the key in the direction of arrow Checking proper attachment ● The towing bracket device should only be
2 . used if the detachable ball has been properly
● Place cover B in the lock in the direction locked!
of arrow 3 ››› Fig. 228 ››› .
● Check that the detachable ball is securely
attached ››› page 252, Checking proper at- Removing the detachable ball - Step 1
tachment.

CAUTION
● After removing the key, always place the
cover over the lever's lock. If the lock be-
comes soiled it will be impossible to insert
the key. Fig. 229 Detachable ball properly attached.

● Keep the towing bracket device's housing

Whenever you go to use the detachable ball,
cavity clean at all times. Dirtiness can pre-
make sure that it is properly attached first.
vent the detachable ball from being properly
secured!
Detachable ball properly attached.
● If the detachable ball is removed, always Fig. 230 Removing the lock cover.
place the cap on the hook's housing. ● The detachable ball will not fall out of the
housing cavity after a major “knock or jerk”.
● Lever A ››› Fig. 229 is fully raised.
● The release bolt B ››› Fig. 229 is sticking
fully out (the red and green part is visible).
● The key has been removed.
● Cover C ››› Fig. 229 is placed over the lock.
WARNING
● When removing the detachable ball, keep
your hands well away from the reach of the Fig. 231 Releasing the lock.
lever's rotation to avoid getting your fingers
caught. ● Remove cover A from the lock in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 230.
252
 Towing bracket device

● Insert key B into the lock in the direction Releasing the detachable ball ● Keep the detachable ball in the standby po-

Technical data
of arrow 2 ››› Fig. 231. ● Grip the detachable ball from below. sition, with the key inserted into the box
● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 3 un- while you place it facing downwards with the
● Press the release bolt A in the direction of
til the part of the key with the holes is facing side opposite to the one where the key is in-
arrow 1 as far as it will go, and at the same serted. The key could get damaged!
upwards. time press lever B in the direction of arrow
● When operating the lever, do not apply too
2 as far as it will go.
WARNING much pressure (for example, do not stand on
In this position, the detachable ball is loose it)!
Never remove the detachable ball joint when
and will fall/drop freely downwards. If this

Advice
the trailer is hitched.
does not occur when you release it, press it Note
with the other hand from above.
Note Remove any dirt from the detachable ball be-
The detachable ball locks into the standby fore you put it away with the vehicle tools.
Before you remove the detachable ball, you
are advised to place the protective cover on
position at the same time and is therefore
the ball coupling. ready to be reinserted into the hook housing

Operation
››› . Operation and care
● Fit the cap 4 ››› Fig. 222 onto its housing. Put the cover on the housing cavity so that
Removing the detachable ball - Step 2 dirt cannot get in.
WARNING
Before hooking up a trailer, always check the
Never leave the detachable ball loose in the

Emergencies
luggage compartment. It could cause damage ball coupling and apply suitable grease if
in the luggage compartment in the case of necessary.
abrupt braking, and even jeopardise passen- Use the protective cover when putting the de-
ger safety! tachable ball away to keep the luggage com-
partment clean.
CAUTION
Remove any dirt from the housing cavity sur-
● If you hold the lever and do not press down faces and use a suitable cleaning product.

Safety
on it as far as you can, after you remove the
detachable ball, the latter will continue up- CAUTION
Fig. 232 Releasing the detachable ball. wards and will not lock into the standby posi-
tion. The detachable ball should be placed in The top part of the hook housing is greased.
Do not omit this first step ››› page 252, Re- this position before the next assembly. Make sure that the grease has not been re-
moving the detachable ball - Step 1! moved.

253
 Operation

Trailer towing duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or Exterior mirrors
part thereof). The gross combination weight Check whether you can see enough of the
is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus
What do you need to bear in mind road behind the trailer with the standard rear
the actual weight of the laden trailer. When vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you
when towing a trailer? possible, operate the trailer with the maxi- should have additional exterior mirrors fitted.
mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on
Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer
of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors
when fitted with the correct equipment.
specified limit. to give sufficient vision to the rear.
If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, con-
The figures for trailer weights and drawbar
sult ››› page 257.
loads that are given on the data plate of the Tow rope
towing bracket are for certification purposes Always use a cable between the vehicle and
Connectors
only. The correct towing bracket figures for the trailer ››› page 255.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector your specific model, which may be lower than
for the electrical connection between the these figures, are given in the vehicle docu- Trailer rear lights
trailer and the vehicle. mentation or on ››› page 291, Technical
specifications. The trailer's rear lights should comply with
If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to the statutory safety regulations ››› page 255.
use an adapter cable. It is available at any
Technical Service. Distributing the load
WARNING
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
Trailer weight/drawbar load objects are as near to the axle as possible. Never transport people in a trailer. This could
result in fatal accidents.
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If Loads carried in the trailer must be secured
you do not load the trailer up to the maxi- to prevent them moving.
Note
mum permitted trailer weight, you can then
climb correspondingly steeper slopes. Tyre pressure ● Towing a trailer places additional demands
The maximum permissible tyre pressure val- on the vehicle. We recommend additional
The maximum trailer weights listed are only services between the normal inspection inter-
ues are shown on the sticker on the rear part
applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above vals if the vehicle is used frequently for tow-
of the left front door frame. Set the tyre pres-
sea level. With increasing altitude the engine ing a trailer.
sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the
power and therefore the vehicle climbing ● Find out whether special regulations apply
trailer manufacturer's recommendations.
ability are impaired because of the reduced to towing a trailer in your country.
air density. The maximum trailer weight has
to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the
vehicle and trailer combination must be re-
254
 Towing bracket device

Hitching and connecting the trailer Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 233: Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Technical data
Pin Meaning Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal, on each side 42 Watts

12 Unassigned
Side lights (total) 100 Watts
13 Earth, pin 9
Rear lights (total) 42 Watts
Electrical socket for trailer
Rear fog light 42 Watts

Advice
The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power
socket for the electrical connection between Never exceed the values indicated!
the trailer and the vehicle. If the system de-
Fig. 233 Schematic diagram: assignment of tects that a trailer has been connected elec- Note
the pins of the trailer's electrical socket. trically, the electrical equipment on the trailer ● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-
will receive voltage through this connection. rectly connected, the vehicle electronics may

Operation
Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 233: Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for be damaged.
example, the trailer's interior lighting. Pin 10 ● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur-
Pin Meaning
is only powered when the engine is running. rent, the vehicle electronics may be dam-
1 Left turn signal The charge wire (pin 10) charges, for exam- aged.
ple, a caravan battery. ● Never connect the trailer's electric system
2 Rear fog light
directly to the electrical connections of the

Emergencies
Pin 9 and 10 should not be connected to tail lights or any other power sources. Only
3 Earth, pins 1, 2, 4 to 8
each other to avoid discharging or damaging use the connections intended for providing
4 Right turn signal the vehicle's battery. electric current to the trailer.
5 Rear light, right The earth wires, pin 3, pin 11 and pin 13,
should never be connected to each other to
6 Brake lights
avoid overloading the electrical system. Ball coupling of towing bracket de-
7 Rear light, left If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you vice*

Safety
8 Reverse lights will need to use an adapter cable. In this case
the function corresponding to pin 10 will not The ball coupling is provided with instruc-
9 Permanent live be available. tions on fitting and removing the ball cou-
pling of the towing bracket. »
10 Cable without positive charge

11 Earth, pin 10
255
 Operation

WARNING Before driving WARNING

The towing bracket ball coupling must be ● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and ● Never use the safety lug to tow!
stored securely in the luggage compartment remove it in the direction of the arrow
● Adjust your speed to suit the road and traf-
to prevent them being flung through the vehi- ››› Fig. 234. fic conditions.
cle and causing injury. ● Remove the protective cover 5 ››› Fig. 222 ● All work on the electrical system must be
upwards. carried out only by specialised workshops.
Note ● Never connect the trailer's electric system
● By law, the ball coupling must be removed
After driving to the electrical connections of the rear lights
if a trailer is not being towed if it obscures ● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and or any other power sources.
the number plate. insert it in the opposite direction to the arrow ● After hooking up the trailer and connecting
››› Fig. 234. the socket, check that all the trailer's rear
● Fit the protective cover 5 ››› Fig. 222 on lights are working properly.
Driving with a trailer the ball coupling.
Note
Safety lug ● If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting,
The safety lug B ››› Fig. 234 is used to hook check the fuses in the instrument panel fuse
up the trailer's retainer cable. box ›››  page 62.
● The contact between the retainer cable and
On hooking it up to the safety lug, the retain-
the safety lug may give rise to mechanical
er cable should have slack in all the trailer
wear in the lug's surface protection. This
positions with respect to the vehicle (sharp
wear will not prevent the safety lug from op-
bends, reverse gear, etc.). erating properly or cause any fault and is ex-
cluded from the warranty.
Headlights ● When connecting and disconnecting the
Fig. 234 Turn the 13-pin connector. The front part of the vehicle may be raised trailer, the towing vehicle's handbrake
when the trailer is connected and the light should be applied.
may dazzle the rest of the traffic.
Adapt the height of the headlights using the
headlight range rotary adjuster1).

1) This does not apply for vehicles with bi-xenon

headlights.
256
 Towing bracket device

Anti-theft alarm Weight distribution Electronic stability control*

Technical data
The weight distribution of a loaded trailer The ESC* system helps to stabilise the trailer
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable. in case of skidding or rocking.
gered when the electrical connection be- However, if this cannot be avoided, drive ex-
tween vehicle and trailer is interrupted. tra slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight
Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system distribution. Retrofitting a towing bracket*
before connecting or disconnecting a trailer
››› page 138. Speed

Advice
The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re-
Conditions for the integration of a trailer in duced with increasing speed. For this reason,
the anti-theft alarm system. it is advisable not to drive at the maximum
● The vehicle is factory-equipped with an an- permissible speed in an unfavourable road,
ti-theft alarm system and a towing bracket weather or wind conditions. This applies es-
device. pecially when driving downhill.

Operation
● The trailer is connected electrically to the You should always reduce speed immediately
towing vehicle by the trailer connector. if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak-
● The electrical system of the vehicle and the ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in-
trailer are prepared for operation. creasing speed.
● The vehicle is locked with the ignition key Always brake in due course. If the trailer has

Emergencies
and the anti-theft alarm system is activated. an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at
first and then, firmly. This will prevent the
CAUTION jerking that can be caused by locking of trail-
For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rear
er wheels. Select a low gear in due course
LED lights are not integrated in the anti-theft before going down a steep downhill. This en-
alarm system. ables you to use the engine braking to slow
down the vehicle.

Safety
Reheating
Driving tips
At very high temperatures and during pro-
Driving with a trailer always requires extra longed slopes, driving in a low gear and high
care. engine speed, always monitor the coolant Fig. 235 Attachment points for towing brack-
temperature gauge ››› page 120. et. »
257
 Operation

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve- ● Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear not recommended for some sportier versions.
hicle is purchased, this must be completed bumper, must be removed and reinstalled. Please consult your Technical Service.
according to the instructions of the towing The towing bracket securing bolts must be
bracket manufacturer. tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow-
er socket must be connected to the vehicle
The attachment points for the towing bracket
electrical system. This requires specialised
A are on the lower part of the vehicle.
knowledge and tools.
The distance between the centre of the ball ● Figures in the illustration show the eleva-
coupling and the ground should never be tion value and the attachment points which
lower than the indicated value, even with a must be considered if you are retrofitting a
fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi- towing bracket.
mum drawbar load.
Elevation values for securing the towing WARNING
bracket: The towing brackets should be fitted at a spe-
cialised workshop.
Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:
● If the towing bracket is incorrectly instal-
B 65 mm (minimum) led, there is a serious danger of accident.
C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle) ● For your own safety, please observe the tow
bracket manufacturer's instructions.
D 1,033 mm

E 322 mm CAUTION
F 338 mm ● If the power socket is incorrectly installed,
this could cause damage to the vehicle elec-
trical system.
Fitting a towing bracket
● Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort
Note
for the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a
towing bracket, please contact a Technical ● SEAT recommends that the towing hooks
Service to check whether your cooling system be fitted at a specialised workshop. Consult
needs modification. your SEAT dealer in case additional modifica-
tions to your vehicle are necessary.
● The legal requirements in your country
● Due to the specific design of the exhaust,
must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa- the fitting of a conventional towing hook is
rate control lamp).
258
 Care and maintenance

Advice Despite a continuous observation of the mar- Technical modifications

Technical data
ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability,
safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has Modifications must always be carried out ac-
Care and maintenance not approved. For this reason, SEAT cannot cording to our specifications. Unauthorised
assume responsibility for any non-genuine modifications to the electronic components
parts used, even if these parts have been ap- or software in the vehicle may cause malfunc-
Accessories and modifications proved by an official testing agency or are tions. Due to the way the electronic compo-
to the vehicle covered by an official approval certificate. nents are linked together in networks, other
indirect systems may be affected by the
Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct

Advice
Accessories, replacement of parts and faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead
impact on the driver's control of the vehicle,
modifications to excessive wear of components, and also
such as a cruise control system or electroni-
invalidate your vehicle registration docu-
cally-controlled suspension, must be ap-
Your vehicle is designed to offer a high ments.
proved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and
standard of active and passive safety. bear the e mark (the European Union's au- SEAT Technical Services cannot be held liable

Operation
Before purchasing accessories and parts, thorisation symbol). for any damage caused by modifications
and before making technical changes to your and/or work incorrectly performed. For this
If any additional electrical devices are fitted
vehicle, we recommend that you consult your reason, we recommend having all work per-
which do not serve to control the vehicle it-
Technical Service. formed by a SEAT Technical Service using
self, such as refrigerator boxes, laptops or
SEAT® Original Spare Parts.
SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide ventilator fans, they must bear the CE mark
you with the latest information about the (European Union manufacturer conformity

Emergencies
WARNING
use, legal requirements and recommenda- declaration).
Any type of work or modification performed
tions from the manufacturer regarding acces-
WARNING incorrectly on your vehicle can lead to mal-
sories and spare parts.
functions and can cause accidents.
We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories, for example telephone holders
or cup holders, should never be fitted on the
Accessories® and SEAT Approved Spare
covers, or within the working range, of the
Parts®. This way, SEAT can guarantee that airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of in- Radio transmitters and office equip-
the product in question is suitable, reliable

Safety
jury if the airbag is triggered in an accident. ment
and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the
necessary experience and facilities to ensure Radio transmitters (fixed installation)
that parts are correctly and professionally in-
stalled. Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters
in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT
generally authorises in-vehicle installations »
259
 Advice

of approved types of radio transmitters provi- Business equipment Care and cleaning
ded that: Retrofit installation of business or private
● The aerial is installed correctly. equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- General notes
ded the equipment cannot interfere with the
● The aerial is installed on the exterior of the
driver's immediate control of the vehicle and Vehicle maintenance
vehicle (and shielded cables are used togeth- that any such equipment carries the  mark.
er with non-reflective aerial trimming). Regular care and washing help to maintain
Any retrofit equipment that could influence the value of the vehicle. This may also be one
● The effective transmitting power does not the driver's control of the vehicle must have a of the requirements for acknowledging war-
exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base. type approval for your vehicle and must carry ranty claims in the event of bodywork corro-
the e mark. sion or paint defects.
A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-
shop will be able to inform you about options WARNING The best way to protect your vehicle against
for installing and operating radio transmitters the harmful effects of the environment is
with a higher transmitting power. Mobile telephones or radio equipment which
through correct maintenance and frequent
is operated inside the vehicle without a prop-
erly installed external aerial can create exces- washing. The longer substances such as in-
Mobile radio transmitters sive magnetic fields that could cause a health sect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree
Commercial mobile telephones or radio hazard. sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or
equipment might interfere with the electron- road salt and other aggressive materials re-
ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. main on the vehicle, the more damage they
Note
This may be due to: do to the paintwork. High temperatures, for
● The posterior fitting of electric and elec- instance in strong sunlight, further intensify
● No external aerial. tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its li- the corrosive effect.
● External aerial incorrectly installed.
cence and could lead to the withdrawal of the
vehicle registration document under certain After winter, a period when salt is put on the
● Transmitting power more than 10 W. circumstances. roads, it is important to have the underside
● Please use the mobile telephone/radio op- of the vehicle washed thoroughly.
You must, therefore, do not operate portable
erating instructions.
mobile telephones or radio equipment inside Products for vehicle maintenance
the vehicle without a properly installed exter-
nal aerial ››› . Car-care products are available in your Tech-
nical Services. Keep the product instructions
Please note also that the maximum range of until you have used them up.
the equipment can only be achieved with an
external aerial.

260
 Care and maintenance

WARNING For the sake of the environment After washing, the brakes could take some

Technical data
time to respond as the brake discs and pads
● Car-care products can be toxic. Because of ● When purchasing car care products, try to
could be wet, or even frozen in winter. “Dry”
this, they must always be kept closed in their select ones that are not harmful to the envi-
the brakes by braking several times.
original container. Keep them out of the reach ronment.
of children. Failure to comply could result in ● The waste from car-care products should
poisoning. WARNING
not be disposed of with ordinary household
● Always read and observe the instructions waste. Observe the disposal information on Water, ice and salt on the brake system can
and warnings on the package before using the package. reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent.

Advice
car-care products. Improper use could cause
health problems or damage the vehicle. The
use of certain products may produce noxious
vapours; they should be used in well ventila- Care of the vehicle exterior Hand-washing
ted areas.
● Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail Automatic car wash tunnel Vehicle washing
varnish remover or other volatile fluids.

Operation
– First soften the dirt and rinse it off with wa-
These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the
fire and explosion. ter.
vehicle can normally be washed without
● Before washing your vehicle, or carrying problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. – Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with
out any maintenance, switch the engine off, However, the paintwork wear depends to a a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Use very
apply the handbrake firmly and remove the large extent on the kind of the car wash tun- light pressure.
key from the ignition.

Emergencies
nel, the brushes used, its water filtering and – Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean
the type of cleaning and preservative prod- water.
CAUTION ucts.
– Special car shampoo should only be used
Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if Before going through a car wash, be sure to for very stubborn dirt.
the surface of the vehicle is dry. Never use a take the usual precautions (close the win-
dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. dows and rear-view mirrors). There is nothing – Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last,
This could damage the paintwork or the win- to note apart from that. using a different sponge or glove.
dows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust

Safety
with plenty of water. If the vehicle has special accessories such as – Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.
spoilers or a roof rack or two-way radio aerial, – Dry the vehicle surface gently with a cha-
etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash mois leather.
tunnel operator first.
– In cold temperature, dry the rubber seals
and their surfaces to prevent them from »
261
 Advice

freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber For the sake of the environment – After washing, avoid sudden and sharp
seals. braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever-
To protect the environment, the vehicle al times ››› page 179.
should be washed only in specially provided
After washing the vehicle
wash bays, to prevent toxic, oil-laden waste
WARNING
– After washing, avoid sudden and sharp water from entering the sewer system. In
braking. “Dry” the brakes by braking sever- some places, washing vehicles outside wash ● Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet
al times. bays is prohibited. (“rotating nozzle”). Even at large spraying
distances and short cleaning times, damage
WARNING can occur to the tyres. This may cause an ac-
Note
cident.
● Wash your vehicle with the ignition switch- Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. ● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can
ed off.
reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
● Protect your hands and arms from cuts on dent.
sharp metal edges when cleaning the under-
body, the inside of the wheel housings etc.
Washing the vehicle with a high pres-
Risk of injury. sure cleaner CAUTION
● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can ● Do not use water hotter than +60°C
Be particularly careful when using a high (+140°F). This could damage the vehicle.
reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent. pressure cleaner!
● To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a suf-
– Always observe the instructions for the ficient distance from sensitive materials such
CAUTION high-pressure cleaner, particularly those as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing ma-
concerning the pressure and the spraying terial, etc. This also applies to bumpers pain-
● Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehi- ted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer
distance.
cle surface is dry. Never use a dry cloth or the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the
sponge for cleaning purposes. This could – Increase the spraying distance for soft ma- wear on the material.
scratch the paintwork or glass on your vehi- terials and painted bumpers.
cle.
– Do not use a high pressure cleaner to re-
● Washing the vehicle in low temperatures:
move ice or snow from windows Factory-fitted adhesive sheets
when washing the vehicle with a hose, do not
direct water into the lock cylinders or the
››› page 263.
gaps around the doors. Risk of freezing. The following indications should be taken in-
– Never use concentrated jet nozzles (“rotat-
to account to avoid damaging adhesive
ing jets”) ››› .
sheets:
● Do not use high pressure cleaners.

262
 Care and maintenance

● Do not use scrapers to remove ice or snow Vehicle paint maintenance CAUTION

Technical data
from the sheets.
Regular waxing protects the paintwork. To prevent damage to the paintwork:
● Do not polish the adhesive sheets.
● Do not use polishes and hard wax on pain-
● Do not use dirty cloths or sponges. You need to apply wax to your vehicle if water ted parts with a matt finish or on plastic
● It is preferable to wash them with a soft does not form small drops and run off the parts.
paintwork when it is clean.
sponge and gentle neutral soap. ● Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or
Good quality hard wax products are available dusty environment.
at your Technical Service.

Advice
Camera sensors and lenses Regular wax applications help to protect the
paintwork from environmental contaminants Caring for plastic parts
● Use a small brush to remove snow and a
››› page 260. It is also effective in protecting
de-icer spray to remove ice. against minor scratches. If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts,
● Clean the sensors with a solvent-free prod- clean them with approved solvent-free plas-
Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the tic cleaning and care products.
uct and a soft, dry cloth.

Operation
vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to pro-
● Moisten the camera lens using a standard tect the paint with a hard wax coating at least CAUTION
alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and twice a year.
clean the lens with a dry cloth. ● The use of liquid air freshener directly over
the air vents of the vehicle may damage the
CAUTION plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spil-
Polishing the paintwork led.

Emergencies
● When you clean the vehicle with a pressure
● Cleaning products which contain solvents
washer: Polishing is only necessary if the paint has will damage the material.
– Stay a suitable distance from the sensors lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be
on the front and rear bumpers. brought back by applying wax. Polishing
– Do not clean the camera lenses or sur- products can be purchased in your Technical
rounding area with the pressure washer. Service. Cleaning of windows and mirrors
● Never use warm or hot water to remove The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if Cleaning windows

Safety
snow and ice from the reverse camera lens, the polish used does not contain wax com-
– Moisten the windows with commercially
as it could crack the lens. pounds to seal the paint ››› page 263, Vehicle
available, alcohol based glass cleaner.
● Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the paint maintenance.
lens. – Dry the windows with a clean chamois
leather or a lint-free cloth. »
263
 Advice

Removing snow ● The heating element for the rear window is Caring for rubber seals will also prevent pre-
– Use a small brush to remove snow from the located on the inner side of the window. To mature ageing and leaks. The doors will be
windows and mirrors. prevent damage, do not put stickers over the easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked
heating elements on the inside of the win- after, they will not freeze so quickly in winter.
dow.
Removing ice
– Use a de-icer spray.
Door lock cylinder
Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry Cleaning windscreen wiper blades
the windows. The chamois leathers used on The door lock cylinders can freeze up in win-
painted surfaces are not suitable to clean Clean wiper blades improve visibility. ter.
windows because they are soiled with wax 1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only
deposits which could smear the windows. from the windscreen wiper blades. use spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive
If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove properties.
2. Use window cleaner to clean the wind-
ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one screen wiper blades. Use a sponge or a
direction only without swinging it. cloth to remove stubborn dirt.
Cleaning chrome parts
Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to
clean rubber, oil, grease and silicone depos- 1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.
its off. Care of rubber seals
2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.
Wax deposits can only be removed with a If rubber seals are well looked after, they will
special cleaner available at your Technical not freeze so quickly. If this does not provide satisfying results, use
Service. Wax deposits on the windscreen a specialist chrome cleaning product.
could cause the wiper blades to judder. Add- 1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt Chrome cleaning products will remove stains
ing a window cleaner that dissolves wax to from the rubber seals. from the surface.
the windscreen washer fluid reservoir pre- 2. Apply a specialist care product to the rub-
vents wiper blades from juddering, but the ber seals. CAUTION
wax deposits are not removed. To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:
The rubber strips on the doors, windows, etc.
● Never use an abrasive cleaning product on
CAUTION will remain pliable and last longer if they are
chrome.
● Never use warm or hot water to remove treated with a suitable rubber care product
● Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a
snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This from time to time (for example silicone
sandy or dusty environment.
could cause the glass to crack! spray).

264
 Care and maintenance

Steel wheel rims Alloy wheels require regular attention to pre- WARNING

Technical data
serve their appearance. If road salt and brake
– Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a dust are not often removed, the aluminium Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion
coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
separate sponge. finish will be impaired.
verter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys-
Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy tem. The heat of the exhaust system or the
dust. Any damage to the paint on steel wheel wheel rims. engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of
fire.
rims should be repaired before starting to Car polish or other abrasive agents should
rust. not be used for maintaining the rims. If the

Advice
protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying
WARNING stones, the damaged area should be re- Cleaning engine compartment
● Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even paired immediately.
Take special care when cleaning the engine
at large spraying distances and short clean-
ing times, damage can occur to the tyres. WARNING compartment.
This may cause an accident.
Observe the safety warnings ››› in Steel

Operation
● Water, ice and salt on the brake system can
Anti-corrosion treatment
wheel rims on page 265.
reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of acci- The engine compartment and the surface of
dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden the power unit are given anti-corrosion treat-
and sharp braking. “Dry” the brakes by brak- ment at the factory.
ing several times ››› page 179, Braking ca- Vehicle underbody protection
pacity and braking distance. Good corrosion protection is particularly im-

Emergencies
The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it portant in winter when the vehicle is fre-
from chemical and mechanical damage. quently driven on salted roads. To prevent
the salt corroding the vehicle, the entire en-
Alloy wheel rims The protective coating can be damaged when
gine compartment should be thoroughly
driving. We recommend that you check the
cleaned before and after winter.
Every two weeks protective coating under the body and on the
– Wash salt and brake dust from alloy running gear, and retouch it if necessary, be- Technical Services have the proper products
wheels. fore and after the winter season. for cleaning and preservation as well as the
necessary workshop equipment. For this rea-

Safety
– Use an acid free detergent to clean the We recommend that you go to your Technical
son, we recommend having this work per-
wheel rims. Service to carry out repair work and addition-
formed by them.
al anti-corrosion work.
The anti-corrosion protection is usually re-
Every 3 months
moved if the engine compartment is cleaned
– Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels. with grease removing solutions, or if you »
265
 Advice

have the engine cleaned. On commissioning ried out only by a specialised workshop or a – If this does not provide satisfactory results,
this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, petrol station. use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning
joints and components in the engine com- product.
partment are given anti-corrosion treatment.
WARNING
WARNING Caring for the vehicle interior Never clean the dash panel and the airbag
● When working in the engine compartment, module surface with cleaners containing sol-
always observe the safety warnings Screen for the radio/Easy Connect* vents. Solvents cause the surface to become
››› page 273. and control panel* porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts
● Before opening the bonnet, switch the en- could become detached and cause injuries.
gine off, apply the handbrake firmly and al- The display can be cleaned with a soft cloth
ways remove the key from the ignition. and a professionally available “LCD cleaner”. CAUTION
● Allow the engine to cool before you clean Moisten the cloth with a small amount of the
Cleaning products which contain solvents will
the engine compartment. cleaning fluid.
damage the material.
● Do not clean, for example, the vehicle un- The Easy Connect control panel* should first
derbody, wheel arches or wheel trims without be cleaned with a brush so that no dirt goes
protecting your hands and arms. You may cut into the device or between the keys and
yourself on sharp-edged metal parts. Failure Cleaning wooden trim*
housing. Next, we recommend cleaning the
to comply could result in injury. Easy Connect control panel* using a cloth – Clean the wooden trim with a water-mois-
● Moisture, ice and salt on the brake system dampened with water and washing-up liquid. tened clean cloth.
may affect braking effectiveness. Risk of acci-
dent. Directly after washing, avoid sudden CAUTION – If this does not provide satisfactory results,
and sharp braking. use a gentle soap solution.
● To avoid scratching the screen, do not wipe
● Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera-
the display with a dry cloth.
ture-controlled and could start automatically, CAUTION
even when the key is removed from the igni- ● To avoid damage, ensure that no liquid
goes into the Easy Connect control panel*. Cleaning products which contain solvents will
tion! damage the material.

For the sake of the environment

Cleaning plastic parts and the dash
Fuel, grease and oil deposits can be removed Cleaning textile covers and trim parts
when the engine is washed. The polluted wa-
panel
ter must be cleaned in an oil separator. For Textile covers and trim parts (e.g. seats, door
– Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic
this reason, engine washing should be car- trim) should be cleaned regularly with a
parts and the dash panel.
266
 Care and maintenance

vacuum cleaner. This will remove surface dirt and then dab the stain with an absorbent tablespoons diluted in one litre of water)

Technical data
which could otherwise be rubbed into the cloth. and a cloth.
textile material during use. Do not use steam
Remove chocolate or make-up stains with a – Do not let the water soak through the leath-
cleaners, as the steam could carry the dirt
cleaning paste (for e.g., soft soap). Then re- er or soak into the seams.
deeper into the textile material.
move the soap with water (wet sponge).
– Then wipe off with a soft, dry cloth.
Normal cleaning A spirit-based cleaner can be used to remove
grease, oil, lipstick or ball point pen. Then Leather maintenance
We recommend that you use a soft sponge or
dab the dissolved grease or colour particles – The leather should be treated twice a year
a commercially available lint-free, micro-fibre

Advice
off with an absorbent cloth or similar. You
cloth for normal cleaning. Only use brushes with a special leather-care product, availa-
may also have to treat the stain once more
on floor coverings and mats, as other textile ble at Technical Services.
using washing paste and water.
surfaces could become damaged. – Apply these products very sparingly.
If the covers or textile trim panels are badly
In the case of normal surface dirt you can use – Then wipe off with a soft cloth.
soiled we recommend that you have them
a foam cleaner. Use a sponge to spread the

Operation
cleaned by a professional cleaning company
foam on the textile surface and to work it into SEAT does everything possible to preserve
with a shampoo and spray.
the material lightly. However, make sure that the genuine qualities of this natural product.
the textile material does not become soaking Due to the natural properties of the specially
Note
wet. Then dab off the foam with a dry and ab- selected hides employed, the finished leath-
sorbent cloth (e.g. a micro-fibre cloth) and Open Velcro fasteners on clothes can damage er has a certain sensitivity to grease and dirt,
vacuum off any residue once the surface is the seat upholstery. Make sure they are etc. so a degree of care is required in every-

Emergencies
completely dry. closed.
day use and when looking after the leather.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can
Cleaning stains
scratch and damage the surface. If the vehi-
Treat drink stains (such as coffee or fruit Cleaning leather*
cle is under solar radiation for long periods,
juice, etc.) with a cleaning solution for deli- the leather should be protected to prevent it
Normal cleaning
cate fabrics. This solution should be applied from fading. However, slight colour variations
with a sponge. If the stains are difficult to re- – Moisten a cotton or woollen cloth with wa- in high-quality natural leather are normal.

Safety
move, a washing paste can be applied direct- ter and wipe over the leather surfaces.
ly onto the stain and worked into the fabric. CAUTION
The surface will then have to be wiped with Cleaning stubborn stains
● Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe
clear water to remove any residue left by the – More stubborn dirt can be removed using a cream, spot removers or similar products on
paste. To do so, use a damp cloth or sponge mild soap solution (pure liquid soap; two leather. »
267
 Advice

● To avoid damage, stubborn stains should CAUTION ● Check the condition of the seat belts at reg-
be removed by a specialised workshop. ● Do not use solvents, wax polish, shoe
ular intervals. If you notice that the belt web-
bing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle
cream, stain removers, leather cleaning prod-
of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must
ucts or any similar products on Alcantara.
be replaced by a specialised workshop.
Cleaning Alcantara upholstery* ● To avoid damage, stubborn stains should
● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
be removed by a specialised workshop.
Removing dust and dirt belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
● On no account use brushes, hard sponges moved or modified in any way.
– Moisten a cloth just a little and wipe down or similar utensils.
the seat covers.
CAUTION
Removing stains Cleaning seat belts After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry com-
pletely before rolling them up. Otherwise, the
– Moisten a cloth with lukewarm water or di-
belt retractors could become damaged.
luted white spirits. A dirty belt may not work properly. Check all
seat belts regularly and keep them clean.
– Dab at the stain. Start at the outside and
work inwards. Seat belts cleaning
– Dry the clean area with a soft cloth. – Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll
it.
Do not use leather cleaning products on Al-
cantara seat covers. – Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap
solution.
You may use a suitable soap on dust and dirt.
– Allow it to dry.
Dust and grit in the pores and seams can
scratch and damage the surface. If the car is – Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.
left standing in the sun for long periods, Al-
cantara leather should be protected against If large stains form on the belts, the automat-
direct sunlight to prevent it from fading. How- ic belt retractor will not work correctly.
ever, slight colour variations will arise in nor-
mal use. WARNING
● Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the
seat belts, as this can impair the strength of
the webbing. Ensure that seat belts do not
come into contact with corrosive fluids.

268
 Checking and refilling levels

Checking and refilling levels ● If, in exceptional circumstances, you have (up to one minute). This is due to the fact that

Technical data
to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the fuel system has to purge itself of air be-
the following: fore starting.
Refuelling – Never fill the spare fuel canister inside
the vehicle or on it. An electrostatic For the sake of the environment
Refuelling charge could build up during filling, caus-
ing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could Do not try to put in more fuel after the auto-
Read the additional information carefully cause an explosion. Always place the matic filler nozzle has switched off, this may
›››  page 57 canister on the ground to fill it. cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Advice
– Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of
If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor-
the canister as far as possible. Note
rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the
tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond – If the spare fuel canister is made of met- There is no emergency mechanism for the
this point, as this will fill the expansion al, the filling nozzle must be in contact manual release of the fuel tank flap. If neces-
chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient condi- with the canister during filling. This sary, request assistance from specialised per-
helps prevent an electrostatic charge sonnel.

Operation
tions are warm.
building up.
The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- – Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the
en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are
flap. explosive. Danger of death. Fuel
WARNING Types of petrol

Emergencies
CAUTION
● Fuel is highly flammable and can cause se-
● Fuel spills should be removed from the The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the
rious burns and other injuries.
paintwork immediately. fuel tank flap.
– Never smoke or come into contact with
● Never run the tank completely dry. Irregular
sparks when filling the fuel tank of the The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-
fuel supply can cause misfiring. As a result,
vehicle or a spare fuel canister with fuel. verter and must only be run on unleaded pet-
unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic convert-
This is an explosion hazard. rol. The petrol must comply with European
er and cause damage.
– Follow legal requirements for the use of Standard EN 228 or German standard DIN

Safety
● When filling the fuel tank after having run it
spare fuel canisters. 51626-1 and must be unleaded. You can re-
completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel en-
– For safety reasons we do not recommend gine the ignition must be switched on for at fuel with a maximum ethanol proportion of
carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi- least 30 seconds before starting the engine. 10 % (E10). The types of petrol are differenti-
cle. The canister could be damaged in an Subsequently, when you start the engine it ated by their octane rating (RON). »
accident and leak. may take longer than normal to start firing

269
 Advice

The following titles appear on the corre- Petrol additives metal additives. Using them may damage the
sponding adhesive on the fuel tank flap: The quality of the fuel influences the behav- engine!
iour, power and service life of the engine. ● Never refuel with fuels containing a large
Super unleaded 95 octane or normal 91 oc- This is why the petrol you use should carry proportion of ethanol (for example, E50, E85).
tane unleaded petrol suitable additives already included by the This could damage the fuel system.
We recommend you use super 95 octane pet- petrol industry, free of metals. These addi- ● Just filling one full tank of leaded fuel or
rol. If this is not available: normal 91 octane tives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel containing other metal additives would
petrol, with a slight decrease in power. fuel system clean and prevent deposits from seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic
building up in the engine. converter.
Super unleaded petrol with a minimum of 95 If good-quality petrol with metal-free addi- ● Only use fuel additives that have been ap-
octanes tives is not available or engine problems proved by SEAT. Octane boosting or anti-
knock additives may contain metal additives
You should use super petrol with a minimum arise, the necessary additives must be added
that could seriously damage the engine or
of 95 octanes. when refuelling ››› . the catalytic converter. These additives must
If super is not available, in an emergency you Not all petrol additives have been shown to not be used.
may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In be effective. The use of unsuitable petrol ad- ● High engine speed and full throttle can
this case only use moderate engine speeds ditives may cause significant damage to the damage the engine when using petrol with an
and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon engine and the catalytic converter. Metal ad- octane rating lower than the correct grade for
as possible. ditives should never be used. Metal additives the engine.
may also be contained in petrol additives for
Super unleaded 98 octane or super 95 oc- improving anti-detonation ratings or octane Note
tane unleaded petrol ratings ››› .
● You may use petrol with a high octane num-
We recommend you use super plus 98 octane SEAT recommends “genuine Volkswagen ber than the one recommended for your en-
petrol. If this is not available: super 95 oc- Group Fuel Additives for petrol engines”. gine.
tane petrol, with a slight decrease in power. These additives can be bought at SEAT deal- ● In those countries where unleaded petrol is
ers, where information on how to use them not available, you may refuel with a fuel with
If super is not available, in an emergency you
can also be obtained. a low lead content.
may refuel with normal 91 octane petrol. In
this case only use moderate engine speeds
CAUTION
and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon
as possible. ● Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the Diesel fuel
fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of Please note the information on the inside of
the fuel tank flap.
270
 Checking and refilling levels

We recommend the use of diesel fuel which AdBlue® Refilling AdBlue®

Technical data
complies to European standard EN 590. If
diesel fuel which meets European standard
Information on AdBlue®
EN 590 is not available, the Cetane number
(CZ) must, at minimum, be 51. If the engine The consumption of AdBlue® depends on
is equipped with a particulate filter, the sul- your personal driving style, the temperature
phur content of the fuel must be below 50 of the system and on the outdoor tempera-
parts per million. ture when the vehicle is used.

Advice
Winter-grade diesel AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11°C
(+13°F). The system has heating elements
Summer fuel becomes thicker in winter and it that guarantee its operation even at low tem-
is more difficult to start the engine. For this peratures.
reason, petrol stations in some countries al- Fig. 236 AdBlue tank cap.
so offer winter diesel with improved fluidity The AdBlue® tank level capacity is approxi-
mately 10.4 litres. Operations prior to refilling

Operation
when cold (winter-grade diesel).
The AdBlue® tank should never be empty. Park the vehicle on a flat surface. If the vehi-
CAUTION When the distance to empty drops below cle is not parked on a flat surface, but, for ex-
● The vehicle is not designed for the use of 2400 km, a warning to refill the AdBlue® tank ample, on a slope or on the side of a curb,
FAME fuel (biodiesel). The fuel system would will appear on the dash panel display the level indicator may not detect the load
be damaged if you used biodiesel. ››› page 271. If this information is ignored, properly.

Emergencies
● Do not mix fuel additives, the so-called later on it will not be possible to re-start the If a warning message about AdBlue® levels
“thinners”, petrol or similar additives with engine. If this warning does not appear, it is appears on the dash panel display, fill at
diesel fuel. not necessary to refill the AdBlue ® tank. least the minimum amount required (approx.
● If poor-quality diesel fuel is used, it may be 5 litres). Only after adding this amount will
AdBlue® is a registered brand of the German
necessary to drain the fuel filter more fre- the system detect that AdBlue® has been
Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA)
quently than is specified in the Maintenance added and you will be able to start the en-
and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel
Programme. We recommend having this done
Exhaust Fluid). gine again. The maximum amount that can
by a specialised workshop. If water is allowed

Safety
be refilled is 11 litres.
to collect in the filter, this can cause engine
performance problems. CAUTION Switch the ignition off. If the ignition is not
Filling the AdBlue® tank excessively can switched off during refilling, the warning to
cause damage to the tank. refill may continue to appear on the instru-
ment panel display. »
271
 Advice

Fill with a refill bottle ● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec- ● Do not try to add any more additive after
Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO onds for the system to detect the fluid load. the nozzle has stopped for the first time. The
22241-1. Only use original containers. ● Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue could
before starting the engine! spill out.
● Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 236. ● Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO
● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an- Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue 22241-1. Only use original containers.
ti-clockwise direction. Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re- ● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or addi-
● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc- duction. tives. Any type of damage caused by such a
tions, indicated on the refill bottle. mixture will not be covered by the warranty.
● Open the tank cap. ● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank. This
● Check the expiry date.
● Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise could result in engine damage.
● Remove the cap of the refill bottle.
››› Fig. 236. ● Do not carry the refill bottle inside the vehi-
● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank fill- cle. If there is a leak (due to temperature
● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the
er neck vertically and screw the bottle on by changes or damage to the bottle), the
first time.
hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction. AdBlue® may damage the vehicle.
● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise
● Press the refill bottle in the direction of the
until you hear a click.
filler neck and hold it in this position. For the sake of the environment
● Wait until the contents of the refill bottle WARNING Dispose of the refill bottle in an environment-
have been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Do friendly manner.
AdBlue® should only be stored in the original
not compress or break the bottle!
container, which should be tightly closed and
● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise direc- kept in a safe place. Note
tion and gently pull it upwards ››› . ● Never keep AdBlue® in empty food contain- You can buy refill bottles that are adequate
● The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liq- ers, bottles or other similar containers. Other for AdBlue® use at SEAT dealerships.
uid comes out of the bottle. people may confuse it for other products.
● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc- ● Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children.
tion until it is tightly closed.
● Close the fuel tank flap. CAUTION
● When refilling, the nozzle grip should be
Operations before driving aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle will
● After refilling the tank, only switch on the not connect automatically.
ignition.

272
 Checking and refilling levels

Working in the engine compart- fluids and consumables replaced by a Techni- ● Never cover the engine with additional in-

Technical data
cal Service. Please observe the relevant in- sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
ment structions ››› page 259. The engine compart- fire!
ment of the vehicle is a hazardous area ››› . ● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant ex-
Safety notes for work in the engine pansion tank when the engine is hot. If the
compartment WARNING coolant is hot, the cooling system will be
All work on the engine or in the engine com- pressurised!
Read the additional information carefully partment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, ● Protect face, hands and arms by covering
›››  page 17 involves the danger of injury and burns, acci- the cap with a large, thick cloth to protect

Advice
Before starting any work on the engine or in dents and even fire. against escaping coolant and steam.
the engine compartment: ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, ● Always make sure you have not left any ob-
smoke or coolant escaping from the engine jects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in the
1. Switch off the engine and remove the key compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine compartment.
from the ignition. sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam or ● If you have to work underneath the vehicle,
coolant is emitted, then allow the engine to

Operation
2. Apply the handbrake. you must use suitable stands additionally to
cool before carefully opening the bonnet. support the vehicle, there is a risk of acci-
3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the selec- ● Switch off the engine and remove the key dent!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for se-
tor lever to position P. from the ignition. curing the vehicle and there is a risk of injury.
4. Wait for the engine to cool down. ● Apply the handbrake and move the gear ● If any work has to be performed when the
lever to neutral or selector lever to position P. engine is started or with the engine running,
5. Keep children away from the vehicle.

Emergencies
● Keep children away from the vehicle. there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety
6. Raise the bonnet ››› page 274. risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive
● Never touch hot engine parts. There is a
belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from
You should not do any work in the engine risk of burns.
the high-voltage ignition system. You should
compartment unless you know exactly how to ● Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a also observe the following:
carry out the jobs and have the correct tools! hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire hazard.
– Never touch the electrical wiring of the
Have the work carried out by a specialised ● Avoid causing short-circuits in the electri- ignition system.
workshop if you are uncertain. cal system, particularly at the points where
– Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing and
the jump leads are attached ›››  page 72.

Safety
All service fluids and consumables, e.g. cool- long hair do not get trapped in rotating
The battery could explode.
ant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries, engine parts. Danger of death. Before
● Never touch the radiator fan. It is tempera- starting any work remove jewellery, tie
are under constant development. SEAT pro-
ture controlled and could start automatically, back and cover hair, and wear tight-fit-
vides a constant flow of information to Tech-
nical Services concerning modifications. For
even when the engine has been switched off ting clothes. »
and the key removed from the ignition!
this reason, we recommend you have service
273
 Advice

– Never accelerate with a gear engaged CAUTION ● Wait until no more steam, smoke or coolant
without taking the necessary precau- is emitted from the bonnet, then carefully
When topping up service fluids, make sure
tions. The vehicle could move, even if the open the bonnet.
not to mistake them. Using the wrong fluids
handbrake is applied. Danger of death. ● When working in the engine compartment,
could cause serious malfunctions and engine
● If work has to be carried out on the fuel damage! always observe the safety warnings
system or on electrical components, you ››› page 273.
must observe the following safety notes in
addition to the above warnings: For the sake of the environment
– Always disconnect the battery from the Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-
Closing the bonnet
on-board network. The vehicle must be ronment. For this reason you should make
unlocked when this is done, otherwise regular checks on the ground underneath
– Slightly lift the bonnet.
the alarm will be triggered. your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other
fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a speci- – Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its
– Do not smoke.
alised workshop. support.
– Never work near naked flames.
– Always have a fire extinguisher on hand. – At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall
so it locks.
Opening the bonnet
WARNING If the bonnet does not close, do not press
Read the additional information carefully downwards. Open it again and let it fall as
If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it could
suddenly open while driving leaving the driv- ›››  page 17 mentioned above.
er without visibility. This could result in a se- The bonnet is released from inside the vehi-
rious accident. WARNING
cle.
● After closing the bonnet, always check that If the bonnet is not closed properly, it could
it is properly secured by the locking mecha-
Before opening the bonnet ensure that the open while you are driving and completely
nism in the lock carrier piece. The bonnet windscreen wipers are in rest position. obscure your view of the road. Risk of acci-
must be flush with the surrounding body pan- dent.
els. WARNING
● After closing the bonnet, always check that
● While driving, if you notice that the bonnet Hot coolant can scald! it is properly secured. The bonnet must be
is not correctly closed then stop immediately ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, flush with the surrounding body panels.
and close it correctly. smoke or coolant escaping from the engine ● If you notice that the bonnet latch is not se-
● Only open and close the bonnet when there compartment. cured when the vehicle is moving, stop the
is nobody within its range. vehicle immediately and close the bonnet
properly. Risk of accident.

274
 Checking and refilling levels

Checking levels

Technical data
Advice
Operation
Fig. 237 Diagram for the location of the various ele-
ments.

From time to time, the levels of the different tioned above. These operations are descri- Engine oil
fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never bed in ››› page 273.
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
General notes

Emergencies
damage to the engine may be caused. Overview
1 Coolant expansion tank You will find further explanations, instruc- The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
tions and restrictions on the technical speci- oil that can be used all year round.
2 Engine oil level dipstick fications as of ››› page 291. Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-
3 Engine oil filler cap
tial for the correct operation of the engine
4 Brake fluid reservoir Note
and its long useful life, when topping up or
5 Vehicle battery The layout of parts may vary depending on changing oil, use only those oils that comply

Safety
the engine. with VW standards.
6 Windscreen washer reservoir
The specifications (VW standards) set out in
The checking and refilling of service fluids the following page should appear on the con-
are carried out on the components men- tainer of the service oil; when the container
displays the specific standards for petrol and »
275
 Advice

diesel engines together, it means that the oil ● Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service in- Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash
can be used for both types of engines. tervals. formation, may be used in diesel engines
● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the equipped with particulate filter. Using other
We recommend that the oil change indicated
engine oil level is too low ››› page 277 and types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-
in the Maintenance Programme, be per-
LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-
formed by a technical service or specialised
top up (once) with oil for fixed service inter- fore:
workshop.
vals ›››  page 59 (up to a maximum of 0.5 ● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
The correct oil specifications for your engine litres).
are listed in the ›››  page 59. ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
Fixed service intervals* engine oil level is too low ››› page 277,
Service intervals Checking engine oil level and you cannot ob-
If your vehicle does not have the “LongLife tain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can
Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service interval” or it has been disabled (by
service) or fixed (dependent on time/dis- use a small quantity of oil (once) conforming
request), you may use oils for fixed service to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,
tance travelled). intervals, which also appear in VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification
If the PR code that appears on the back of the ›››  page 59. In this case, your vehicle (up to 0.5 l).
Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6, must be serviced after a fixed interval of 1
this means that your vehicle has the LongLife year/15,000 km (10,000 miles)(whatever Note
service program. If it lists the codes QI1, QI2, comes first) ››› Booklet Maintenance Pro-
gramme. Before a long trip, we recommend finding an
QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is de-
engine oil that conforms to the correspond-
pendent on the time/distance travelled. ing VW specifications and recommend keep-
● In exceptional circumstances, if the engine
oil level is too low ››› page 277 and you can- ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en-
Flexible service intervals (LongLife service gine oil will always be available for a top-up if
not obtain the oil specified for your vehicle,
intervals*) needed.
you can add a small quantity of oil conform-
Special oils and processes have been devel- ing to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3
oped which, depending on the characteris- (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (die-
tics and individual driving profiles, enable sel engines) (up to 0.5 l). Warning lamp
the extension of the oil change service (Long-
Life service intervals). Vehicles with diesel particulate filter* If this warning lamp  is red it indicates
that the engine oil pressure is too low.
Because this oil is essential for extending the The Maintenance Programme states whether
service intervals, it must only be used ob- your vehicle is fitted with a diesel particulate If this warning symbol starts to flash, and is
serving the following indications: filter. accompanied by three audible warnings,
switch off the engine and check the oil level.
If necessary, add more oil ››› page 277.
276
 Checking and refilling levels

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil Read the additional information carefully CAUTION

Technical data
level is correct, stop driving. Do not even run ›››  page 58
the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical as- If the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 238 A , do
not start the engine. This could result in dam-
sistance. Checking oil level
age to the engine and catalytic converter.
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. Contact a Technical Service.
Checking oil level
– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until
If the warning lamp is yellow  the engine
the operating temperature is reached and
oil level should be checked as soon as possi- Topping up engine oil
then stop.
ble. Top up the oil at the next opportunity

Advice
››› page 277. – Wait for about two minutes. Read the additional information carefully
– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with ›››  page 58
Oil level sensor faulty* a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it Before opening the bonnet, read and observe
If the  yellow warning lamp flashes, take in as far as it will go. the warnings ››› in Safety notes for work in
the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the engine compartment on page 273.
– Then pull it out again and check the oil lev-

Operation
the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is
el. Top up with engine oil if necessary.
advisable to check the oil level every time The position of the filler neck is shown in the
you refuel. Depending on how you drive and the condi- corresponding engine compartment image
tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con- ››› page 275.
sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil Engine oil specification ›››  page 59.
Checking engine oil level consumption is likely to be higher for the first

Emergencies
5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level WARNING
must be checked at regular intervals, prefera-
bly when filling the tank and before a jour- Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil
comes into contact with hot engine compo-
ney.
nents when topping up.
WARNING
CAUTION
Any work carried out in the engine compart-

Safety
ment or on the engine must be carried out If the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 238 A , do
cautiously. not start the engine. This could result in dam-
● When working in the engine compartment, age to the engine and catalytic converter.
always observe the safety warnings Contact a specialised workshop. »
Fig. 238 Engine oil dipstick. ››› page 273.

277
 Advice

For the sake of the environment ● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into ● The  lamp lights up or flashes while the
contact with engine oil. vehicle is running, and three acoustic warn-
The oil level must never be above area ing signals are emitted ››› .
››› Fig. 238 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in ● Engine oil is poisonous! Used engine oil
through the crankcase breather and escape must be stored in a safe place out of the This means that either the coolant level is too
into the atmosphere via the exhaust system. reach of children.
low or the coolant temperature is too high.

CAUTION Coolant temperature too high

Changing engine oil No additives should be used with engine oil. If the  lamp lights up, stop the vehicle,
This could result in engine damage. Any dam- turn off the engine and wait for it to cool
Read the additional information carefully age caused by the use of such additives down. Check the coolant level.
›››  page 58 would not be covered by the factory warranty.
If the coolant level is correct, the overheating
The engine oil must be changed at the inter-
may be caused by a malfunction of the radia-
vals given in the service schedule. For the sake of the environment
tor fan. Check the radiator fan fuse and have
We recommend that you have the engine oil ● Because of disposal problems and the spe- it replaced if necessary ››› page 104.
changed by a Technical Service. cial tools and specialist knowledge required,
we recommend that you have the engine oil If the control lamp lights up again after driv-
The oil change intervals are shown in the and filter changed by a Technical Service. ing on for a short distance, stop the vehicle
Maintenance Programme. ● Never pour oil down drains or into the
and switch the engine off. Contact a Techni-
ground. cal Service or a specialised workshop.
WARNING
● Use a suitable container when draining the
Only change the engine oil yourself if you Coolant level too low
used oil. It must be large enough to hold all
have the specialist knowledge required! the engine oil. If the  lamp lights up, stop the vehicle,
● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- turn off the engine and wait for it to cool
serve the warnings ››› page 273, Safety notes down. First check the coolant level. If the lev-
for work in the engine compartment. el of the coolant is below the “MIN” mark,
● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil Cooling system top up with coolant liquid ››› .
may cause burn injuries.
● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such Control lamp WARNING
as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil. ● If your vehicle is immobilised for technical
There is a fault if: reasons, move it to a safe distance from traf-
● When removing the oil drain plug with your
fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre- ● The  lamp does not go out again after a fic. Turn the engine off, turn the hazard lights
vent oil from running down your arm. few seconds. on and place the warning triangle.

278
 Checking and refilling levels

● Never open the bonnet if you can see or – Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with safe place out of reach of children. Failure to

Technical data
hear steam or coolant escaping from the en- a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left comply could result in poisoning.
gine compartment. Risk of scalding. Wait un- ››› . ● If working inside the engine compartment,
til you can no longer see or hear escaping remember that, even when the ignition is
– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-
steam or coolant. switched off, the radiator fan may start up au-
ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you
● The engine compartment is a dangerous could damage the engine. If there is no tomatically, and therefore there is a risk of in-
area. Before carrying out any work in the en- coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- jury.
gine compartment, switch off the engine and
tinue driving. You should obtain professio-
allow it to cool down. Always note the corre-
nal assistance ››› .

Advice
WARNING
sponding warnings ››› page 273.
– If there is still some coolant in the expan- If there is not enough anti-freeze in the cool-
sion tank, top up to the upper mark. ant system, the engine may fail leading to se-
rious damage.
Topping up coolant – Top up with coolant until the level becomes
● Please make sure that the percentage of
stable.
Read the additional information carefully additive is correct with respect to the lowest

Operation
›››  page 59 – Screw the cap back on correctly. expected ambient temperature in the zone in
which the vehicle is to be used.
Top up coolant when the level is below the Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a ● When the outside temperature is very low,
MIN (minimum) mark. leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle the coolant could freeze and the vehicle
straight to a specialised workshop to have would be immobilised. In this case, the heat-
Checking coolant level the cooling system examined. If there are no ing would not work either and inadequately

Emergencies
leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of dressed passengers could die of cold.
– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.
coolant can only occur if the coolant boils
– Switch the ignition off. and is forced out of the system as a result of
CAUTION
– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
overheating.
Do not top up the expansion tank with cool-
pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter the
WARNING
coolant level should be between the marks. cooling system. In this case, stop driving.
When the engine is hot, it may be slightly ● The cooling system is under pressure. Do Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, there
not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- »

Safety
above the upper mark. is a risk of engine damage.
sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of
Topping up coolant burns!
● The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a
– Wait for the engine to cool down.
health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze
should be stored in the original container in a

279
 Advice

CAUTION The brake fluid level drops slightly when the brakes may then cause a vapour lock which
vehicle is being used as the brake pads are could impair the braking effect.
The original additives should never be mixed automatically adjusted as they wear.
with coolants which are not approved by Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid.
SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing However, if the level goes down noticeably in Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the
severe damage to the engine and the engine a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark, VW 501 14 standard.
cooling system. there may be a leak in the brake system. A
You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid
● If the fluid in the expansion tank is not pur- display on the instrument panel will warn you
in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Serv-
ple but is, for example, brown, this indicates if the brake fluid level is too low ››› page 121.
ice. If none is available, use only high-quality
that the G13 additive has been mixed with an
inadequate coolant. The coolant must be
brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4
WARNING
changed as soon as possible if this is the standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT
Before opening the bonnet to check the brake 4.
case! This could result in serious faults and
fluid level, read and observe the warnings
engine damage. Using any other kind of brake fluid or one
››› page 273.
that is not of a high quality may affect opera-
For the sake of the environment tion of the brake system and reduce its effec-
tiveness. Never use a brake fluid if the con-
Coolants and additives can contaminate the Changing the brake fluid
environment. If any fluids are spilled, they tainer does not state that it complies with VW
should be collected and correctly disposed 501 14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or
The Maintenance Programme indicates brake
of, with respect to the environment. USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.
fluid change intervals.
We recommend that you have the brake fluid WARNING
changed by a Technical Service. Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im-
Brake fluid Before opening the bonnet, please read and pairs the braking effect.
follow the warnings ››› in Safety notes for ● Before opening the bonnet to check the
Checking the brake fluid level work in the engine compartment on brake fluid level, read and observe the warn-
page 273 in section “Safety notes for work- ings ››› page 273.
Read the additional information carefully ing in the engine compartment”. ● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed
›››  page 60 original container in a safe place out of reach
In the course of time, brake fluid becomes
of children. There is a toxic risk.
The position of the brake fluid reservoir is hygroscopic and absorbs water from the am-
shown in the corresponding engine compart- ● Perform the brake fluid change according to
bient air. If the water content in the brake flu-
ment image ››› page 275. The brake fluid res- id is too high, the brake system could cor- the Maintenance Programme. Heavy use of
ervoir has a black and yellow cap. the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the
rode. This also considerably reduces the boil-
brake fluid is left in the brake system for too
ing point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of the
280
 Checking and refilling levels

long. This would seriously affect the effec- Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- Vehicle battery

Technical data
tiveness of the brakes and the safety of the screen and headlights. We recommend that
vehicle. This may cause an accident. you always add a product to the windscreen
Symbols and warnings on handling
washer fluid. Approved windscreen cleaning
products exist on the market with high deter- the battery
CAUTION
gent and anti-freeze properties, these may be
Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. Read the additional information carefully
added all-year-round. Please follow the dilu-
Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork tion instructions on the packaging.
›››  page 60
immediately.

Advice
WARNING  Wear eye protection

For the sake of the environment Any work carried out in the engine compart-  Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protec-
ment or on the engine must be carried out tive gloves and eye protection!
The brake pads and brake fluid must be col-
lected and disposed of according the applica- cautiously.
ble regulations. The SEAT Technical Service
 Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro-
● When working in the engine compartment, hibited!
network has the necessary equipment and

Operation
always observe the safety warnings
qualified personnel for collecting and dispos- ››› page 273.  A highly explosive mixture of gases is released
ing of this waste material. when the battery is under charge.

CAUTION  Keep children away from acid and batteries!

● Never put radiator anti-freeze or other addi-

Windscreen washer reservoir tives into the windscreen washer fluid. WARNING

Emergencies
● Always use approved windscreen cleansing Always be aware of the danger of injury and
Checking and topping up the wind- products diluted as per instructions. If you chemical burns as well as the risk of accident
screen washer reservoir water use other washer fluids or soap solutions, or fire when working on the battery and the
the tiny holes in the fan-shaped nozzles electrical system:
Read the additional information carefully could become blocked. ● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,
›››  page 60 skin and clothing from acid and particles con-
taining lead.
The windscreen washer is supplied with liq-

Safety
● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear
uid from the windscreen washer reservoir in
protective gloves and eye protection. Do not
the engine compartment. It has a capacity of tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through
approximately 3 litres. the vents.
The tank is in the engine compartment. ● Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately
for several minutes with clear water. Then »
281
 Advice

seek medical care immediately. Neutralise ● Never charge a frozen battery, or one which The control lamp  lights up when the igni-
any acid splashes on the skin or clothing has thawed. This could result in explosions tion is switched on. It should go out when the
with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plen- and chemical burns. Always replace a battery engine has started running.
ty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, which has frozen. A flat battery can also
If the control lamp  lights up while driving,
consult a doctor immediately. freeze at temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F).
the alternator is no longer charging the bat-
● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are ● Ensure that the vent hose is always connec- tery. You should immediately drive to the
prohibited. When handling cables and electri- ted to the battery. nearest specialised workshop.
cal equipment, avoid causing sparks and ● Never use a defective battery. This could
electrostatic charge. Never short the battery cause an explosion. Replace a damaged bat- You should avoid using electrical equipment
terminals. High-energy sparks can cause in- tery immediately. that is not absolutely necessary because this
jury. will drain the battery.
● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-
CAUTION
leased when the battery is under charge. The
batteries should be charged in a well-ventila- ● Never disconnect the battery if the ignition Checking the battery electrolyte level
ted room only. is switched on or if the engine is running.
● Keep children away from acid and batteries. This could damage the electrical system or The electrolyte level should be checked regu-
electronic components. larly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-
● Before working on the electrical system,
● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight tries and in older batteries.
you must switch off the engine, the ignition
and all electrical devices. The negative cable over a long period of time, as the intense ul-
traviolet radiation can damage the battery – Open the bonnet and open the battery cov-
on the battery must be disconnected. When a
housing. er at the front ››› in Safety notes for work
light bulb is changed, you need only switch
off the light. ● If the vehicle is left standing in cold condi-
in the engine compartment on page 273
tions for a long period, protect the battery ››› in Symbols and warnings on handling
● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlock-
from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be dam- the battery on page 281. For vehicles with
ing the vehicle before you disconnect the bat-
aged. the battery under the spare wheel, open
tery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.
the rear lid and lift the floor covering. The
● When disconnecting the battery from the
battery is located next to the spare wheel.
vehicle on-board network, disconnect first
the negative cable and then the positive ca- Warning lamp – Check the colour display in the "magic eye"
ble. on the top of the battery.
● Switch off all electrical devices before re-  It lights up – If there are air bubbles in the window, tap
connecting the battery. Reconnect first the the window gently until they disperse.
positive cable and then the negative cable. Alternator fault.
Never reverse the polarity of the connections.
This could cause an electrical fire.
282
 Wheels

The position of the battery is shown in the Charging the battery

Wheels

Technical data
corresponding engine compartment diagram The vehicle battery should be charged by a
››› page 275. specialised workshop only, as batteries us-
ing special technology have been installed
Wheels and tyres
The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top
of the battery changes colour, depending on and they must be charged in a controlled en-
vironment. General notes
the charge state and electrolyte level of the
battery. Avoiding damage
Replacing a vehicle battery
There are two different colours: – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar

Advice
The battery has been developed to suit the
● Black: correct charge status. obstacle, drive very slowly and at a right
conditions of its location and has special
angle.
● Transparent/clear yellow: the battery must safety features.
be replaced. Contact a specialised workshop. – Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.
Genuine SEAT batteries meet the mainte-
nance, performance and safety specifications – Inspect the tyres regularly for damage
of your vehicle. (cuts, cracks or blisters, etc.). Remove any

Operation
Charging or changing the battery foreign objects embedded in the treads.
WARNING
The battery is maintenance-free and is Storing tyres
● We recommend you use only maintenance-
checked during the inspection service. All
free or cycle free leak-proof batteries which – When you remove the tyres, mark them in
work on the vehicle battery requires special- comply with standards T 825 06 and order to maintain the same direction of ro-
ist knowledge.

Emergencies
VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of tation when they are installed again.
If you often drive short distances or if the ve- 2001.
– When removed, the wheels and/or tyres
hicle is not driven for long periods, the bat- ● Before starting any work on the batteries,
you must read and observe the warnings should be stored in a cool, dry and prefera-
tery should be checked by a specialised
››› in Symbols and warnings on handling bly dark location.
workshop between the scheduled services.
the battery on page 281. – Store tyres in a vertical position, if they are
If the battery has discharged and you have
not fitted on wheel rims.
problems starting the vehicle, the battery
For the sake of the environment

Safety
might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- New tyres
ommend you have the vehicle battery Batteries contain toxic substances such as
checked by a Technical Service where it will sulphuric acid and lead. They must be dis- New tyres must be run in ››› page 197.
be re-charged or replaced. posed of appropriately and must not be dis- The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-
posed of with ordinary household waste. cording to the type and make of tyre and the
tread pattern. »
283
 Advice

Concealed damage Tyre pressure monitoring system Tyre pressure

Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily The correct tyre pressure is especially impor-
visible. If you notice unusual vibrations or the tant at high speeds. The pressure should
vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate therefore be checked at least once a month
that one of the tyres is damaged. They and before starting a journey.
should be checked immediately by a Techni-
Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can
cal Service.
be adjusted to medium load to improve driv-
ing comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). When
Tyres with directional tread pattern
driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con-
An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- sumption may increase slightly.
rection of rotation on tyres with directional
tread. Always observe the direction of rota- WARNING
tion indicated when fitting the wheel. This A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too
guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid low, causing an accident!
aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.
● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in-
sufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it
WARNING
becomes too hot, and this can cause tread
● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur- separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe
ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly care- Fig. 239 Location of the tyre pressure sticker. the recommended tyre pressures.
fully to avoid possible accidents. ● If the tyre pressure is too low or too high,
● Never drive with damaged tyres. This may The maximum tyre pressure values are shown the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehi-
cause an accident. on a sticker stuck to the back of the left front cle will not handle well. Risk of accident!
● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve-
door frame ››› Fig. 239.
hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the 1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure For the sake of the environment
vehicle immediately and check the tyres for from the sticker. The values refer to Sum-
damage. Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
mer tyres. sumption.
2. The tyre pressures should only be checked
when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised
pressures of warm tyres must not be re-
duced.
3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you
are carrying.
284
 Wheels

Service life of tyres pending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 of Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as

Technical data
them evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark- they otherwise cause excessive wear on
ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let- steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must
ters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the po- also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted.
sitions of the tread wear indicators. The mini-
mum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm Incorrect wheel alignment
(measured in the tread grooves next to the
Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex-
tread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be re-
cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the
placed. Different figures may apply in export
vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you

Advice
countries ››› .
should have the wheel alignment checked by
a Technical Service.
Tyre pressure
Fig. 240 Tyre tread wear indicators. Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature WARNING
wear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre

Operation
reason, the tyre pressure should be checked bursts during driving!
at least once per month ››› page 284.
● The tyres must be replaced at the latest
when the tread wear indicators are worn
Driving style ››› page 285. Failure to follow this instruction
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not
braking all increase tyre wear. grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There

Emergencies
is also a greater risk of “aquaplaning”.
Changing wheels around ● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with in-
sufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it
If the front tyres are worn considerably more to overheat. This can cause tread separation
than the rear ones it is advisable to change and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always
Fig. 241 Diagram for changing wheels.
them around as shown ››› Fig. 241. The use- observe the recommended tyre pressures.
The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre ful life of all the tyres will then be about the ● If tyres show excessive wear, you should
pressure, driving style and fitting. same time. have the running gear checked by a Technical

Safety
Service.
Wear indicators Wheel balance ● Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake
The original tyres on your vehicle have The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. fluid away from tyres.
1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” However, various factors encountered in nor- ● Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
››› Fig. 240, running across the tread. De- mal driving can cause them to become unbal- placed immediately! »
anced, which results in steering vibration.
285
 Advice

For the sake of the environment The tyres could also have the following infor- ● If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must en-
mation: sure that the flow of air to the brakes is not
Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
restricted. This could cause the brake system
sumption. ● A direction of rotation symbol
to overheat.
● “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres. ● All four wheels must be fitted with radial
tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumfer-
New tyres and wheels The manufacturing date is also indicated on ence) and the same tread pattern.
the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outer
New tyres and wheels have to be run in. side of the wheel).
For the sake of the environment
The tyres and wheel rims are an essential “DOT... 1116...” means, for example, that the
tyre was produced in the 11th week of 2016. Old tyres must be disposed of according to
part of the vehicle's design. Those approved
the laws in the country concerned.
by SEAT are specially matched to the charac- We recommend that work on tyres and
teristics of the vehicle and make a major con- wheels be carried out by a Technical Service.
tribution to good road-holding and safe han- Note
They are familiar with the procedure and
dling ››› . have the necessary special tools and spare ● A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted
Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and parts as well as the proper facilities for dis- to find out whether wheels or tyres of differ-
posing of the old tyres. ent sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT
not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both
can be fitted, and to find out about the com-
rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des- Any technical service has full information on binations allowed between the front axle
ignations makes it easier to choose the cor- the technical requirements when installing or (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa- changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims. ● For technical reasons, it is not generally
tions marked on the sidewall, for example:
possible to use the wheels from other vehi-
195/55 R16 91V WARNING cles. This can also apply to wheels of the
● We recommend that you use only wheels same model. The use of wheels or tyres
This contains the following information: which have not been approved by SEAT for
and tyres which have been approved by SEAT
for your model. Failure to do so could impair use with your model may invalidate the vehi-
195 Tyre width in mm
vehicle handling. Risk of accident. cle's type approval for use on public roads.
55 Height/width ratio in % ● If the spare tyre is not the same as the
● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are
R Tyre construction: Radial more than 6 years old. If you have no alterna- tyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g.
16 Rim diameter in inches tive, you should drive slowly and with extra winter tyres) you should only use the spare
care at all times. tyre for a short period of time and drive with
91 Load rating code extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as
● Never use old tyres or those with an un-
V Speed rating soon as possible.
known “history of use”.

286
 Wheels

Wheel bolts Tyre monitoring indicator* Tyre pressure adjustment

Technical data
After modifying tyre pressure or changing any
The design of wheel bolts is matched to the wheels, the new tyre pressure must be stored
rims. If different wheel rims are fitted, the in the Easy Connect system with the  but-
correct wheel bolts with the right length and ton and the SETTINGS function button
correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. ›››  page 34.
This ensures that wheels are fitted securely
and that the brake system functions correctly. You can also press and hold down the
››› Fig. 242 button with the ignition on, until
In certain circumstances, you should not use

Advice
an acoustic signal is heard.
wheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if it
is the same model ››› page 259. If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex-
ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load),
WARNING Fig. 242 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys- the tyre pressure must be increased to the
tem button. recommended value for a full load (see the
If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly,
sticker on the back of the left front door

Operation
the wheel could become loose while driving.
Risk of accident. The tyre monitoring system compares wheel frame). If the tyre monitor system button is
revolutions alongside the wheel diameter of pressed down, the new tyre pressures are
● The wheel bolts must be clean and turn
each wheel, with help from the ESC. If the di- confirmed.
easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.
ameter of a wheel changes, the tyre monitor-
● Use only wheel bolts which belong to the ing indicator lights up . The wheel diame- The tyre pressure control lamp  lights up
wheel. ter changes when:

Emergencies
● If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts
If the tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower
is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehi- ● Tyre pressure is insufficient. than the value set by the driver, then the tyre
cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight- pressure control lamp ››› will light up.
● The tyre structure is damaged.
ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and
● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a WARNING
threads can be damaged.
load.
● When the tyre pressure control lamp lights
● The wheels of one axle are under more up, reduce speed immediately and avoid any
CAUTION
pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or

Safety
sudden turning or braking manoeuvre. Stop
The prescribed tightening torque for wheel on steep slopes). when possible, and check the tyre pressure
bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. and status.
● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.
● The driver is responsible for maintaining
● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.
correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre
● The wheel on one axle is changed. pressure must be regularly checked. »
287
 Advice

● Under certain circumstances (e.g. when Spare wheel (temporary spare Please note the following restrictions when
driving in a sporty manner, in winter condi- using the temporary spare wheel. This tem-
tions or on a dirt track) the tyre control lamp
wheel)* porary spare wheel has been specially de-
may light up belatedly or may function incor- signed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot be
rectly. Location and use of the temporary changed with the temporary spare wheel
spare wheel from another vehicle.
Note No other type of tyre (normal summer or win-
If the battery is disconnected, the yellow ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact tempo-
warning lamp  lights up after turning the rary spare wheel rim.
ignition on. This should turn off after a brief
journey. Snow chains
For technical reasons, snow chains must not
be used on the temporary spare wheel.
If you have a puncture on one of the front
wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-
porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear
wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel
that you have removed and replace the punc-
Fig. 243 In the luggage compartment: re- tured front wheel with this wheel.
move the subwoofer.
Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles with
The temporary spare wheel is stored under
the Beats Audio® sound system (6 speakers
the floor panel in the luggage compartment
with 1 subwoofer)*
and is attached by a thumbnut.
Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel
How to use the temporary spare wheel (carpet) as follows:
If you ever have a punctured tyre or loss of ● Pull the carpet upwards to remove it.
pressure, the temporary spare wheel is only
● Disconnect the cable for the subwoofer
intended for temporary use until you reach a
speaker ››› Fig. 243 1 .
workshop. Change it for a duty wheel as soon
as possible. ● Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise 2 .
● Remove the subwoofer speaker and the
spare wheel.
288
 Wheels

● When replacing the spare wheel, place the ● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) All tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documenta-

Technical data
subwoofer speaker in the direction indicated when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on tion also apply to winter tyres.
by the arrow and with the word “FRONT” fac- the vehicle: risk of accident! Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the
ing forward. ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.
● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- fast cornering: risk of accident!
tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the The speed rating code ››› page 286, New
● Never use more than one temporary spare
subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in tyres and wheels determines the following
wheel at the same time, risk of accident.
place. speed limits for winter tyres: ›››
● No other type of tyre (normal summer or

Advice
winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph)
Removing the 16” temporary spare wheel temporary spare wheel rim.
(without subwoofer) S max. 180 km/h (112 mph)

● Remove the luggage compartment variable

T max. 190 km/h (118 mph)
floor to access the wheel and the tools H max. 210 km/h (130 mph)
››› page 161. Winter service
In some countries, vehicles which can exceed

Operation
● Loosen the strap that secures the box by the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have
Winter tyres
pressing on the buckle. an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of
● Remove the toolbox. In winter conditions winter tyres will consid- view. These stickers are available from your
● Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise and erably improve the vehicle's handling. The technical service. The legal requirements of
remove it. design of summer tyres (width, rubber com- each country must be followed.

Emergencies
pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessa-
● Press the thread and turn it 90° clockwise
and snow. rily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres
or anti-clockwise and remove it.
● Pull on the front part of the spare wheel to Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure of handle better when the roads are free of
0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than the pres- snow and ice.
remove it.
sures specified for summer tyres (see the If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the
WARNING sticker on the back of the left front door notes on the spare wheel ››› page 286, New
frame). tyres and wheels.
● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,

Safety
check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.
Failure to do so may cause an accident. The WARNING
Information on permitted winter tyre sizes
tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left The maximum speed for the winter tyres must
can be found in the vehicle's registration
front door frame. not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead
documentation. Use only radial winter tyres.
to damage and risk of accident. »
289
 Advice

For the sake of the environment

Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possi-
ble. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly
and reduce fuel consumption.

290
 Technical specifications

Technical data Abbreviations used in the technical specifi-

Technical data
cations section
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
Technical specifications
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly
PS
used to denote engine power.
Important information
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Important Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

Advice
The information in the vehicle documentation CZ
Cetane number, indication of the diesel
always takes precedence over the informa- combustion power. Fig. 245 Chassis number.
tion in this Instruction Manual. Research octane number, indication of
RON Chassis number
All technical specifications provided in this the knock resistance of petrol.
The VIN is located in the Easy Connect, on the
documentation are valid for the standard

Operation
vehicle data sticker and under the wind-
model in Spain. The vehicle data card inclu-
screen, on the driver side ››› Fig. 245. Addi-
ded in the Maintenance Programme or the Vehicle identification data tionally, the chassis number is located in the
vehicle registration documents shows which
engine compartment, on the right-hand side.
engine is installed in the vehicle.
The number is engraved on the top side rail,
The figures may be different depending and is partially covered.

Emergencies
whether additional equipment is fitted, for
different models, for special vehicles and for VIN in the Easy Connect
other countries. ● Select:  button > SETTINGS function
button > Service > Chassis number.

Identification plate
The identification plate is located on the rear

Safety
pillar of the right-hand front door. Vehicles
for certain export countries do not have an
identification plate. »
Fig. 244 Vehicle data sticker (luggage com-
partment).
291
 Technical data

Vehicle data label by certified EU laboratories, according to the WARNING

The data sticker is placed on the inside of the legislation in force at the time (for more infor-
● Please note that the centre of gravity may
spare wheel well, in the boot and on the rear mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-
shift when transporting heavy objects; this
cover of the Maintenance Programme. ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-
may affect vehicle handling and lead to an ac-
ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and
cident. Always adjust your speed and driving
The following information is provided on the apply to the specified vehicle characteristics. style to suit road conditions and require-
vehicle data sticker: ››› Fig. 244
The values relating to fuel consumption and ments.
1 Vehicle identification number (chassis CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- ● Never exceed the gross axle weight rating
number) tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the per-
cle at the time of purchase. missible axle load or the permissible total
2 Vehicle type, model, capacity, engine
weight is exceeded, the driving characteris-
type, finish, engine power and gearbox Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions depend tics of the vehicle may change, leading to ac-
type on the equipment/features of each individual cidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
3 Engine code, gearbox code, external vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road
paint code and internal equipment code conditions, traffic conditions, environmental
conditions, load or number of passengers.
4 Optional extras and PR numbers
Trailer mode
Note
Identifying letters
In practice, and considering all the factors Trailer weights
The identifying letters of the engine can be mentioned here, consumption values can dif-
viewed on the instrument panel when the en- fer from those calculated in the current Euro- The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap-
gine is switched off and the ignition is on. pean regulations. proved are selected in intensive trials accord-
ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-
● Hold down the button 0.0/SET on the dash
proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in
panel for more than 15 seconds.
the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50
Weights
mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different
Information on fuel consump- fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without in other countries. All data in the official vehi-
cle documentation takes precedence over
tion optional extras. The figure quoted includes
these data at all times ››› .
75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.
Fuel consumption Special versions, optional equipment fittings
or retro-fitting accessories will increase the
Approved consumption values are derived weight of the vehicle ››› .
from measurements performed or supervised
292
 Technical specifications

Drawbar loads Wheels Note

Technical data
The maximum permitted drawbar load on the We recommend that you ask your Technical
ball coupling of the towing bracket must not Tyre pressure and wheel bolts Service for information about appropriate
exceed 55 kg. wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
Tyre pressure
In the interest of road safety, we recommend
that you always tow approaching the maxi- The sticker with the tyre pressure values can
mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- be found on the back of the left front door
er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar frame. The tyre pressure values given there

Advice
load is too small. are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly
raised pressures of warm tyres ››› .
If the maximum permissible drawbar load
cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar higher
light-weight single axle trailers or tandem than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).
axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1
metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer Wheel bolts

Operation
weight is legally required for the drawbar After the wheels have been changed, the
load. tightening torque of the wheel bolts should
be checked as soon as possible with a torque
WARNING wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steel
● For safety reasons, you should not drive at and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

Emergencies
speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing
a trailer. This also applies in countries where WARNING
higher speeds are permitted.
● Check the tyre pressure at least once per
● Never exceed the maximum trailer weights month. Checking the tyre pressure is very im-
or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle portant. If the tyre pressure is too high or too
load or the permissible total weight is excee- low, there is an increased danger of accidents
ded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle - particularly at high speeds.
may change, leading to accidents, injuries
● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

Safety
and damage to the vehicle.
is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight-
ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and
threads can be damaged.

293
 Technical data

Engine data
Petrol engine 1.0 TSI 70 kW (95 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
70 (95)/5,000-5,500 175/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 173 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,615-1,700a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,165

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 850

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900b)

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 580

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000

a) Varies depending on the features (Splitting).
b) Varies depending on the rear spring.

294
 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.6 MPI 81 kW (110 PS)

Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
81 (110)/5,800 155/3,800-4,000 4/1,598 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Advice
Top speed (km/h) 181 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,595-1,680a)

Operation
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,156

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) b)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) b)

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Emergencies
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 570

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) b)

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) b)

a) Varies depending on the features (Splitting).

b) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

Safety
295
 Technical data

Petrol engine 1.0 TSI 85 kW (115 PS)

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
85 (115)/5,000-5,500 200/2,000-3,500 3/999 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox Automatic

Top speed (km/h) 182 (V) 182 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.6 6.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9.8 10.0

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,625-1,710a) 1,645-1,730a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,187 1,210

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 860 880

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900b) 815-900b)

Permitted roof load (kg) 75 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 540 540

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,000 1,000

Weight of trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% (kg) 800 800

a) Varies depending on the features (Splitting).
b) Varies depending on the rear spring.

296
 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.5 TSI Evo 110 kW (150 CV) ACT ®

Technical data
Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
110 (150)/5,000-6,000 250/1,500-3,500 4/1,498 Super 95 RON/Normal 91 RONa)
a) Slight power loss.

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Advice
Top speed (km/h) 205 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,665-1,750a)

Operation
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,222

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) b)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) b)

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Emergencies
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 610

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200

a) Varies depending on the features (Splitting).
b) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

Safety
297
 Technical data

Diesel engine 1.6 TDI CR 70 kW (95 PS) Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) Fuel
Diesel according to standard EN 590, min.
70 (95)/2,750-4,600 250/1,500-2,600 4/1,598
51 CZ

Outputs and weights Manual gearbox

Top speed (km/h) 172 (V)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.8

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,715-1,800a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,297

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) b)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) b)

Permitted roof load (kg) 75

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 640

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,100

a) Varies depending on the features (Splitting).
b) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

298
 Technical specifications

Dimensions

Technical data
Advice
Operation
Emergencies
Safety
Fig. 246 Dimensions and angles. »

299
 Technical data

››› Fig. 246 ARONA

A Front projection (mm) 803

B Rear projection (mm) 769

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,566

D Length (mm) 4,138

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,503

F Backa) track (mm) 1,486

G Width (mm) 1,780

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,552b)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 190

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 20.1°

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 29.5°

Turning radius (m) 11.0

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
b) Dimension to the roof bars.

300
 Index

Index Adjusting the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Adjustment
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 98
check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
A front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow pro-
ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 tection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 86 Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205, 214 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
function for preventing overtaking in an inside deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 88 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 89 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 88 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
warning and control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Assistance systems
Adaptive Cruise Control Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assis-
AdBlue manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 tance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
maximum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Air recirculation emergency brake assist (Front Assist) . . . . . . . 210
refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 241
Additional consumers (efficiency program) . . . . . 42 Alcantara: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 parking assistance (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Adjusting Alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Alternator Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Audible warning signal
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 153 Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 unfastened safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Anchoring warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Adjusting the front seats the front tow line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
adjusting the lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Adjusting the head restraints Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 183, 185 downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 98 emergency program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
301
 Index

launch control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . 50 Braking Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Changing a bulb
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
steering wheel with gear shift paddles . . . . . . 190 Braking system dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188, 190 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 DRL (daytime running light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 BSD fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 see Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Bulbs interior light and reading light . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
B changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Back seat Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
folding down and raising the back seat back- number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 C rear bulb in the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 rear light in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Belt tensioners fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Car care subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Changing settings
Blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
indication in the external rear view mirror . . . 225 Central locking Checking levels
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 automatic speed-dependent locking . . . . . . . 134 Childproof locks
towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 273, 275 electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 93
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 categorisation into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 key by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 92
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 280 selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 self-locking system to prevent involuntary un- Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 197 locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Chrome parts
Brakes unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
new Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 186 Central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 66
302
 Index

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Coolant

adhesive sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Coolant level
alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Coolant temperature
Easy Connect control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 applying the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Cooling
high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Cooling system
plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 266 braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 279
radio screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 279
rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 depress the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
windows and exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 engine pre-heating/fault system . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
adjusting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 49 D
fan regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
windscreen defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . . . 22
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Detachable ball
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Clutch (warning lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 checking attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Controls and displays placing in standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Coming Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 253
Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 141 standby position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Contact key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Controls on the steering wheel Diesel
without voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
303
 Index

Diesel particulate filter journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Efficiency program

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 additional consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Electrical power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Direction of rotation saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Electrical socket
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 118 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 141
Display messages warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 41 convenience opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 142
speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Driving Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Disposal driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . 181, 183, 184
belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 185
Distance control economic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Electronic differential lock (XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
see Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254, 256, 257 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . 181, 183
Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Driving abroad automatic gearbox emergency program . . . . . 194
Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Door lock cylinder Driving data changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
de-icing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Doors Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 first-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Downhill speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Downhill speed control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Driver Dynamic lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 76, 77, 78 replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Driver-side general instrument panel E Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 E10 vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Emergency braking assistance system
Driver information system Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 122 indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
additional consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 EDL malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
bonnet, rear lid and doors open . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
engine oil temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

304
 Index

Emergency operation Engine fault Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Emergency warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 folding in electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Emission control system Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 275 folding in manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 278 heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8
diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Engine dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 F
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Fault in electronic differential lock (EDL)
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 275 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Engine and ignition temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Faulty bulbs
automatic ignition switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Engine oil pressure Filling the fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Environment First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . 177 environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 environmentally-friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Fluid Level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 273, 275 Environmental tip Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Front Assist
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 279 electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 277 Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Front passenger front airbag
safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
windscreen washer liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Exhaust purification system for vehicles with Front seat
checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 diesel engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Exiting a parking space with Park Assist . . . . . . 239 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 269
G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Extending consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Exterior lighting ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
305
 Index

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
H I
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . . . 200 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fuel tank cap Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 147 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 173
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 173
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 104 Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . . . . 83 see Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Head-protection airbags Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Headlights ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 assist systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
G Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 195
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Gearbox DSG
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Emergency brake assist system (Front Assist) 210
Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 MKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
changing gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 187
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 54, 55 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 selector lever position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
defrosting the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
demisting the windscreen and side windows 168 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . 190
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 167 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
General instrument panel
Heating and fresh air system time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . 41
turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Heating or cooling the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Indications on the screen
warning and indication lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
General overview of the engine compartment . . 275
Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Hydraulic Brake Assist Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
automatic hazard warning lights activation . . 184 Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
306
 Index

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 118 unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 135 number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Keyless Access locking and ignition system parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Keys turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Load compartment in the luggage compartment
Interior bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 130 see Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . 158
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Kick-down Loading the vehicle
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 29 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 L Locking and unlocking
Launch control (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 192 in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
J Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Leaving Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Locking the front passenger door manually . . . . . 16
Journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 143 Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 158
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 automatic lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
changing the bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . 161
K coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 store the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Key-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 see also Loading the luggage compartment . 158
Key by remote control
fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
fog lights with cornering function . . . . . . . . . . 146 Luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . . . . 161
Keyless-Entry
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Keyless-Exit interior light and front reading lights . . . . . . . 111 M
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Keyless Access leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 lights range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Malfunction
Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143, 144 adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
307
 Index

emergency braking assistance system (Front Opening and closing rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Parking aid system
Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 fuel cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 242
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Parking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
MFD in the lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
see Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 141 Parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224, 228
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Parking distance warning system
Multi-collision Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Operating malfunction see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 242
Multi-function display (MFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Parking (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 ParkPilot
My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240, 242
P Particulate filter (diesel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
N Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Noises automatic braking intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Passenger
adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 76, 77, 78
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 conditions for exiting a parking space . . . . . . 239 Passenger-side instrument panel
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 exiting a parking space (only for parallel left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
spaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 right-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
O operating malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Petrol
reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 perpendicular parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 see Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Plastic parts: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 266
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 stopping prematurely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Pollution filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180, 191 Positioning seat belts
On-board computer with Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
see Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
One-touch opening and closing adjusting the display and audible warnings . 244 Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Open and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Pre-heating system
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Parking Aid Preheating the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Press & Drive
the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 braking while manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

308
 Index

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Removing and attaching head restraints . . . . . . 153 Safety
Puncture Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Replacement child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . 22
R Replacement keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 217 Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Radio screen: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Replacing the battery Safety instructions
Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
see Parking assistant (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . 188 head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Rims use of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 92
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Roll-back function Saving fuel
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 RON (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Saving tips (efficiency program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rear bulbs in the side panel Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Seat
disassemble the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Rear fog light Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Seat belt position
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17, 141 Roof luggage rack seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Rear lights in the rear lid attach the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
disassemble the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 84
Rear seat passengers Rubber seals control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 76, 77, 78 care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Rear shelf Run-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 86
store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Running in safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 85
Rear window wiper blades tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 S Selective catalytic reduction
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 see Exhaust purification system (diesel) . . . . 271
fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Selective opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Safe Security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
309
 Index

Selector lever (automatic gearbox) Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Temperature display

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Steel wheel rims engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 195 Temporary spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Textiles: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 electromechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Tightening torque
Side airbags power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 188, 190
Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Steering wheel Tire Mobility Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . . 190 sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Special characteristics Steering wheel height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30
tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 30
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 of front door panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 100
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
display message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 right front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Towing
operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 storage pocket in the seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 blind spot detector (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Switch Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Towing bracket
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 retrofitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Start-Stop system Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . 31, 173 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 System Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Towing device bracket
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 operation and care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . 203 T Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 100
switching off and on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Taking care of your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
the engine does not switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Technical data Tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . 181, 182, 183
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174 Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
after the fuel tank has run dry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 256
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

310
 Index

electrical socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Vehicle documentation compartment . . . . . . . . 156
hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow system 140
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 U Vehicle paintwork
rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Unfastening your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Unfasten the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
tow rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Unlocking and locking polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Trailer turn signals by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 260
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 with the central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Vehicle tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Transporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Unlocking manually housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Transporting items rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Vehicle underbody
fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Upholstery: cleaning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Transporting objects USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 W
Turn signals V Warning messages
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Tyre Mobility Set yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Vehicle
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Warning symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Tyre Mobility System see also Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . 121
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285, 293 Washing
raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . . 135
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Tyre repair kit adhesive sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 281
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 What negatively affects driving safety? . . . . . . . . 75
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 285, 287 Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 293
electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
with directional tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Vehicle care
with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 287
windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 73
311
 Index

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283, 293

central wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 66
X
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
removing and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Wheel trim
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Windows
electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 141
removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . . 100
Windscreen defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 149
Windscreen washer water
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
filling amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Windscreen wiper blades
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 149
lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
replacing the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Winter conditions
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
thawing windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Winter tyres
sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

312
About this manual The equipment marked with an aster-
isk* is fitted as standard only in certain
For the sake of the environment

versions, and is only supplied as op- Texts preceded by this symbol contain rele-
This manual contains a description of the vant information concerning environmental
equipment supplied with the vehicle at the tional extras for some versions, or are
protection.
time this manual was published. Some of the only offered in certain countries.
units described herein will not be available ® All registered marks are indicated with
Note
until a later date or are only available in cer- ®. Although the copyright symbol does
tain markets. not appear, it is a copyrighted mark. Texts preceded by this symbol contain additio-
nal information.
Because this is a general manual for the >> The section is continued on the follow-
ARONA, some of the equipment and functions ing page.
that are described in this manual are not in- This manual is divided into six large parts,
cluded in all types or variants of the model; Important warnings on a given page which are:
they may vary or be modified depending on Detailed contents on a given page 1. The essentials
the technical requirements and on the mar- 2. Safety
ket; this is in no way deceptive advertising. General information on a given page
3. Emergencies
The illustrations are intended as a general Emergency information on a given page 4. Operation
guide and may vary from the equipment fitted
in your vehicle in some details. 5. Tips
WARNING
The steering indications (left, right, forward, 6. Technical data
Texts preceded by this symbol contain infor-
reverse) appearing in this manual refer to the mation on safety. They warn you about possi- At the end of this manual, there is a detailed SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under-
normal driving movements of the vehicle ex- ble dangers of accident or injury. alphabetical index that will help you quickly stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason
cept when otherwise indicated. find the information you require. no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
The audiovisual material only is intended to CAUTION All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error
help users to understand certain car function- or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Texts with this symbol draw your attention to
alities better. It does not replace the instruc- Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
potential sources of damage to your vehicle.
tion manual. Please use the instruction manu-
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
al to obtain more comprehensive information
and indications. All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.17
 OWNER’S
MANUAL
Arona
6F9012720BB
Inglés 6F9012720BB (11.17)

Arona Inglés
­­ (11.17)
SEAT recommends SEAT recommends
SEAT GENUINE OIL Castrol EDGE Professional